NOTICE INVITING TENDER
(NIT)
GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH
INFRASTRUCTURE CORPORATION OF ANDHRA PRADESH LTD. (INCAP)
3rd Floor, FDC Complex, AC Guards, Hyderabad – 500028
Email: incap@incap.co.in Ph: 040-23321771
Andhra Pradesh Fiber Grid – Phase I
“e”NIT.No .INCAP(AP)/P/Optical Fiber Grid / 62/2014
Dated: 07-07-2015
NAME OF WORK
:
NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE
CONTRACTOR WHO DOWNLOADED THE
BID DOCUMENTS
:
1
Implementation and management of Aerial Optical
Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles /
Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber
network infrastructure in the state of Andhra
Pradesh
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
INDEX
S. NO.
DETAILS
Page No.
1
NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) Inclusive of
Eligibility Criteria and Scope of Work
5
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
2
A)
General
28
B)
Tender Document
38
C)
Preparation of Tenders
39
D)
Submission of Tenders
42
E)
Tender Opening and Evaluation
44
F)
Award of Contract
48
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
3
4
A)
General
50
B)
Time for completion
54
C)
Inspection, Testing & Installation
58
D)
Cost Control
60
E)
Completing the Contract
64
F)
Special Conditions
66
73
Technical Bid
Price Bid
5
i)
Schedule - A
74
ii)
Schedule - B
79
6
Technical documents to be submitted by the bidder in
support of BoQ and Specifications
80
7
Checklist of key documents to be submitted
81
Technical Specifications & requisite features /
characterstics of the components
82
8
Annexures
I.
9
Network Route Map & Location of PoPs
178
Forms of Tender
179
III.
Guidelines for installation of Aerial ADSS
Optical Fiber Cable
197
IV.
Quality Assurance
200
II.
2
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
Installation Methodology
201
Acceptance Test Procedure
204
Verification & Measurement of works done
212
Project Timelines, SLA & Penalties
219
Roles and responsibilities of Stakeholders
224
3
DEFINITIONS
1.
INCAP: Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited, a Govt. of A.P. Undertaking
2.
Contractor (OR) Implementation Agency: The successful bidder with whom agreement would be entered into for
executing the work.
3.
The Authority (OR) Client (OR) Department: Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP or any other official /
agency authorized by VC & MD, INCAP or any authorized Government department / agency / Govt. Corporation.
The Authority will enter into agreement with the contractor i.e., the successful bidder for executing the works and will
administer the contract.
4.
Project Monitoring Agency / Project Management Agency (PMA): The agency authorized by the Authority to
test and monitor the quantities / quality of the works and report on the progress and measure / certify the works etc.
5.
Tender Inviting Officer: Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP, Hyderabad
6.
NOC: Network Operations Center
7.
PoP: Point of Presence
4
GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH
INFRASTRUCTURE CORPORATION OF ANDHRA PRADESH LTD. (INCAP)
Andhra Pradesh Fiber Grid – Phase I
***
1. NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT)
NOTICE No. INCAP (AP)/P/Optic Fiber Grid/62/2014, Dated: 07.07.2015
:
Implementation and management of Aerial Optical
Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles /
Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber
network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh
1.
Name of the work
2.
Estimated Contract Value (ECV) of work :
put to tender
INR 3,29,00,00,000/- (INR 329 Crores)
3.
Period of completion of work
:
4.
Form of contract
:
9 months Implementation +
12 months Operations & Maintenance
Lumpsum
5.
Cost of Bid Document
:
INR 25000/- + VAT INR 3500/-
6.
E.M.D. to be paid in the form of Demand :
Draft in favor of VC & MD INCAP,
Hyderabad or unconditional & irrevocable
Bank Guarantee in favour of VC & MD,
INCAP, Hyderabad obtained from
Nationalized Bank or any Scheduled
commercial bank, valid for a minimum
period of 120 days from the last date for
submission of bids.
INR 3,29,00,000/-
7.
Bid Validity
120 days from the last date of submission of bids
8.
a) Period for downloading of tender : 09-07-2015 at 15.00 Hrs. to
documents
30-07-2015 up to 15:00 Hrs.
:
b) Pre-bid meeting
:
At 15:00 Hrs on 17-07-2015 at INCAP Office, Hyderabad
c) Last date of Submission of Bid
:
At 15:00 Hrs on 31-07-2015
d) Date of opening of Technical Bid
:
At 16:00 Hrs on 31-07-2015
e) Date of opening of Price Bid
:
At 16:00 Hrs on 05-08-2015
5
9. Procedure for Bid Submission:
The bidder shall submit his response through Bid submission to the tender on eProcurement platform at
www.eprocurement.gov.in by following the procedure given below:
The bidder would be required to register on the e-procurement market place www.eprocurement.gov.in or
https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in and submit their bids online. Offline bids shall not be entertained by the
Tender Inviting Authority for the tenders published in eprocurement platform.
The bidders shall submit their eligibility and qualification details, Technical bid, Financial bid etc., in the
online standard formats displayed in eProcurement web site. The bidders shall upload the scanned copies of all
the relevant certificates, documents etc., in support of their eligibility criteria/technical bids and other
certificates/documents with clear readability, in the eProcurement web site. The bidder shall sign on the
statements, documents, certificates, uploaded by the agency, owning responsibility for their
correctness/authenticity.
a) Registration with eProcurement platform:
For registration and online bid submission bidders may contact HELP DESK on
www.eprocurement.gov.in or https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in
b) Digital Certificate authentication:
The bidder shall authenticate the bid with his Digital Certificate for submitting the bid electronically on
eProcurement platform and the bids not authenticated by digital certificate of the bidder will not be accepted
on the eProcurement platform.
For obtaining Digital Signature Certificate, you may please contact:
Andhra Pradesh Technology Services Limited
BRKR Bhavan, B-Block
Tankbund Road , Hyderabad-500022
Phone: +91-40-23220305
Fax: +91-40-23228057
(OR)
You may please contact Registration Authorities of any Certifying Authorities in India. The list of CAs are
available by clicking the link
https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in/DigitalCertificate/signature.html
c) Hard copies:
i) Vide ref. G.O.Ms.No.174, I&CAD dept dated:1-9-2008, submission of original hard copies of the uploaded
scanned copies of DD/BG towards EMD by participating bidders to the tender inviting authority before the
opening of the price bid is dispensed forthwith.
ii) All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in eProcurement system and this will
be the primary requirement to consider the bid responsive.
iii) The department shall carry out the technical evaluation solely based on the uploaded
certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the eProcurement system and open the price bids of the
responsive bidders.
iv) The department will notify the successful bidder for submission of original hardcopies of all the uploaded
documents and DD/BG towards EMD prior to entering into agreement.
v) The successful bidder shall invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD, Certificates/Documents
of the uploaded scanned copies to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into agreement, either
personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date shall be the
responsibility of the successful bidder. The department will not take any responsibility for any delay in
receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards EMD, Certificates/Documents from the successful bidder
before the stipulated time.
6
On receipt of documents, the department shall ensure the genuinity of the DD/BG towards EMD and all other
certificates/documents uploaded by the bidder in eProcurement system in support of the qualification criteria
before concluding the agreement.
d) Deactivation of Bidders
(Ref: The GO. Ms. No. 174 -I&CAD dated: 1-9-2008):
If any successful bidder fails to submit the original hard copies of uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG
towards EMD within stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the
hardcopies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders
on eProcurement platform for a period of 3 years. The eProcurement system would deactivate the user ID of
such defaulting bidder based on the trigger/recommendation by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system.
Besides this, the department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such
defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the
development schemes taken up by the government. Other conditions as per tender document are applicable.
The bidder is requested to get a confirmed acknowledgement from the Tender Inviting Authority a proof of
Hardcopies submission to avoid any discrepancy.
e) Payment of Transaction Fee:
It is mandatory for all the participant bidders from 1st January 2006 to electronically pay a prescribed nonrefundable Transaction fee to M/s.APTS, the service provider through "Payment Gateway Service on EProcurement platform". The Electronic Payment Gateway accepts all Master and Visa Credit Cards issued by
any bank and Direct Debit facility/Net Banking of ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis Bank to facilitate the transaction.
This is in compliance as per G.O.Ms. 13 dated 07.05.2006.
f) Corpus Fund:
As per GO MS No.4, user departments shall collect 0.04% of ECV (estimated contract value) with a cap of
Rs.10,000 (Rupees ten thousand only) for all works with ECV upto Rs.50 Crores, and Rs.25,000/- (Rupees
twenty five thousand only) for works with ECV above Rs.50 Crores, from successful bidders on eProcurement
platform before entering into agreement / issue of purchase orders, towards eprocurement fund in favour of
Managing Director, APTS. There shall not be any charge towards eProcurement fund in case of works, goods
and services with ECV less than and upto Rs. 10 lakhs
g) Tender Document:
The bidder is requested to download the tender document and read all the terms and conditions mentioned in
the tender Document and seek clarification if any from the Tender Inviting Authority. Any offline bid
submission clause in the tender document could be neglected.
The bidder has to keep track of any changes by viewing the Addendum/Corrigenda issued by the Tender
Inviting Authority from time-to-time in the e-Procurement platform. The Department calling for tenders shall
not be responsible for any claims/issues arising out of this.
h) Bid Submission Acknowledgement:
The bidder shall complete all the processes and steps required for Bid submission. The system will generate an
acknowledgement with a unique bid submission number after completing all the prescribed steps and
processes by the bidder. Users may also note that the bids for which an acknowledgement is not generated by
the e-procurement system are treated as invalid or not saved in the system. Such invalid bids are not made
available to the Tender Inviting Authority for processing the bids. The Government of AP is not responsible
for incomplete bid submission by users.
7
10. The bidders may contact the CGM Technical, INCAP, Hyderabad for any further information / clarifications
on e-procurement.
11. The bidders need to register on the electronic procurement market place of Government of Andhra Pradesh
i.e., www.eprocurement.gov.in. On registration in the e-procurement market place they will be provided with
a user ID and password by the system using which they can submit their bids on line.
12. While registering on the e-procurement market place, bidders need to scan and upload the required documents
as per the tender requirements on to their profile.The e-procurement market place provides an online selfservice registration facility to such of the Contractors who are already registered with respective participating
departments for supply of specified goods and services.
13. All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in e-Procurement system and this will be
the primary requirement to consider the bid as responsive. The Department shall carry out the Technical bid
evaluation solely based on the uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the e-procurement
system and open the price bids of the eligible and responsive bidders. The Department will notify the
successful bidder for submission of original hard copies of all uploaded documents and DD/BG towards EMD
prior to entering into agreement.
14. The bidders shall furnish a declaration in online stating that the soft copies uploaded by them are genuine.
Any incorrectness/deviation noticed will be viewed seriously and apart from cancelling the work duly
forfeiting the EMD, criminal action will be initiated including suspension of business.
8
15.Eligibility Criteria:
The Applicants have to fulfill all the eligibility criteria stipulated as below.
The Price bid of only those applicants who satisfy all the eligibility conditions and who score the minimum
stipulated marks or more in the evaluation of technical bid will be considered.
Important Note: To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service
providers, organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not be
eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member
S.
No
A
Documentary Proof to be
submitted
Criterion
Criterion to be met by
General Eligibility
In case of Single Bidder:
Copy of valid Certificate of
incorporation issued by competent
authority in India
The bidder should be either a
In case of Consortium:
company (single legal entity) or a
consortium of companies.
Copy of valid certificate of
incorporation issued by competent
The company shall be an
authority in India by each of the Bidder in case of single entity
incorporated entity under the
consortium members
bidding
Companies Act 1956 / 2013.
1
2
Valid agreement on INR 100/- Stamp
In case of consortium, the applicant
Paper concluded among all the
consortium shall submit a valid
members of the consortium duly
agreement among the members.
stamped and signed by the
Authorized Signatories of the
The maximum number of members
companies under consortium dated
allowed in a consortium is four (4)
prior to the submission of bid.
including Lead member. All the
consortium members shall be jointly
The agreement shall clearly specify
& severally liable.
the details of Lead member and other
consortium members and outline the
financial
strengths,
technical
strengths and the role and
responsibility of each of the
members of the consortium.
(OR)
All the Consortium members
individually and jointly, in
case the bidder is a
consortium
Copy of a valid Certificate of
incorporation issued by competent
Bidder, in case of single entity
authority in India (for each of the
bidding.
The bidder should be registered members in case of consortium)
under the Companies Act, 1956 /
OR
2013 and should have been in Copy of audited annual accounts for
operational existence with relevant the last 3 financial years i.e., FY
All the members of the
experience for at least the last three 2012-13, FY 2013-14 & FY 2014-15
Consortium individually, in
(3) financial years
case the bidder is a
Note: In case the final audited annual
consortium
accounts reports are not available for
FY 2014-15, the provisional
9
financial statements of FY 2014-15
duly certified by the statutory auditor
of the company shall be submitted.
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
3
Certified copy of valid service tax OR
The bidder should have valid service and VAT registration certificates
tax and VAT registration in India
issued by competent authority in All the members of the
India
Consortium individually, in
case the bidder is a
consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
4
The bidder should not have been
OR
blacklisted by any Govt. department Self-declaration by the bidder duly
or any PSU in India as on the date of signed by the authorized signatory
All the members of the
bid submission
Consortium individually, in
case the bidder is a
consortium
B
Financial Capacity Eligibility
5
Average annual turnover of the
bidder for the last three financial
years should be at least INR 350
crores from activities related to
provision of IT Systems Integration
services / IT services / Network
services / Telecom services / Fiber
cable
laying
services
/ Certificate from statutory auditor of
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV the Bidder mentioning the turnover
Headend Services in India
from the activities related to
provision of IT Systems Integration
In case the bidder is a consortium, services / IT services / Network
the sum of the average annual services / Telecom services / Fiber
turnover of all the
consortium cable
laying
services
/
members for the last three financial NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
years from activities related to Headend Services in India in the last
provision of IT Systems Integration three financial years.
services / IT services / Network
services / Telecom services / Fiber If the final audited accounts for FY
cable
laying
services
/ 2014-15 are not available, then the
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV data based on the provisional
Headend Services in India shall be accounts certified by the statutory
at least INR 350 crores and;
auditor of the company will be
considered.
The average annual turnover of the
lead member for the last three
financial years from activities
related to provision of IT Systems
Integration services / IT services /
Network services / Telecom services
/ Fiber cable laying services /
10
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
OR
The
members
of
the
consortium individually and
jointly with the provision that
the average annual turnover of
the lead member for the last
three years from the activities
mentioned shall be at least
INR 100 crores while that of
the
other
members
individually shall not be less
than INR 50 crores.
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
Headend Services in India shall be
at least INR 100 crores.
Other consortium members’ annual
average turnover from the relevant
activities shall not be less than INR
50 Crores individually in the last
three financial years.
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
The bidder should have positive
networth of at least INR 100 crores
as on 31st March, 2015.
6
C
In case the bidder is a consortium,
the combined networth of all the
entities shall be at least INR 100
crores as on 31st March, 2015. The
networth of the lead member of the
consortium shall be at least INR 50
crores.
OR
The
members
of
the
consortium
jointly
/
Certificate from Statutory Auditor of
individually
with
the
the Company stating the networth of
provision that the combined
the Bidder as on 31st March, 2015.
networth of all the members
shall be INR 100 crores as on
31st March, 2015. The
networth of the lead member
of the consortium shall be at
least INR 50 crores.
Technical Capacity Eligibility
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
7
The bidder should have the
experience of laying / pulling and
installing optical fiber cable (OFC)
for a length of at least 1500 Kms in
India after 1st April, 2005
Certified copy of the relevant work OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
from the client(s) stating that the The
members
of
the
work(s) has been completed
consortium
jointly
on
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
8
The bidder should have the
experience of setting up and
maintaining atleast one Network
Operating Centre services with
atleast 50 clients on WAN in India
after 1st April, 2005
9
The bidder should have the
experience
in
implementing
Operating Support System &
Business Support System (OSS /
BSS) in communications / internet
service sectors in India serving a
subscriber base of atleast 50,000 in
India after 1st April, 2005
Certified copy of the relevant work OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
from the client(s) stating that the The
members
of
the
work(s) has been completed
consortium
jointly
on
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
Certified copy of the relevant work OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
from the client(s) stating that the The
members
of
the
work(s) has been completed
consortium
jointly
on
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
11
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
10
The bidder should have the
experience in setting up and
maintaining Wide Area Network /
Points of Presence and its related
electronics equipment in at least 50
different locations in India after 1st
April, 2005
OR
Certified copy of the relevant work
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
The
members
of
the
from the client(s) stating that the
consortium
jointly
on
work(s) has been completed
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
11
The bidder should have the
experience of setting up and
managing operations of atleast one
Cable TV Headend of minimum 200
channels in India after 1st April,
2005
OR
Certified copy of the relevant work
order(s) and certificate(s)with details
The
members
of
the
from the client(s) stating that the
consortium
jointly
on
work(s) has been completed
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Note:
1) In case the bidder is a consortium, all correspondence related to this project shall be done with /
through the lead member.
2) No correspondence shall be allowed from the bidder after the opening of the bid documents.
12
Scope of the Work
Summary:
 Setting up a state-wide high speed, optical fiber infrastructure leveraging the existing assets of the electricity
transmission/distribution companies such as electric poles/substation etc.
 Establishing a scalable infrastructure and network with a business model of Infrastructure as a service (IAAS)
and Platform as a service (PAAS) on a non-discriminatory basis to ISPs, TSPs, MSOs and content providers
etc with their services being extended to last mile user through Points of Presence (PoPs) at around 2449
places, mainly at substations and further utilizing the existing LCO network wherever available.
 Operating and maintaining the entire network infrastructure under the guidance / control of the Authority for a
period of 1 year from the date of operation and acceptance after completion of all the works.
(The route map and network design / architecture will be provided by the Authority and the same have been
included in this tender document)
 The contractor need to propose a solution that meets the objectives and SLAs of the Project. Contractor will be
responsible to meet the service levels as mentioned in the tender document. Contractor is also allowed to
improvise the architecture and other components of the solution so that the project meets its objectives.
Architecture
The Network Route Maps – for the entire state and also each of the 13 districts and the proposed locations of the
PoPs have been furnished in this tender document under Annexure I.
1.1 High Level Network Topology Considerations
1.1.1 Aggregation Network Layer
1.1.1.1 Dist. HQ to Mandals Backbone
1.1.1.2 Ring Architecture with at least 2Gbps per Mandal
1.1.1.3 Inter-Dist. 100G DWDM Network to serve aggregated capacity as well as come over distance
limitations, expandable to 200gbps.
1.1.2
Total 13 Dists - To be covered with the NOC establishment at Visakhapatnam and PoPs at around
2449 locations.
1.1.3
Total PoPs
NOC
District PoPs
Zonal PoPs
Mandal PoPs
Substation PoPs
Total
1
10
49
605
1784
2449
General Network Design Principles:
13
a) The Overall NETWORK architecture shall be designed such that the latency (from both SHQ to GPON and
any GPON to any GPON) is less than 4 ms for any GPON pair or any GPON to SHQ plus transmission
latency of 5ms/1000 km which shall be computed using the shortest GIS path on the network for the given
pair of nodes.
b) The Overall NETWORK architecture shall be designed such that the convergence time for the Network
shall be less than 100 ms.
NOC Architecture:
International Xchange
-
National Xchange
Caching servers
BGP Load balancing
Internet Routers
-
Firewall cum IPS
Support Servers
Support Server Pool
(Antivirus, NNM,
DNS,BRAS,OSS/BS ,
HelpDesk, Log
Correlator, etc)
Core Switches
Firewall
Data Center
Content servers
WDM_2
WDM_1
District
District
WDM District Ring
WDM District Ring
District
District
District
District
District
District
1.2 Network Design Considerations
1.2.1 DWDM ROADM
1.2.1.1 100G Point to Point from every Dist. to NoC.
1.2.1.2 80g shared Distirct to Zonal Nodes.
1.2.2
OLA (Optical Amplifier) sites need to be identified and created from Power, Space perspective.
1.2.3
0.3dB/Km loss assumed with distances based on Google Maps
14
1.2.4
IPoDWDM used for 10GE reducing electronics footprint
1.2.5
Multi degree ROADM based solution with 100G SD-FEC transponders for better performance
1.2.6
Design simulation is with 40Ch system and OLA sites can be minimized by reducing the number
of channels in the design
1.3 Inter-District DWDM Design Topology View
1.4 Inter-District Topology and Design
15
•
Key Benefits of the Architecture
100G ROADM based architecture providing flexibility of creating partial/full mesh in the inter-District
layer over physical ring topology for additional reliability and traffic routing
•
Protection at IP/MPLS layer
•
IP & Optical convergence with optimization of network resources
1.5 One District Topology & Design
16
Key Benefits of the Architecture
•
•
High Reliability
•
Zonal Node Rings – 100 G capacity protected
•
Mandal Rings Single Homed or can also be Dual Homed for added reliability depending upon the
fiber topology between Zonal Node and Mandals
•
Modular Chassis based District & Mandal Nodes for added reliability with full redundancy
Services Oriented Architecture
•
•
Both L2 & L3 VPNs, IP Multicast VPNs/Routing along with multipoint services
Quality of Experience
•
H-QoS capabilities based on High number of Queues per GE/10GE/100GE port and not limiting to
ONLY 8 queues per port only
•
20Gbps per Zonal Node over Ring Topology
•
100G DWDM ROADM based Inter-Distt. P2P over Ring
•
For added reach and capacity
17
1.6 Expanded view of all POP locations
1.7 Expanded view of Remote locations
18
Mandal Hub PoP Expanded View
Mandal PoP Expanded
4Channel DWDM
4x10GE
DWDM
10GE
10GE Ring to
Mandal Hub With
40 Km SFP
10GE
IP/MPLS Node
with 8 x 10GE &
8 x 1 GE
interfaces
nx1GE
interfaces for
Point of
Interconnect
(POI)
10GE
10GE Rings
to Mandal with
40 Km SFP
10GE
IP/MP
2 x 10
GE
1/10GE interfaces for
Point of Interconnect or to OLT
1.8 Summary
1.8.1 Services Oriented Architecture for IP Broadband Applications
1.8.1.1 L2, L3 VPNs, P2P, P2MP and MP2MP VPNs support, IP Multicast VPNs support for Video
1.8.1.2 Any Service, Any Connectivity support
1.8.1.3 Per Customer Per Service QoS support
1.8.1.4 Traffic Engineering
1.8.1.5 IPv6 Ready
1.8.1.6 SDN, NFv Ready
1.8.1.7 DWDM Core Scalable to Terabits of Capacity
1.8.2
Distt. Level Chassis based IP/MPLS Node (1+1 Nodes)
1.8.2.1 Min. 2x100GE,24x10GE and 20x1GE per node
1.8.2.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS
(beyond 8 queues per port)
1.8.3
Zonal Node Level Chassis based IP/MPLS node
1.8.3.1 Min. 8x10GE, 8xGE ports
1.8.3.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS
(beyond 8 queues per port)
1.8.4
Mandal Level Chassis based IP/MPLS node configuration
1.8.4.1 Min. 2x10GE, 12xGE ports
19
1.8.4.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS
(beyond 8 queues per port)
1.8.5
Realistic Capacity Planning model required to ascertain right capacities day 1 and expandability in
future
A. Network Implementation
1.1 Route Survey & Network Design Validation
The Contractor shall validate the route map & network design supplied by the Govt. authority and submit
compliance / deviation summary of the implementation sites, in due agreement with INCAP / IT, E&C
Department or any designated agency by the IT, E&C Department.
Note: All route maps are subject to minor corrections due to local variations. As part of the Route Survey and
Network Design Validation activity, the Contractor should validate and submit the final route maps and
network design.
1.2 Fiber Implementation:
a) Supply, delivery to site, unloading, storing and handling of 24 Fiber ADSS along with fittings and
associated items as required
b) Supply, delivery to site, unloading, storing and handling of outdoor type, pole mountable, vandalism proof,
Fiber Optic Distribution Panel (FODP) along with associated items as required.
c) All fittings, accessories and associated works for the proper and safe installation of ADSS on electrical
assets such as poles.
d) Stringing / laying, jointing, live line installation, testing and commissioning of All Dielectric Self
Supporting (ADSS) optical fiber and its accessories.
e) Training of Engineers / linesmen, both in supplier’s premises and at site, in the installation, operation and
maintenance of the optical fiber cables.
f) The estimated fiber optic cable length requirements are indicated in the BoQ and reflected in the Price
Schedule.
Note: The Contractor shall be paid for the actual quantity supplied and installed at site. The measurement
for quantity to be paid will be based on horizontal route length of the line and the price quoted by the
Bidder shall accordingly consider sag, unequal support heights, wastage, splicing, looping etc.
g) The color-code for 24 core ADSS OFC cable shall be as follows:
i) The core backbone OFC shall be identified by using Black color coatings
ii) All OFC cables shall be embossed with name as directed by the competent authority.
h) The existing OPGW aerial optical fiber cable laid on 440KV / 220KV transmission lines laid by
APTRANSCO also will be used to connect to the State / District rings on a long haul to an extent of around
900 Kms wherever necessary as per field conditions. The details / location of such OPGW cable will be
provided by the Authority during the execution of the works. Wherever required, optical line amplifiers
shall be installed on the same cable at the appropriate distances considering the line losses.
1.3 Core Backbone – Mesh Topology
a) The core backbone mesh topology shall be constructed using over-head 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables
(ADSS).
b) The Core shall utilize a 1300 Gigabit IPMPLS Network.
c) The core architecture shall be formed in full mesh topology with three (3) fibers cut redundancy.
d) 2 cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity.
e) The maximum fiber distance between two POPs / Optical line Amplifier , as measured by optical time
domain meter (OTDR) shall not exceed 70 KMs.
f) The core switches shall be installed at District POP locations, shall maintain a switching backplane of 1.3
Tbps.
20
g) Loop of 10 meters of OFC shall be left on pole in every 1 Km distance.
h) There shall not be more than 35 Splice Joint closures installed between two (2) POP’s / optical amplifiers,
during hand over of Network to client.
i) All the 24 cores shall be spliced &Joined in the Core Backbone ring.
j) A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles
k) The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring
l) As per network design & route map given in this document.
1.4 Zonal Aggregation Backbone – Ring Topology
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
The Aggregation rings shall be constructed using 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables (ADSS).
The Aggregation ring shall utilize a 80 Gigabit IPMPLS technology.
The Aggregation architecture shall be formed using ring topology.
2 of the cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity and these cores
Zonal Aggregation Backbone ring and the same shall not be used for any other purpose apart from the
stated.
The maximum fiber length for aggregation ring, as measured by optical time domain meter (OTDR) shall
not exceed 70 KMs.
A loop of 10 meters of OFC shall be left on pole in every 1 Km distance.
There shall not be more than 35 Splice Joint closures installed between two aggregations POP’s during
hand over of Network to client.
All the 24 cores shall be spliced & joined in the Zonal Aggregation Backbone ring
A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles
The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring
As per network design & route map as given in this document.
1.5 Access Network – Ring / Spur Topology
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
The Access ring shall be constructed using a 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables (ADSS).
The Access ring shall utilize a 10 Gigabit IPMPLS technology.
The Spur to a single PoP shall utilize 2 Gigabit IPMPLS technology.
2 cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity.
The connectivity to Mandal POPs to be done by using separate cores of access ring OFC and the same shall
not be used for connecting users. Not more than combination of 5 locations of Mandal locations should be
on one ring. Such Cores shall terminate on a layer 3 switch in Mandal level offices / Sub-Stations.
The maximum fiber distance between two access switches, as measured by optical time as measured by
optical time domain meter (OTDR) shall not exceed 25 KMs.
A loop of ten (10) meters of OFC shall be left in every 500 mtr of distance.
All the 24 cores shall be spliced & joined in the Access ring
A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles.
OLT switches will be deployed for providing connectivity to users.
The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring
As per network design & route map as given in this document.
Fiber cores which were used in core ring / zonal ring / Access ring and spares provided shall not be left free
without splicing & joining enroute PoP. Rest of the unutilized cores at the PoPs shall be left free for future
usage.
21
1.6 Establishment of PoP at specified Locations
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
1.6.3
1.6.3.1
1.6.4
1.6.4.1
1.6.5
1.6.5.1
Point of Presence (PoP) shall be strategically located at various points across the state that are predefined
and shall be made available to establish the required infrastructure to enable networking services
A total of 10 District PoPs
These 10 PoPs are high level 100 Gigabit aggregation PoPs. A civil infrastructure of approximately 1000
SFT shall be provided to erect the required racks, air-conditioning, and redundant power supply,
networking equipment and working space. Electricity connection shall be provisioned. A proper earthing
needs to be provided.
A total of 49 Zonal PoPs
These 49 PoPs at the Zonal Aggregation Points of 20 Gigabit aggregation PoPs. A rack/s, redundant power
supply and networking equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided.
A total of 605 Mandal PoPs
These 605 PoPs are located at the Mandal Aggregation Points of 2 Gigabit. A rack/s, redundant power
supply and networking equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided.
A total of 1784 Substation/Access PoPs
These 1784 PoPs are located at the Substations. A rack/s, redundant power supply and networking
equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided.
Note: Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning of the entire network.
1.7 GPON Network
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
Provision of GPON Last mile connectivity
Enable Triple Play with data, voice & video
Enable IP MPEG4 Streaming
Enable Digital QAM Integration for the LCOs at 630 PoPs and distribution to the rest of 1784 PoPs
1.8 Network Operating Centre (NOC) & Headend Installation
NOC requirements







NOC to be established at Visakhapatnam in a space provided by the Authority complying the best-in-class
tier2 standards.
NOC act as centralized management on full-network resource and service inventory to improve utilization
of in-service resources.
Provide key correlation analysis for network fault processing to improve network fault processing
efficiency
Provide the function of automatic service design and resource distribution.
Provide performance & trend development analysis of network equipment and impact range of network
fault and supply end-to-end service quality management & control, which control network & service
quality continuously and enhance customer satisfaction
Provide FOA (Field Operation Assistance) for field engineers.
Contractor needs to survey the site; design the layout of the site including all the standard furnishings etc.
to make the NOC operations. The complete BOQ of the work to be done at NOC needs to be submitted
along with the design and approval to be taken from the Authority before start of the work.
22
Key functions
 Centralized Operation
 Network performance engagement
 Planning and Engineering
 Service management
 Service provisioning
 NOC Operation
 Spare Management
Field Operation
 Connectivity
 IT and Security
 Provisioning on Field.
Core Infrastructure Requirements
 MUXs / DWDM / OTN Transmission Infra
 Capable of connecting to 2 International Internet Gateways
 Capable of connecting to 2 National Internet Exchange Gateways
 Setup IPV6 Network
 ISP Peering & Up Stream Routers
 Caching Servers
 BRAS ( Broadband Remote access server)
 CDN & Video streaming system
 Access Controller for Wifi Hot Spots
 Core Switches for traffic aggregation
 NMS (Network management system) for unlimited number of users / equipment’s to be monitored.
 OSS & BSS – A multi-tenant system to be designed with 20,00,000 subscribers for 1st year that can be
enhanced to 50,00,000 subscribers over a period of 3 years. However the licenses need to be supplied for
unlimited number of users.
 Network inventory & GIS management system
ISP peering and Upstream Infrastructure
 Peering & Upstream Routers & Switches to be used the cross connects need to be extended from Meet me
room till Network Rack
Core Routers
 2 Core routers operating in High Availability mode
Core Switches
 2 Core Switches which will be connected on mesh mode to have high availability.
 All the Servers ( BSS/OSS, CRM, Mail Server , Web Server), BRAS & FW devices will be connected to
these switches .
Core Infrastructure Connectivity
 All the servers will be kept in DMZ zone behind Firewalls
Fire walls
 4 FWs to be kept and all should be in HA mode, all the servers WEB, Mail , OSS/BSS, CRM, NMS can be
kept on DMZ zone.
Local peering
 Has to integrate peering with Google, Akamai etc
23


100Gig of domestic BW to be planned initially and can be expanded to 300Gig as per requirements.
All the expansions on Multiple of 100 Gig
Authentication, Authorization & Accounting (AAA)
Authentication
•
Refers to confirmation that a user who is requesting a service is a valid user.
•
Accomplished via the presentation of an identity and credentials.
•
Examples of credentials include passwords, one-time tokens, digital certificates, and phone numbers
(calling/called).
Authorization
•
Refers to the granting of specific types of service (including "no service") to the users based on their
authentication.
•
May be based on restrictions, for example, time-of-day restrictions, or physical location restrictions, or
restrictions against multiple logins by the same user.
•
Examples of services include IP address filtering, address assignment, route assignment, encryption, QoS /
differential services, bandwidth control/traffic management, etc.
Accounting
•
Refers to the tracking of the consumption of network resources by users.
•
Typical information that is gathered in accounting include the identity of the user, the nature of the service
delivered, when the service began, and when it ended.
•
Used for management, planning, billing, etc.
Digital Headend for Cable TV
 Establishing required infrastructure for a 250 Channel Digital Headend and integration of DRM
 Capable of both SD & HD streaming
 Installation of Antenna farms
 Establishment of Edgecoms in Mandal PoPs
 Integration of video streams on GPON interface
B. Network Operations & Maintenance (O&M)
Scope of Work for O&M for 1 year
1.1. Operations & Maintenance for the entire scope of work
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
The Contractor shall undertake the operations and maintenance of the aerial fiber network
infrastructure for a period of one (1) year period commencing immediately after the
operational acceptance. Operational Acceptance shall be given on successful completion of full
acceptance test (FAT).
During this period, the Contractor shall replace or repair all defective parts and shall be responsible
for maintaining an operational system to achieve the availability of 99% uptime of NOC &
related Software Applications and a 98% uptime per PoP ( to be monitored on monthly basis).
The Contractor shall deploy sufficient skilled man power for the maintenance & operations of the
entire system defined in the scope.
The Contractor maintenance engineer shall report to the site for restoration of the system within 12
hrs at the District Aggregation PoPs and 24 hrs for the rest of the PoPs, including travel time in
case of complete breakdown of the link. Contractor shall submit a comprehensive maintenance
strategy for the maintenance of the system.
24
v.
For this period which commences immediately after operational acceptance, the actual outage
frequency and the availability achieved during the period shall be calculated periodically, jointly by
the Contractor and the Client.
vi. During this period, the spare parts, test equipment and tools supplied by the Contractor to Client
under the present procurement including items in both the “Mandatory” and “Recommended”
lists, shall be issued as required by the Contractor. Only these supplied items and no additional
items, with the exception of general purpose toolkits, shall be used by the Contractor for all its
testing and preventive & restorative maintenance activities.
vii. If any additional test equipment or spare parts are required or found to be required, these additional
items shall be provided by the Contractor, within a reasonable time, up to the expiry of this period,
at no additional cost to Client.
viii. Further, in such case the list of “recommended” spare parts and test equipment and tools &
tackles shall be reviewed to identify further spares and test equipment requirement, which shall
have to be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to Client.
ix. During the entire project O&M duration, the cost of diesel required for running the DG Set at
various PoPs across the state needs to be borne by the contractor.
x. The recurring cost of electricity shall be borne by the designated Government authority.
xi. All the UPSs shall be on line and SNMP enabled.
xii. During O & M period the contractor shall also manage the NOC and other software deployed at
NOC / Data Centre including the Cloud Infrastructure Setup there. The scope shall also include
creation of various application instances of OSS / BSS solutions for ISPs, LCOs, MSOs etc. and
providing them with web based access including training the requisite assistance for the use of
software.
xiii. Contractor also needs manage and maintain the Headend and other infrastructure provided.
xiv. The operations and maintenance of the assets / the network infrastructure of this project shall be
carried out under the control, guidance, superintendence and as per the directions of the Authority.
xv. The Bidder needs to include in its solution all the requisite networking, security and other
components required to secure the IAAS or PAAS offering so that any vulnerability to the system
is avoided. The Authority will get the security audit of the entire infrastructure done from a third
party and if vulnerability is observed, the same needs to be closed by the bidder at no additional
cost to the Authority any time during contract duration (implementation period + O&M + DLP)
xvi. The bidder is responsible for supply, installation and operations of entire network, accessories,
network equipment's including related NOC, OSS / BSS solution, cloud services and Cable TV
head end on turnkey basis. For making the entire solution operational as per the tender document
requirements if some additional equipment's / services need to be provided, the same needs to be
considered by the bidder in its proposal and need to be provided to the Authority. If some item is
missed by the bidder in its proposal and the same is required, it needs to be provided by the bidder
at no additional cost so that the implemented solution meets the project requirements.
xvii. OSS / BSS software provided for the project need to be perpetual in nature and for unlimited user
licenses and bidder should not provide any user restriction on the said licenses.
xviii. The solution proposed for OSS / BSS which are required to be provide on cloud ( as IAAS or
PAAS) to various ISPs/ Telecom services providers / MSOs should be capable to provide the said
services to minimum 4000 such users from day one. Bidder need to size the entire requisite
infrastructure to support this requirement
C. Intersection of Phase –I & Phase –II
AP Fiber Grid Project is planned to be implemented in two phases.
Phase-I of the Project is planned to be implemented first which intends to create overhead fiber network across
AP State. The fiber will be laid overhead and using the network of electricity poles across the State. As per the
25
estimate done by GoAP the approximate length of fiber to be laid as part of this project is 22,500 Kms. For this
project GoAP through INCAP has floated RFP to select an implementation agency also referred as ‘contractor’
to lay the fiber network, create requisite number of PoPs, supply and install the networking equipments, set up
NOC at central location, implement OSS and BSS software, set up of cable TV head end and operations /
maintenance of the same for one year duration post Go Live.
Phase-II of the project involves laying of underground Optic Fiber Network across State under National Optic
Fiber Network (NOFN) / Bharat Net Scheme of Government of India. RFP for this project will be floated at a
later date by an authorized Government agency. Once Phase-II project is implemented Phase-I project shall
work as extended network as well as back up network at few locations for Phase-II project.
In this document, the details of Phase-I project are mentioned in detail and only Phase-I project is in the scope
of the contractor.
Areas of Intersection Points of Phase I and Phase II projects include but not limited to:
Intersection at PoP Level
State PoP
District PoP
Mandal PoP
State PoP created for Phase I Project may co-host one of the State PoP to be built for
Phase-II. Space and other planning details (DG/power backup, entry/exit pointe etc.) to
be considered for accommodating future needs
Phase-I Project district PoP to be located at a government building in the DHQ. Phase-II
project PoPs may also be collocated in the same PoP. Space and other planning details
(DG/power backup, entry/exit pointe etc.) to be considered for accommodating future
needs
Zonal PoP (Mandal locations) that are created in Phase-I Project will be located at
electrical Sub stations and will be kept in outdoor / indoor enclosure. Depending on final
locations for Phase-II PoPs, Phase-I PoPs can be either physically shifted to Mandal
offices and collocated in same space or these may continue at sub stations but horizontal
fiber to be laid to connect this PoP with Phase-II PoP. Additional Mandal PoPs that are
created under Phase-I at sub stations can continue initially as additional access points for
LCOs / ISPs etc. In phased manner they may be shifted to Mandal PoPs to have easy
management.
NOC Intersection
NOC
For Phase-I project it is planned to have a monitoring and broadcasting NOC. This NOC
may be set up at the same location where the NOC for Phase-II is planned or should be
designed in such a manner that it can be moved or act as a backup/secondary NOC.
Equipment Intersection
In case of a technology refresh for the project, vendors may also consider suitable equipment to manage
both projects bandwidth requirements.
Intersection of Phases at Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Stage
In future, O&M activities of both Phase I and PhaseII could potentially be managed by a single vendor.
26
Intersection with underground fiber project (Phase II) Approach
In line with the vision of the project, an underground fiber network is being proposed to be built with the
involvement and assistance of Government of India under the National Optic Fiber Network/BharatNet Project.
The contractor will need to ensure that the Aerial Fiber Project allows for integration with Phase II wherever
possible keeping in view the key objectives of Phase II project:
i.
To create a state-wide optical fiber-based Network Infrastructure with the features of being a state-wide
integrated infrastructure, scalability, capacity, Assured QoS.
ii.
Provide connectivity from State to District to Mandal to Gram Panchayat with “enter anywhere, exit
anywhere” capabilities for service providers with PoPs at District, Mandal and Gram Panchayat levels
covering both urban and rural areas
iii.
Adequate network capacity to carry traffic as per the outlined project vision with aim of providing
infrastructure as a service to last mile service providers
iv.
Carrier grade capabilities and reliability
v.
Provisioning and delivery of one hour of free Wi-Fi services every day at each Gram Panchayat for use
by local population
vi.
Provide horizontal connectivity to government institutes at District, Mandal and Gram Panchayat level as
below
a. 25 Government institutes at each District
b. 10 Government institutes at each Mandal
c. 3 Government institute at each Gram Panchayat
d. As part of the above mentioned horizontal connectivity provision, connectivity to all educational,
healthcare and skill development institutes run by Central and State Governments shall be provided
free of charge on an on-going basis.
vii.
Existing Telecom Infrastructure to be used to the extent permissible by the defined parameters of
network reliability and capacity.
viii.
Setup of central network monitoring and management facility that would also integrate with National
NOC being built under the BharatNet project
ix.
Implement Business Models to ensure maximum usage of network infrastructure by other service
providers for delivery of digital services to citizen
x.
Operate, Manage and Upgrade the network infrastructure periodically to ensure that network capacity,
uptime and performance are maintained at desired levels
xi.
Creation and management of content and services in a PPP Model to trigger extensive usage of the
broadband.
Note: The solution proposed by the bidder should be built on open and interoperable standards and
protocols. The solution should be able to integrate with the technologies that will be procured by the
Authority for AP Fiber underground project (Phase-II project). The bidder needs to provide open protocols
free of cost if the protocols provided by the bidder are not of open standards.
27
2. Instructions to Bidders
A. GENERAL
The applicants shall necessarily pay the following fee and submit EMD as stipulated below failing which their bids
shall summarily be rejected.
i)
Tender Fee: The bidder is required to submit a Demand Draft of INR 25,000 + INR 3500 (VAT),
in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad drawn on any Nationalized / Scheduled Bank and
payable at Hyderabad, towards cost of the tender fee along with the bid. The Demand Draft should
be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of its receipt. A scanned copy of the tender fee is
required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as per the format. Any bid submitted without
Tender Fee will be rejected.
ii)
E.M.D shall be paid in the form of Demand Draft in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad or
Unconditional and irrevocable Bank Guarantee in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad
obtained from Nationalized / Scheduled Commercial Bank, for Rs. 3,29,00,000/- along with bid
documents. A scanned copy of the EMD is required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as
per the format. Any bid submitted without EMD will be rejected.
Eligibility Criteria:
The Applicants have to fulfill all the eligibility criteria stipulated as below.
The Price bid of only those applicants who satisfy all the eligibility conditions and who score the minimum
stipulated marks or more in the evaluation of technical bid will be considered.
Important Note: To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service
providers, organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not
be eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member
S.
No
A
1
Criterion
Documentary Proof to be
submitted
Criterion to be met by
General Eligibility
The bidder should be either a In case of Single Bidder:
company (single legal entity) or a
consortium of companies.
Copy of valid Certificate of
Bidder in case of single entity
incorporation issued by competent
bidding
The company shall be an authority in India
incorporated entity under the
(OR)
Companies Act 1956 / 2013. In case of Consortium:
All the Consortium members
In case of consortium, the applicant Copy of valid certificate of
individually and jointly, in
consortium shall submit a valid incorporation issued by competent
case the bidder is a
agreement among the members.
authority in India by each of the
consortium
consortium members
The maximum number of members
allowed in a consortium is four (4) Valid agreement on INR 100/- Stamp
28
including Lead member. All the Paper concluded among all the
consortium members shall be jointly members of the consortium duly
& severally liable.
stamped and signed by the
Authorized Signatories of the
companies under consortium dated
prior to the submission of bid.
The agreement shall clearly specify
the details of Lead member and other
consortium members and outline the
financial
strengths,
technical
strengths and the role and
responsibility of each of the
members of the consortium.
Copy of a valid Certificate of
incorporation issued by competent
authority in India (for each of the
members in case of consortium)
2
The bidder should be registered
under the Companies Act, 1956 /
2013 and should have been in
operational existence with relevant
experience for at least the last three
(3) financial years
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding.
Copy of audited annual accounts for
the last 3 financial years i.e., FY
OR
2012-13, FY 2013-14 & FY 2014-15
All the members of the
Note: In case the final audited annual
Consortium individually, in
accounts reports are not available for
case the bidder is a
FY 2014-15, the provisional
consortium
financial statements of FY 2014-15
duly certified by the statutory auditor
of the company shall be submitted.
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
3
Certified copy of valid service tax OR
The bidder should have valid service and VAT registration certificates
tax and VAT registration in India
issued by competent authority in All the members of the
India
Consortium individually, in
case the bidder is a
consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
4
B
The bidder should not have been
OR
blacklisted by any Govt. department Self-declaration by the bidder duly
or any PSU in India as on the date of signed by the authorized signatory
All the members of the
bid submission
Consortium individually, in
case the bidder is a
consortium
Financial Capacity Eligibility
29
Average annual turnover of the
bidder for the last three financial
years should be at least INR 350
crores from activities related to
provision of IT Systems Integration
services / IT services / Network
services / Telecom services / Fiber
cable
laying
services
/
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
Headend Services in India
5
In case the bidder is a consortium,
the sum of the average annual
turnover of all the
consortium
members for the last three financial
years from activities related to
provision of IT Systems Integration
services / IT services / Network
services / Telecom services / Fiber
cable
laying
services
/
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
Headend Services in India shall be
at least INR 350 crores and;
The average annual turnover of the
lead member for the last three
financial years from activities
related to provision of IT Systems
Integration services / IT services /
Network services / Telecom services
/ Fiber cable laying services /
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
Headend Services in India shall be
at least INR 100 crores.
Certificate from statutory auditor of
the Bidder mentioning the turnover
from the activities related to
provision of IT Systems Integration
services / IT services / Network
services / Telecom services / Fiber
cable
laying
services
/
NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV
Headend Services in India in the last
three financial years.
If the final audited accounts for FY
2014-15 are not available, then the
data based on the provisional
accounts certified by the statutory
auditor of the company will be
considered.
Other consortium members’ annual
average turnover from the relevant
activities shall not be less than INR
50 Crores individually in the last
three financial years.
30
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
OR
The
members
of
the
consortium individually and
jointly with the provision that
the average annual turnover of
the lead member for the last
three years from the activities
mentioned shall be at least
INR 100 crores while that of
the
other
members
individually shall not be less
than INR 50 crores.
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
The bidder should have positive
networth of at least INR 100 crores
as on 31st March, 2015.
6
C
OR
The
members
of
the
In case the bidder is a consortium, Certificate from Statutory Auditor of consortium
jointly
/
the combined networth of all the the Company stating the networth of individually
with
the
entities shall be at least INR 100 the Bidder as on 31st March, 2015.
provision that the combined
crores as on 31st March, 2015. The
networth of all the members
networth of the lead member of the
shall be INR 100 crores as on
consortium shall be at least INR 50
31st March, 2015. The
crores.
networth of the lead member
of the consortium shall be at
least INR 50 crores.
Technical Capacity Eligibility
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
7
The bidder should have the
experience of laying / pulling and
installing optical fiber cable (OFC)
for a length of at least 1500 Kms in
India after 1st April, 2005
8
The bidder should have experience
of setting up and maintaining atleast
one Network Operating Centre
services with atleast 50 clients on
WAN in India after 1st April, 2005
9
The bidder should have experience
in implementing Operating Support
System & Business Support System
(OSS / BSS) in communications /
internet service sectors in India
serving a subscriber base of atleast
50,000 after 1st April, 2005
Certified copy of the relevant work
OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
from the client(s) stating that the
The
members
of
the
work(s) has been completed
consortium
jointly
on
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
Certified copy of the relevant work OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
from the client(s) stating that the The
members
of
the
work(s) has been completed
consortium
jointly
on
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
Certified copy of the relevant work OR
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
members
of
the
from the client(s) stating that the The
consortium
jointly
on
work(s) has been completed
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
10
The bidder should have experience
in setting up and maintaining Wide
Area Network / Points of Presence
and its related electronics equipment
in at least 50 different locations in
India after 1st April, 2005
OR
Certified copy of the relevant work
order(s) and certificate(s) with details
The
members
of
the
from the client(s) stating that the
consortium
jointly
on
work(s) has been completed
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
31
Bidder, in case of single entity
bidding
11
The bidder should have experience
of setting up and managing
operations of atleast one Cable TV
Headend of minimum 200 channels
in India after 1st April, 2005
OR
Certified copy of the relevant work
order(s) and certificate(s)with details
The
members
of
the
from the client(s) stating that the
consortium
jointly
on
work(s) has been completed
cumulative basis, in case the
bidder is a consortium
32
Exit Management
1.1. This Clause sets out the provisions, which will apply when the contract has expired or when the contract is
determined.
1.2. In the case of termination during the project implementation or maintenance phase, the Parties shall agree
at that time whether, and if so during what period, the provisions of this clause shall apply.
1.3. The Parties shall ensure that their respective associated entities carry out their respective obligations set
out in this clause.
1.4. Transfer of Assets
a) The Contractor shall hand over all material with Contractor store to the Authority without any costs. In
case of contract being terminated by the Authority, the Authority reserves the right to ask the
Contractor to continue running the project operations for a period of 6 months after termination orders
are issued. The other liquidated damages and SLA would be applicable during this period.
b) Upon service of a notice under this Article the following provisions shall apply:
c) Payment to the outgoing Contractor shall be made to the tune of last set of completed services /
deliverables, subject to SLA requirements.
d) The outgoing Contractor will pass on to the Authority and / or its nominated agency, the subsisting
rights in any products on terms not less favourable to the Authority / its nominated agency, than that
enjoyed by the outgoing Contractor.
1.5. Cooperation and Provision of Information
During the exit management period:
a) The Contractor will allow the Authority access to information reasonably required to define the then
current mode of operation associated with the provision of the services to enable the Authority to
assess the existing services being delivered;
b) Promptly on reasonable request by the Authority, the Contractor shall provide access to and copies of
all information held or controlled by them which they have prepared or maintained in accordance with
this contract relating to any material aspect of the services (whether provided by the Contractoror SubContractors appointed by the Contractor). The Authority shall be entitled to get a copy of all such
information. Such information shall include details pertaining to the services rendered and other
performance data. The Contractor shall permit the Authority or its nominated agencies to have
reasonable access to its employees and facilities as reasonably required to understand the methods of
delivery of the services employed by the Contractorand to assist appropriate knowledge transfer.
1.6. Confidential Information, Security and Data
a) The Contractor will promptly on the commencement of the exit management period supply to the
Authority the following:
b) Information relating to the current services rendered and Purchased and performance data relating to
the performance of Sub-Contractors, if any, in relation to the services;
c) Documentation relating to Project’s Intellectual Property Rights;
d) Documentation relating to sub-Contractors(if any);
e) All current and updated data as is reasonably required for purposes of the Authority or its nominated
agencies transitioning the services to its replacement Bidder in a readily available format nominated by
the Authority;
f) All other information (including but not limited to documents, records and contracts) relating to the
services reasonably necessary to enable the Authority or its nominated agencies, or its replacement
Bidder to carry out due diligence in order to transition the provision of the Services to the Authority or
its nominated agencies, or its replacement Bidder (as the case may be).
33
g) Before the expiry of the exit management period, Contractor shall deliver to the Authority all new or
up-dated materials from the categories set out in Schedule above and shall not retain any copies
thereof, except that the Contractor shall be permitted to retain one copy of such materials for archival
purposes only.
1.7. Employees
a) Promptly on reasonable request at any time during the exit management period, the Contractor shall,
subject to applicable laws, restraints and regulations (including in particular those relating to privacy)
provide to the Authority a list of all employees (with job titles) of the Contractor dedicated to providing
the services at the commencement of the exit management period.
b) Where any national, regional law or regulation relating to the mandatory or automatic transfer of the
contracts of employment from the Contractor to the Authority, or a replacement Bidder ("Transfer
Regulation") applies to any or all of the employees of the Contractor, then the Parties shall comply
with their respective obligations under such Transfer Regulations.
c) To the extent that any Transfer Regulation does not apply to any employee of the Contractor,
department, or its replacement Bidder may make an offer of employment or contract for services to
such employee of the Contractor.
1.8. Transfer of Certain Contracts
On request by the Authority the Contractor shall effect such assignments, transfers, licenses and sublicenses as the Authority may require the same in the name of the Authority or its nominated agency in
relation to any equipment lease, maintenance or service provision contract between Contractor and third
party licensor, vendors, and which are related to the services and reasonably necessary for the carrying out
of replacement services by the Authority or its replacement Bidder.
1.9. Right of Access to Premises
a) At any time during the exit management period, where Assets are located at the Contractor's premises,
the Contractor will be obliged to give reasonable rights of access to (or, in the case of Assets located on
a third party's premises, procure reasonable rights of access to) the Authority and/or any replacement
Bidder in order to make an inventory of the Assets.
b) Contractor shall also give the Authority or any of its nominated agency or any replacement Bidder right
of reasonable access to the Contractor's premises and shall procure the designated Govt. authority or
any of its nominated agency and any replacement Bidder rights of access to relevant third party
premises during the exit management period and for such period of time following termination or
expiry of the Contract as is reasonably necessary to migrate the services to the Authority, or a
replacement Bidder.
1.10.
General Obligations of the Contractor
a) The Contractor shall provide all such information as may reasonably be necessary to effect as seamless
a handover as practicable in the circumstances to the Authority or its replacement Bidder and which the
Contractor has in its possession or control at any time during the exit management period.
b) For the purposes of this Schedule, anything in the possession or control of any Contractor, associated
entity, or sub-Contractor is deemed to be in the possession or control of the Contractor.
c) The Contractor shall commit adequate resources to comply with its obligations under this clause.
1.11.
Exit Management Plan
a) The Contractor shall provide the Authority with a recommended exit management plan ("Exit
Management Plan") which shall deal with at least the following aspects of exit management in relation
to the Contract as a whole and in relation to the Project Implementation, and the Operation and
Management SLA.
b) A detailed program of the transfer process that could be used in conjunction with a replacement Bidder
including details of the means to be used to ensure continuing provision of the services throughout the
34
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
transfer process or until the cessation of the services and of the management structure to be used during
the transfer;
plans for the communication with such of the Contractor's sub-Contractors, staff, suppliers, customers
and any related third party as are necessary to avoid any material detrimental impact on the Authority’s
operations as a result of undertaking the transfer;
(if applicable) proposed arrangements for the segregation of the Contractor's networks from the
networks employed by the Authority and identification of specific security tasks necessary at
termination;
Plans for provision of contingent support to the Authority and replacement Bidder for a reasonable
period after transfer.
The Contractor shall re-draft the Exit Management Plan annually thereafter to ensure that it is kept
relevant and up to date.
Each Exit Management Plan shall be presented by the Contractor to and approved by the Authority or
its nominated agencies.
In the event of termination or expiry of Contract, and Project Implementation, each Party shall comply
with the Exit Management Plan.
During the exit management period, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to deliver the services.
Payments during the Exit Management period shall be made in accordance with the Terms of Payment
Schedule.
This Exit Management plan shall be furnished in writing to the Authority or its nominated agencies
within 90 days from the date of issue of LOA to the Selected Bidder.
Other Instructions:
1.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for the operations and maintenance of the entire fiber network
infrastructure under this project for a period of one (1) year from the operational acceptance date after
completion of all the project works (which is scheduled at 9 months from the date of entering into contract
agreement). The operations and maintenance of the project assets and infrastructure shall be undertaken as
per the directions / superintendence and control of the Authority concerned.
1.13 After the completion of the stipulated operations and maintenance period of one (1) year from the
operational acceptance (Project Go-Live) date, the Contractor shall provide Operations & Maintenance
services / support for the project on demand, for a further extended period on mutually agreed terms and
conditions with the Authority in-charge of the project at that time. In case the Authority decides to extend /
continue the O&M support by the contractor for a specified period beyond the initially stipulated time period
of 1 year, the Authority’s decision shall be binding on the contractor. In such case, the O&M costs
chargeable by the contractor per annum shall not exceed 10% of the original project contract value.
1.14 While INCAP issues the tender notice and handles the tendering process, the agreement with the successful
bidder can be entered into by either INCAP or any other Govt. department / agency / Govt. corporation as
the case may be. In such case, the Authority which signs the agreement will administer the contract and will
be the incharge Authority for overseeing the implementation and management of this project.
1.15 In case the Authority hands over assets / infrastructure and the administration and control mechanism of the
project to any other department / agency of the government at any stage, the Contractor shall honor all the
prevailing contractual terms and agreements including signing of the agreement under this project, to be
subsequently enforced by the new authority / agency.
1.16 In case of any disputes / legal issues arising out or in any way connected with any provision of this tender or
with any clause of the agreement with the successful bidder, the cases shall be deemed to have arisen in
Hyderabad and shall be subject only to the courts under the jurisdiction of the Honorable High Court of
Judicature at Hyderabad for the states of Telangana and Andhra Pradesh.
35
1.17 Contractor need to take OEM support for all equipments and other assets for at least six months beyond the
contract expiry period / extended contract expiry period. This will be verified by the Authority during the
contract period and accordingly final payment shall be made to the contractor. The OEM support will be
required for all Networking, IT hardware, Software, TV Head end and Non IT components such as UPS and
DG Set etc.
1.18 After the expiry of the contract the transition of the project shall be done to the Authority / replacement
vendor selected by the Authority. Transition period will be three months beyond expiry of the contract
period. During the first 1.5 months of transition period the contractor will run the operations and
replacement vendor shall work as support vendor for the project. During the next 1.5 months, the
replacement vendor shall run the operations and the contractor shall provide secondary support. During
transition the contractor shall provide all requisite support to the replacement vendor including compliance
to the directions issued by the Authority.
2.1 Conditions precedent to signing of contract with the successful bidder
i)
The bidder should possess the following key / critical equipment (either owned or leased)
S. No. Equipment Type and Characteristics
Minimum required Nos.
i)
OTDR
10
ii)
Optical Loss Test Set
20
iii)
Optical Fiber Splicing Machine (Fusion)
20
iv)
Optical Power Meters
50
v)
Optical Attenuators
50
vi)
OFC Splicing Kits
50
vii)
Fiber Uncoiling Tools & Kits
50
viii)
Transportation Vehicles
50
ix)
Headend Test Setup for CATV
1
x)
OSNR Tester
2
xi)
Optical Spectral Analyzer (OSA)
1
The bidder has to submit any one of the following:
a) Self certification issued by the Company regarding owning of the equipment.
b) A declaration on non-judicial stamp paper worth Rs 100/- along with sufficient proof of
document in support of owning such as invoice /Certificate of registration by competent
authority in support of the critical equipment.
c) In case the bidder proposes to procure the equipment on lease, he has to submit the lease deed
on Rs. 100 non-judicial stamp paper along with proof of owning of equipment by the lesser. The
lease agreement must be concluded for the specific work only and with specific required critical
equipment. The lease deed shall be valid till the agreement period.
ii)
The successful bidder shall engage the following set of minimum no. of key personnel exclusively
for undertaking works related to this project
Key Personnel
a. Project Director
b. Project Manager
c. District Implementation Lead
36
:1
:1
: 13
d. Quality Reviewer
e. Test Manager
f. Technical Expert
:1
:1
: 3 (PG in Networking with atleast
15 years of experience)
:10 (Graduation in Networking
with at least 5 yrs of experience)
g. Network Engineers
Bidder should submit an appropriate project plan detailing the roles and responsibilities of individual / teams
during the execution and maintenance phases of the project.
2.2 Quality Assurance:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Factory Acceptance Tests shall be conducted as per relevant Standards and Codes on randomly
selected final assemblies of all equipment to be supplied.
Field Acceptance Testing: The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each
location.
Third-Party-Testing: The manufacturer shall submit detailed Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) covering
Tests to be carried out, Test Procedure, Acceptance Criteria, Sampling Plan, and extent of inspection
by manufacturer and Client Representative / Third party Inspection (TPI) Agency w.r.t.
Witness/Review.
The bidder shall submit quality plan.
2.3 Excess tenders:
i)
Tenders with a price bid which is in excess of more than 5% of the estimated contract value will not
be accepted by the e-procurement system.
ii)
For tenders up to 25% less than the estimated contract value of work, no additional security deposit is
required. For tenders which are less by more than 25% of the estimated Contract Value of work, the
difference between the tendered amount and 75% of the estimated contract value, shall be paid by the
successful bidder at the time of concluding agreement as an additional security to fulfill the contract
through a Bank Guarantee or Demand Draft on a Nationalized Bank/Scheduled commercial bank in
the prescribed format valid till completion of the work in all respects
iii)
If the percentage quoted by a bidder is found to be either abnormally high or within the permissible
ceiling limits prescribed but under collusion or due to unethical practices adopted at the time of
tendering process, such tenders shall be rejected.
iv)
A bidder submitting a Tender which the tender accepting authority considers excessive and or
indicative of insufficient knowledge of current prices or definite attempt of profiteering will render
himself liable to be debarred permanently from tendering or for such period as the tender accepting
authority may decide.
2.4 One Tender per Bidder:
Each Bidder shall submit only one Tender for the work. A Bidder who submits more than one Tender will
cause disqualification of all the Tenders submitted by the Bidder.
2.5 Cost of Tendering
The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his tender and the tender
inviting authority will in no case be responsible and liable for those costs.
2.6 Site Visit
The Bidder, at the Bidder’s own responsibility and risk is advised to visit and examine the site of work and its
surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary for preparing the Tender for entering into a
contract, for implementation of the work. The costs of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.
37
B. TENDER DOCUMENT
1. Contents of Tender document
One set of Tender document comprises of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) inclusive of eligibility criteria
Scope of the Work
Instructions to Bidder
Conditions of Contract
Technical Bid
Price Bid
a) Schedule A (Bill of Quantities)
b) Schedule B
7) Technical Specifications & features
8) Formats for Securities and Statements and other forms of tender
2. Clarification on Tender Document
A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification on tender documents may contact the Chief General Manager
(Technical), INCAP, Hyderabad.
3. Amendment to Tender Documents
i.
Before the last date for submission of Tenders, the tender Inviting Officer may modify any of the contents
of the tender notice, tender documents by issuing amendment / addendum.
ii.
Any addendum / amendments issued by the Tender Inviting Officer shall be part of the tender document
and it shall be communicated through on line at e-market place i.e., www.eprocurement.gov.in
iii.
To give prospective Bidders reasonable time to take an addendum into account in preparing their bids, the
Tender Inviting Officer may extend if necessary, the last date for submission of tenders.
iv.
The Authority reserves the right to reject any tender or all the tenders without assigning any reason there
for. Any bidder shall have no cause olfaction or claim against the INCAP or its officers, employees,
successors or assignee for rejection of his tender.
4. The VC & MD reserves the right to annul the tender process at any stage without assigning any reasons
thereof.
38
C.
PREPARATION OF TENDERS
1. Language of the Tender
1.1 All documents relating to the tender shall be in the English Language only.
2. Bid Offer
2.1 Bill of Quantities called Schedule “A” and the bid offer accompanies the tender document. It shall be explicitly
understood that the Tender Inviting Officer shall not be responsible for the correctness or completeness of the
schedule ‘A’ and the schedule ‘A’ is liable to alterations by omissions, deductions or additions at the
discretion of the Authority or as set forth in the conditions of the contract. The Schedule “A” shall contain the
various items and estimated quantities related to the work. The bidder has to quote clearly the item wise rates
in Schedule-A. Further the bidder shall clearly state their offer to execute the work at certain specific
percentage of excess or less or at par of the ECV indicated in Schedule-B as price bid at the space provided
therein.
2.2 The bid offer shall be for the whole work and not for individual items / part of the work
2.3 The price quoted by the bidder for individual items in Schedule-A and also the overall price bid as a percent of
ECV in schedule-B shall be inclusive of (i) All duties, taxes, charges and other levies payable by the
Contractor as per State / Central Government rules, including VAT & Service Tax, etc and (ii) towards
warranty and the cost of operations and maintenance of the assets and the fiber network infrastructure created
under this project for a period of 1 year reckoned from the operations acceptance date (Project Go-Live) date
after completing / commissioning all the works.
2.4 The tendered contract amount as computed based on overall tender percentage is subject to variation during the
performance of the Contract in accordance with variation in quantities etc.
2.5 The service charges payable to MD, APTS, Hyderabad are as indicated below.
a) It is mandatory for all the participant bidders from 1st January 2006 to electronically pay a prescribed
non-refundable Transaction fee to M/s. APTS, the service provider through "Payment Gateway Service on
E-Procurement platform". The Electronic Payment Gateway accepts all Master and Visa Credit Cards
issued by any bank and Direct Debit facility/Net Banking of ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis Bank to facilitate
the transaction. This is in compliance as per G.O.Ms. 13 dated 07.05.2006.
b) Corpus Fund:
As per GO MS No.4 user departments shall collect 0.04% of ECV (estimated contract value) with a cap of
Rs.10,000/- (Rupees ten thousand only) for all works with ECV upto Rs.50 Crores and Rs.25,000/(Rupees twenty five thousand only) for works with ECV above Rs.50 Crores, from successful bidders on
e-procurement platform before entering into agreement / issue of purchase orders, towards e-procurement
fund in favor of Managing Director, APTS. There shall not be any charge towards e-procurement fund in
case of works, goods and services with ECV less than and upto Rs.10 lakhs.
The above fee is payable by the successful bidder through a D.D. drawn in favor of Managing Director,
APTS, Hyderabad at the time of conclusion of the agreement.
39
3. Validity of Tenders
3.1 Tenders shall remain valid for a period of not less than 120 days from the last date for receipt of Tender
specified in NIT.
3.2 During the above mentioned period no plea by the bidder for any sort of modification of the tender based upon
or arising out of any alleged misunderstanding of misconceptions or mistake or for any reason will
be entertained.
3.3 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the Tender Inviting Officer may request
the bidders to extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. Such request to the Bidders shall
be made in writing. A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his E.M.D. A Bidder agreeing to the
request will not be permitted to modify his Tender, but will be required to extend the validity of his E.M.D. for
a period of the extension.
4. Tender Fee:
The bidder is required to submit a Demand Draft of INR 25,000 + 3500 (VAT), in favor of VC & MD, INCAP
drawn on any Nationalized / Scheduled Bank and payable at Hyderabad, towards cost of the tender fee along
with the bid. The Demand Draft should be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of its receipt. A scanned
copy of the tender fee is required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as per the format. Any bid
submitted without Tender Fee will be rejected.
5. Earnest Money Deposit
5.1 The DD/BG towards Earnest Money Deposit equivalent to 1% of ECV shall be from a Nationalized Bank or
any scheduled commercial bank valid for a period of 120 days from the last date for the submission of bids.
Xerox copy of the DD/BG is to be scanned and uploaded along with the Bid. The successful bidder shall
invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into
agreement either personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date
shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder.
5.2 The Department will not take any responsibility for any delay in receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards
EMD, from the successful bidder before the stipulated time. If any successful bidder fails to submit the original
Hard Copies of uploaded DD/BG towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed
between the uploaded documents and the hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be
suspended from participating in the tenders on e-Procurement platform for a period of 3 years.
5.3 The e-Procurement system would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting successful bidder based on the
trigger/recommendation by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the Department shall
invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme
deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the
Government. The information to this extent may be displayed in the e-procurement platform website.
5.4 The EMD of Bidders will be returned no sooner the tenders are finalized or end date of the Tender validity
period whichever is earlier.
5.5 The 1% E.M.D. paid by the successful Bidder at the time of submission of hard copies of Tender documents
through Demand Draft/ BG will be discharged and the successful Bidder shall furnish Bank Guarantee with in
7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance from the Authority to the value of five percent (5%) of the
contract price valid for a total period of 9+12+12+3=36 months.
5.6 The earnest money deposited by the successful bidder will not carry any interest and it will be dealt with as
provided in the conditions stipulated in the tender. The E.M.D. given in the form of Bank Guarantee on a
Nationalized / Scheduled commercial Bank shall be valid for the duration of contract period plus defect liability
period of two years and in case any valid extension of contract period is granted, the validity of BG shall also
be extended for the corresponding period. The Bank Guarantee on Nationalized / Scheduled commercial
Bank furnished by the bidder towards additional security amount shall be valid till the work is completed in all
respects.
40
5.7 The E.M.D. shall be forfeited
a) if the Bidder withdraws the Tender during the validity period of Tender.
b) in the case of a successful Bidder, if he fails to sign the Agreement within the stipulated time.
5.8 During the investigation of Tenders, if it is found that the Contractor is either modifying or withdrawing his
Tender at his instance within the validity period of the tender i.e., 3 months, the EMDs deposited by the
Contractor will be forfeited to the Government. Besides this, the Authority shall invoke all Processes of law.
5.9 If any successful bidder fails to submit the original hard copies of uploaded certificates / documents, DD/BG
towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the
hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders
on e-procurement platform for a period of 3 years. The e-procurement system would deactivate the user ID of
such defaulting successful bidder based on the trigger/recommendations by the Tender Inviting Authority in
the system. Besides this, the Department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of
such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of
the development schemes taken up by the Government.
6. Signing of Tenders
6.1 In case the tender is submitted by a single bidder, it shall be signed by an authorized member of the firm, who
shall also sign his own name, and the name and address of each member of the firm shall be given. If the tender
is made by a consortium it shall be signed by a duly authorized officer who shall produce with his tender
satisfactory evidence of his authorization. Such tendering entity may be required before the contract is
executed, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence. Tenders signed on behalf of G.P.A. holder will be
rejected.
6.2 The Tender shall contain no alterations or additions, except those to comply with instructions issued by the
Tender Inviting Officer, or as necessary to correct errors made by the Bidder, in which case all such corrections
shall be initialed by the person signing the Tender.
6.3 No alteration which is made by the bidder in the contract form, the conditions of the contract, the drawings,
specifications or statements / formats or quantities accompanying the same will be recognized; and if any such
alterations are made, the tender will be void.
41
D.
SUBMISSION OF TENDERS
1. Submission of Tenders
1.1 The bidders who are desirous of participating in e-procurement shall submit their Technical bids, price bids
etc., through online in the standard prescribed forms in the tender documents, displayed at e market place.
The bidders should upload the scanned copies of all the relevant certificates, documents etc., in the e
market place in support of their Technical bids. The bidders shall sign on all the statements, documents,
certificates, uploaded by them, owning responsibility for their correctness/authenticity.
1.2 Furnishing of hard copies by the bidders before opening of the Price bids is dispensed with.
1.3 The Technical bid evaluation of the bidders will be done based on the certificates / documents uploaded
through online only towards qualification criteria furnished by them.
1.4 All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in e- Procurement system and this
will be the primary requirement to consider the bid as responsive. The Department shall carry out the
Technical bid evaluation solely based on the uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the
e-procurement system and open the price bids of the responsive bidders. The Department will notify the
successful bidder for submission of original hard copies of all uploaded documents, DD/BG towards EMD
prior to entering into agreement.
1.5 The successful bidder shall invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD, certificates/documents of
the uploaded scanned copies to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into agreement either
personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date shall be the
responsibility of the successful bidder The Department will not take any responsibility for any delay in
receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards EMD, certificates/documents, from the successful bidder
before the stipulated time. On receipt of documents, the Department shall ensure the genuinity of the
DD/BG towards EMD and all other certificates / documents uploaded by the bidder in e-Procurement
system in support of the qualification criteria before concluding the agreement.
1.6 If any successful bidder fails to submit the original Hard Copies of uploaded certificates/Documents,
DD/BG towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded
documents and the hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from
participating in the tenders on e-Procurement platform for a period of 3 years. The e-Procurement system
would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting successful bidder based on the trigger/recommendation by
the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the Department shall invoke all processes of law
including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in
the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the Government.
1.7 The bidder shall mandatorily pay the transaction fee to APTS through the electronic payment Gateway.
1.8 The bidders shall furnish a declaration in online stating that the soft copies uploaded by them are genuine.
Any incorrectness/deviation noticed will be viewed seriously and apart from cancelling the work duly
forfeiting the EMD, criminal action will be initiated including suspension of business.
Important Note:
The Bidder shall authenticate the bid with his digital certificate for submitting the bid electronically on eprocurement Platform and the bids not authenticated by Digital certificate of the bidder will not be
accepted on the e-procurement platform.
2. Last date / time for Submission of the Tenders
2.1 Tenders must be submitted not later than the date and time specified in NIT. In the event of the specified date /
time for the submission of bids declared as holiday, the bids will be received on the next working day.
2.2 The Authority may extend the dates for issue and receipt of Tenders by issuing an amendment in which case all
rights and obligations of the Authority and the Bidders will remain same as previously.
42
3. Late Tenders
3.1 Any Tender received after the last date / time prescribed in NIT will summarily be rejected.
4. Modification to the Tender
4.1 No Tender shall be modified after the last date / time of submission of Tenders.
43
E.
TENDER OPENING AND EVALUATION
1. Tender opening
(a) The Technical bids of those bidders who meet the eligibility criteria will be opened on line by the
authorized officials of INCAP, Hyderabad at the time and date as specified in the tender documents. All the
statements, documents, certificates, DD/BG etc., uploaded by the bidders will be downloaded for Technical
evaluation. The clarifications / particulars, if any, required from the bidders will be obtained by addressing
the bidders. The Technical bids will be evaluated against the specified parameters / criteria and the
technically qualified bidders will be identified. The result of Technical bid evaluation will be displayed on
the e market place. If the Office happens to be closed on the date of opening the tender, the opening of
tenders gets automatically postponed to the next working date, the time being unaltered, unless extended on
online through corrigendum.
(b) The Technical bids satisfying the qualification requirements as specified in this document will be evaluated
by a Tender Evaluation Committee. The price bids of those who obtain the minimum stipulated score or
more in technical evaluation will be opened at the time as specified in this document and will be evaluated
by the tender evaluation committee. The result of the technical and financial evaluation will be placed
before a tender approval committee for finalization of the tender.
2. Clarification on the Technical Bid
(a) The tender opening authority may call upon any bidder for clarification on the statements,
documentary proof relating to the Technical bid. The request for clarification and response thereto
shall be in writing and it shall be only on the qualification information furnished by the bidder. The
clarification called for from the bidders shall be furnished within the stipulated time, which shall
not be more than a week.
(b) The bidder if so desirous shall agree in writing to furnish the clarification called for within the
stipulated time and will be liable for disqualification and rejection of his tender in the event of
failure to do so.
3. Examination of Technical Bids and Determination of Responsiveness
(a) Authorized officials of INCAP, Hyderabad will evaluate whether each of the Bidders is satisfying the
eligibility criteria prescribed in the tender document and declare the qualified Bidder.
(b) Authorized officials of INCAP who are delegated with the powers will open and evaluate the tenders
as per the qualification criteria. Before recommending / accepting the tender, the tender opening
authority may verify the correctness of certificates submitted to meet the eligibility criteria.
(c) The method for evaluation of the technical bid and the qualifying score has been detailed in para 7
hereunder.
4. Price Bid Opening:
a) Only the Price Bids of qualified Bidders whose Technical Bids are found satisfying the eligibility
criteria and also obtain the stipulated marks or more after technical evaluation shall be opened.
b) The Price Bid of the Unqualified Bidders will not be opened and thereafter E.M.D. will be returned
to the bidders.
c) Tenders shall be scrutinized in accordance with the conditions stipulated in the Tender document.
In case of any discrepancy or non-adherence of the stipulated conditions, the Tender Evaluation
Committee shall reject the tender which will be binding on the Bidder concerned. In case of any
ambiguity, the decision taken by the Tender Evaluation Committee on tenders shall be final.
44
5. Evaluation and Comparison of Price Bids and selection of the successful bidder
a) The officials concerned of the Authority will evaluate and compare the price bids of all the
qualified Bidders and place it before the Tender Evaluation Committee. The committee after
evaluating shall place its recommendations before a Tender Approval Committee. The bidder who
scores the highest combined marks based on technical evaluation and financial evaluation and who
satisfies all the stipulated criteria will be selected after due process and the selected bidder will be
issued LOA.
b) In case two or more bidders get the same combined mark, the bidder who quoted the lowest price
in price bid under schedule-B shall be selected. In case the lowest evaluated price also happens to
be the same, the bidder who has the highest networth as on 31st March, 2015 will be selected
c) The method of awarding marks under technical evaluation and financial evaluation and the
selection criteria has been detailed in para 7 hereunder.
6. Process to be Confidential
a) Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Tenders and
recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons
not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been
announced. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the processing of Tenders or award decisions may
result in the rejection of his Tender
b) No Bidder shall contact the Authority or any officials concerned with finalization of tenders on any
matter relating to its Tender from the time of the Tender opening to the time the Contract is
awarded.
7.
Method of Technical & Financial Evaluation and Award of Marks and Selection of Bidder
Technical evaluation and score:
S. No.
PAST TECHNICAL EXPERIENCE OF THE BIDDER
Maximum
Score
Experience in laying / pulling and installing Optical Fiber Cable in India
after 01-04-2005:
1
2
a
20 Marks
1,500 Km to 3,000 Km
b
25 Marks
3,001 Km to 5,000 Km
c
30 Marks
> 5,000 KM
Experience in setting up and maintaining NOC in India after 01-04-2005:
a
1 NOC
10 Marks
b
2 - 4 NOC
15 Marks
c
> 4 NOC
20 Marks
30
20
Experience in implementing OSS / BSS in communications and internet
service sectors serving a subscriber base in India after 01-04-2005:
3
a
b
50,000 – 1,00,000 customers
1,00,001 – 1,50,000 customers
5 Marks
7.5 Marks
c
> 1,50,000 customers
10 Marks
45
10
Experience in setting up and managing Wide Area Network / Points of
Presence and its related electronics equipment in India after 01-04-2005:
4
a
b
c
50 - 100 locations
101 – 200 locations
> 200 locations
10 Marks
15 Marks
20 Marks
20
Experience in setting up and maintaining Cable TV Headend with a
minimum of 200 channels in India from 01-04-2005:
5
a
b
c
1 – 2 locations
3 – 4 locations
> 4 locations
10 Marks
15 Marks
20 Marks
TOTAL SCORE
20
100
Note:
1. Minimum total marks required for technical qualification is 60. Only those bidders who score minimum
qualifying marks i.e. 60 marks or more out of 100 as detailed above will be eligible for price bid opening.
2. For each of the projects quoted above, the bidder has to provide all citations for each category along with
the copy of work order / certificate of completion confirming completion / Go Live / commissioning of the
work(s) from the Client(s) concerned. The bidder also needs to provide details like name of the client(s) for
the works referred above, address, phone number and email id of Clients. The Authority reserves the right
to verify the authenticity of the documents.
3. In case the bidder is a consortium, the experience jointly / cumulatively of all the members of the
consortium will be considered for evaluation / scoring.
The bid proposal will be evaluated using the following criteria.
S. No.
1
2
Description
Details
Only the bidders who meet the eligibility
criteria shall be eligible for technical
evaluation.
Stage-I :
 Technical Bid
Minimum absolute technical score to qualify for price bid evaluation is 60
Price bids of only those bidders who
Stage-II:
obtain the minimum absolute technical
 Price Bid
score of 60 or more will be opened.
Technical Bid Evaluation
In the first stage only the technical bids would be evaluated and score will be calculated as described below:
The total technical score of the bid would comprise of scores from the Technical Bid evaluation by the Tender
Evaluation Committee (TEC) as per the criteria mentioned in this RFP.
Every technical bid shall be awarded an absolute technical score of ‘T1’ marks out of a total of 100 marks.
Minimum absolute technical score to qualify for price bid evaluation is 60 out of 100 marks. TEC’s decision in this
regard shall be final & binding and no further discussion/interface will be held with the bidders whose bids are
technically disqualified /rejected.
Evaluation of Technical Proposals by TEC shall not be questioned by any of the Bidders. TEC may ask Bidder(s)
for additional information to verify claims made in Technical Bid documentation from the Bidder on the already
submitted Technical Proposal at any point of time before opening of the Price bid.
46

Technical Score Formulation: The highest evaluated absolute Technical score (Tmax) will be given the
maximum technical score (Tn) of 100 points. The technical scores (Tn) of the other bidders will be
computed as per the formula for determining the technical scores as given below:
Tn = 100 x (T1 / Tmax)
Where,
Tn = normalized Technical score for the bidder under consideration,
T1 = Absolute Technical Score for the bidder under consideration,
Tmax = Maximum absolute Technical Score obtained by any bidder
Price Bid Evaluation
The Price bids of those bidders who qualify the technical evaluation will only be opened. The Price Bids of the
technically qualified bidders will be evaluated as per the evaluation criteria explained below.

Financial Score Formulation: The lowest evaluated absolute Financial quote (Fmin) will be given the
maximum financial score (Fn) of 100 points. The financial scores (Fn) of the other Financial quotes will be
computed as per the formula for determining the financial scores given below:
Fn = 100 x (Fmin / F1)
Where,
Fn = normalized financial score for the bidder under consideration,
F1 = absolute financial quote for the bidder under consideration,
Fmin = minimum absolute financial quote obtained from any bidder
Note: Financial quote refers to the price for the entire project contract quoted by the bidder under Schedule-B of
the Price bid. To facilitate evaluation of the price bid and financial score formulation, the (%) percentage on ECV
quoted by the bidder as price bid under schedule-B will be converted to absolute amount based on the ECV.
Final Evaluation of the Proposal
Proposals will be ranked according to the combined normalised technical (Tn) and financial (Fn) scores using the
weights.
Where:
T = 0.30, the weight given to the Technical Score;
F = 0.70, the weight given to the Financial Score;
T+F=1
The combined technical and financial score (S) = Tn x T + Fn x F
The bidder who scores the highest combined technical and financial score as detailed above will be considered for
selection and award of the contract.
Normally there would be no post-tender negotiations. In case negotiations are warranted, it would be only under
exceptional circumstances and the Authority shall reserve the right to negotiate with the bidder (s) whose proposal
has been ranked first by the committee on the basis of Joint Technical and Financial Evaluation. If the Authority is
unable to finalize a service agreement with the bidder ranked first, the Authority may proceed to the next ranked
bidder, and so on until a contract is awarded. The Authority reserves the right to present a contract to the bidder
selected for negotiations. A contract will be awarded to the responsible, responsive bidder whose proposal
conforms to the RFP and is, in the opinion of the Authority, the most advantageous and represents the best value to
the project, price and other factors considered.
47
F.
AWARD OF CONTRACT
1. Award Criteria
a) The Authority will award the contract to the successful bidder whose tender is selected by the Tender
Approval Committee constituted by the Government
b) The Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any Tender or all tenders and to cancel the Tendering
process, at any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected
Bidder or Bidders or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the reasons for such
action.
2. Notification of Award and Signing of Agreement
a) The Bidder whose Tender has been selected/accepted will be notified of the award of the work by the
Authority prior to expiration of the Tender validity period. This letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions
of Contract called “Letter of Acceptance”) will indicate the sum that the Government will pay the
Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by the
Contractor as prescribed by the Contract (hereinafter and in the Contract called the “Contract Amount”).
b) When a tender is to be accepted the successful bidder shall attend the office of the Authority on the date
fixed in the Letter of acceptance. Upon intimation being given by the Authority, of acceptance of his
tender, the bidder shall make payment of the balance E.M.D., and additional security deposit wherever
needed by way of Demand Draft or unconditional and irrevocable Bank Guarantee obtained from a
Nationalized / Scheduled commercial Bank with a validity period of 36 months (9+12+12+3), and sign
an agreement in the form prescribed by the Authority for the due fulfillment of the contract. Failure to
attend the Authority’s office on the date fixed, to enter into the required agreement shall entail forfeiture
of the Earnest Money deposited. The written agreement to be entered into between the Contractor and the
Authority shall be the foundation of the rights and obligations of both the parties and the contract shall
not be deemed to be complete until the agreement has first been signed by the Contractor and then by the
proper officer authorized to enter into contract on behalf of the Authority.
c) The successful bidder has to sign an agreement within a period of 7 days from the date of receipt of
communication of acceptance of his tender.
d) If the selected bidder backs out at the time of agreement, penalty of forfeiture of EMD will be imposed
and business of the agency with all the Departments in A.P will be suspended for one year.
3. Security Deposit
(a) Within 7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance from the Authority, the successful tenderer shall
furnish the Authority, a Security Deposit in the form of Demand Draft or a Bank Guarantee which shall
be to the value of five percent (5%) of the contract price valid for a total period of 9+12+12+3=36
months.
(b) The Bank Guarantee shall be issued by any Scheduled Bank / Nationalized Bank located in India, as
chosen by the Tenderer.
(c) Within 7 days of receipt of Letter of Acceptance from the Authority, if the tender of the successful
tenderer is less by more than 25% of the estimated cost of the work to be executed, the tenderer shall
furnish extra deposit in the form of a Bank Guarantee or Demand Draft for the difference between the
tender amount and the 75% of the estimated value of the work.
48
(d) The Security Deposit for the work shall be returned to the Contractor at the end of Defect Liability
Period, subject to the satisfactory performance of the contract in all respects, less dues owing from the
Contractor.
(e) Failure of the successful tenderer to comply with the above clauses shall constitute sufficient grounds for
the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the EMD.
4. Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices
The Government requires that the bidders / suppliers / Contractors under Government financed contracts,
observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance of
this policy, the Government
a) define for the purposes of the provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
(i) “corrupt practices” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of anything of value to
influence the action of a Government official in procurement process or in contract execution: and
(ii)“fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a procurement
process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the Government and includes collusive
practice among Bidders (prior to or after Tender submission) designed to establish in Tender prices
at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the Government of the benefits of free and open
competition.
b) Will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for award has engaged in
corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contract in question.
c) Will blacklist / or debar firm, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, if at any time determines that
the firm has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for, or in executing a Government
Contract.
d) The Bidders shall be aware of the provisions stated in the General Conditions of Contract.
49
3. CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
A. GENERAL
1.
Interpretation:
1.1
In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male also means female, and viceversa. Headings have no significance. Works have their normal meaning under the language of the contract
unless specifically defined. The Authority will provide instructions clarifying queries about the conditions
of Contract.
1.2
The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.3
Agreement
Letter of Acceptance, notice to proceed with the works
Bill of quantities (Price-bid)
Technical bid
Conditions of contract
Specifications
Any other document listed as forming part of the Contract.
To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service providers,
organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not be
eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member
2.
Delegation:
2.1
The Authority may delegate any of its duties and responsibilities to other officers / agencies and may
cancel any delegation by an official order issued.
3.
Communications:
3.1
Communications between parties, which are referred to in the conditions, are effective only when in
writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered (in terms of Indian Contract Act)
4.
Personnel:
4.1
The Contractor shall provide and employ on the site only such technical assistants as are skilled and
experienced in their respective fields and such supervisory staff as are competent to give proper
supervision to the work. The Contractor shall provide and employ skilled, semiskilled and unskilled labour
as is necessary for proper and timely execution of the work.
4.2
The Contractor shall employ the required Key Personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel to
carry out the functions stated in the Schedule or other personnel approved by the Authority. Unless
otherwise specifically agreed between the parties and except in the case of retirement, resignation, death,
medical incapacity of the Key Personnel, the Contractor shall not replace any Key Personnel. The
Authority will approve any proposed replacement of Key Personnel only if their qualifications, abilities,
and relevant experience are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed.
4.3
Failure to employ the required Technical personnel by the Contractor, action will be taken as per contract
conditions.
4.4
The Technical personnel should be on full time and available at site whenever required by the Authority to
take instructions.
50
4.5
The names of the Technical personnel to be employed by the Contractor should be furnished in the
statement enclosed separately.
4.6
In case the contractor is already having more than one work on hand and has undertaken more than one
work at the same time, he should employ separate Technical personnel on each work. The Technical
resources deployed shall be dedicated in nature.
4.7
If the Authority asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of Contractor's staff or his work
force stating the reasons the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the site forthwith and has no
further connection with the work in the contract. The Contractor shall provide a qualified replacement for
such staff.
5.
Contractor’s Risks:
5.1
All risks of loss or damage to physical property and of personnel injury and death, attributable to the
Contractor’ negligence or willful default in the performance or non performance of the obligations under
the Contract are the responsibility of the Contractor and the Contractor undertakes to indemnify Authority
from and against all losses arising on account thereof. Upon prompt written notification by the Authority,
the Contractor will defend such claim at its expense and will pay any costs or damages that may be finally
awarded against the Authority.
5.2
The indemnities set out in Clause 5.1 shall be subject to the following conditions:
a) the Authority as promptly as practicable informs the Contractor in writing of the claim or
proceedings and provides all relevant evidence, documentary or otherwise;
b) the Authority shall, at the cost of the Contractor, give the Contractor all reasonable assistance in
the defense of such claim provided that the Indemnified Party may, at its sole cost and expense,
reasonably participate, through its attorneys or otherwise, in such defense;
c) if the Contractor does not assume full control over the defense of a claim as provided in this
clause, the Contractor may participate in such defense at its sole cost and expense, and the
Authority will have the right to defend the claim in such manner as it may deem appropriate, and
the cost and expense of the Authority will be reimbursed by the Authorit y;
d) the Authority shall not prejudice, pay or accept any proceedings or claim, or compromise any
proceeding or claim without the written intimation of the Contractor;
e) all settlement of claims subject to indemnification under this clause will be
i. entered into only with the consent of the Authority, which consent will not be unreasonably
withheld and include an unconditional release to the Indemnified Party from the claimant or
plaintiff for all liability in respect of such claim.; and
ii. include any appropriate confidentiality agreement prohibiting disclosure of the terms of such
settlement
f) the Authority shall account to the Contractor for all awards, settlements, damages and costs (if
any) finally awarded in favour of the Authority which are to be paid to it i n connection with any
such claim or proceedings;
g) the Contractor shall take steps that Authority may reasonably require to mitigate or reduce its loss
as a result of such a claim or proceedings;
h) In the event that the Contractor is obligated to indemnify the Authority pursuant to this clause, the
Contractor will, upon payment of such indemnity in full, be subrogated to all rights and defenses
of the Authority with respect to the claims to which such indemnification relates.
5.3
The liability of the Contractor (whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability in tort, by statute or
otherwise) for any claim in any manner related to the contract, including the work, deliverables or services
covered under this RFP, shall be the payment of direct damages only which shall in no event in the
aggregate exceed tender contract value payable under this Agreement.
51
6.
Insurance:
6.1
The Contractor shall provide insurance for an assured amount not less than 75% of the tender contract
value in the joint names of the Authority and the Contractor, to cover from the 15th day of signing of the
agreement to the end of the Defects Liability Period for the following events which are part of the
Contractor’s risks.




loss of or damage to the Works, NOC, PoPs and Materials;
loss of or damage to the Equipment;
loss of or damage to any property in connection with the Contract; and
injury to or death of any person(s) employed for the project.
6.2
Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Authority.
7.
Route Survey:
7.1
The Contractor should validate the design documents submitted as part of this bid, and submit compliance /
deviation summary of the implementation sites, in due agreement with the Authority. Price Bid should be
inclusive of conveyance and all other charges etc.
8.
Force Majeure
8.1
If, at any time, during the continuance of this contract, the performance in whole or in part by either party
of any obligation under this contract is prevented or delayed by reasons of any war or hostility, acts of the
public enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, fires, floods, explosions, epidemics, quarantine restrictions,
strikes, lockouts or act of God (hereinafter referred to as Force Majeure Events) provided notice of
happenings of any such eventuality is given by either party to the other within 21 days from the date of
occurrence thereof, neither party shall by reason of such event be entitled to terminate this contract nor
shall either party have any claim for damages against other in respect of such non-performance or delay in
performance, and deliveries under the contract shall be resumed as soon as practicable after such an event
come to an end or cease to exist, and the decision of the Purchaser as to whether the deliveries have been so
resumed or not shall be final and conclusive. Further that if the performance in whole or part of any
obligation under this contract is prevented or delayed by reasons of any such event for a period exceeding
60 days, either party may, at its option, terminate the contract
8.2
Following events shall not be considered as Force Majeure Event:
Cyclones that are not above the speed of 100 kms/hours.
8.3
Provided, also that if the contract is terminated under this clause, the Authority shall be at liberty to take
over from Contractor at a price to be fixed by the Authority, which shall be final, all unused, undamaged
and acceptable materials, bought out components and stores in course of implementation which may be in
possession of Contractor at the time of such termination or such portion thereof as the Authority may deem
fit, except such materials, bought out components and stores as the Contractor may with the concurrence of
the Department elect to retain.
9.
The works to be Completed by the Scheduled Completion Date:
9.1
The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry out the Works in
accordance with the programme submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Authority
and complete the work by the Scheduled Completion Date. The Authority reserves the right to impose
52
Liquidated Damages and forfeit the bid security, in case of failure of Contractor to complete the work by
the Scheduled Completion Date due to reasons attributable to the Contractor.
10.
Safety:
10.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.
11.
Access to the Site for the Contractor
11.1
The Authority shall give access of the site to the Contractor. If access to a part site is given, the Authority
will ensure that the part site so given access is amenable to carry out the work at site by the Contractor.
12.
Access to the Site for the Authority
12.1
The Contractor shall provide the Authority access to the site and to any place where work in connection
with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out.
12.2
At any time during the exit management period, where assets are located at the Contractor's premises, the
Contractor will be obliged to give reasonable rights of access to (or, in the case of assets located on a third
party's premises, procure reasonable rights of access to) the Authority and/or any replacement Bidder in
order to make an inventory of the assets for such period of time following termination or expiry of the
contract as is reasonably necessary to migrate the services to the Authority , or a replacement Bidder
13.
Instructions:
13.1
The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Authority and comply with all the applicable local
laws where the Site is located.
14.
Settlement of disputes:
14.1
If any dispute or difference of any kind whatsoever shall arise between the Authority and the Contractor in
connection with, or arising out of the contract, of the execution of the works, whether during the progress
of the works or after their completion and whether before or after the termination, abandonment or breach
of the Contract, it shall in the first place, be referred to and settled by the Authority who shall, within a
period of thirty days after being requested by the Contractor to do so, give written notice of his decision to
the Contractor. Upon receipt of the written notice of the decision of the Authority. The Contractor shall
promptly proceed without delay to comply with such notice of decision.
14.2
If the Authority fails to give notice of his decision in writing within a period of thirty days after being
requested or if the Contractor is dissatisfied with the decision of the Authority , the Contractor may within
thirty days after receiving such decision of the Authority, appeal to the Secretary, IT, E&C Department,
Government of Andhra Pradesh who shall afford an opportunity to the Contractor to be heard and to offer
evidence in support of his appeal, the Secretary, IT, E&C Department shall give notice of his decision
within a period of thirty days after the Contractor has given the said evidence in support of his appeal,
subject to arbitration, as hereinafter provided. Such decision of the Secretary, IT, E&C Department,
Government of Andhra Pradesh in respect of every matter so referred shall be final and binding upon the
Contractor and shall forthwith be given effect to by the Contractor, who shall proceed with the execution of
the works with all due diligence whether he requires arbitration as hereinafter provided, or not. If the
Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh has given written notice of his decision to
the Contractor and no claim to arbitration has been communicated to him by the Contractor within a period
of thirty days from receipt of such notice, the said decision shall remain final and binding upon the
Contractor. If the Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh shall fail to give notice
of this decision, as aforesaid, or if the Contractor be dissatisfied with any such decision, then and in any
such case the Contractor within thirty days after the expiration of the first named period of thirty days as
the case may be, require that the matter or matters in dispute be referred to arbitration by an arbitrator
appointed by mutual consent of both the parties. The agreement to appoint an arbitrator will be in
accordance with the Arbitration & Conciliation Act, 1996.
53
B. TIME FOR COMPLETION
15.
Program:
15.1
The scheduled time period for completion of the works is “Nine (9)” months from the date of entering into
agreement with the Contractor. Keeping in view the implementation plan & timelines, the work should be
programmed so as to achieve the milestones as mentioned there in.
15.2
After signing the agreement, the Contractor shall submit a detailed work plan, implementation schedules to
complete the works within 9 months from the date of signing of the agreement. The Contractor shall
forthwith begin the work after signing agreement and shall regularly and continuously proceed with them.
15.3
Stipulated Rate of progress :
i)
Work program for achieving the milestones as per implementation plan & timelines is given below
S. No.
Project Deliverable / Milestone
Timelines (D + n)
in Calendar Weeks
1
Team Mobilization & Project Inception Report
2
Route Survey & Network Validation
3
Commissioning of Network Operating Centre, Headed and all
other components of NOC
D + 16
Commissioning in the ‘first’ 2 identified Districts (at least 95%
PoPs) and providing service to the first customer
D + 18
Commissioning in ‘additional’ 5 identified Districts (at least 95%
PoPs)
D + 26
6
Commissioning in the remaining 6 Districts (at least 95% PoPs)
D + 34
7
Commissioning of all balance PoPs in the State
D + 37
8
Completion of any left over works and Project Go-Live
D + 39
4
5
D+2
D+4
D – Date of Agreement
Note: The commissioning means completion of Fiber laying, setting up of the PoP, deployment and
installation of network equipment and all related activities and certification by the Project Monitoring
Agency (PMA).
15.4
The Contractor shall commence the works on site within the period specified under paras 15.1 to 15.3
above after receipt by him a written order to this effect from the Authority and shall proceed with the same
without delay, except as may be expressly sanctioned or ordered by the Authority, or be wholly beyond the
Contractor’s control.
15.5
The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary way leases required by him in
connection with access to the site. The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost any additional
accommodation outside the site required by him for the purposes of the work.
54
15.6
Delays and extension of time:
If at any time during the performance of the contract, the Contractor encounters condition impending
timely performance of service, the Contractor shall forthwith notify to the Authority in writing the fact of
the delay, it’s likely duration and its cause(s). Upon receipt of such notification, reasonable extension of
time maybe allowed by the Authority or by the officer competent at its discretion to sanction the
extension, for unavoidable delays, such as may result from causes, which in the opinion of the Authority
and are undoubtedly beyond the control of the contractor. Extension will not be given except in
exceptional circumstances.
Whenever authorized alterations or additions made during the progress of the work are of such a nature in
the opinion of the Authority as to justify an extension of time in consequence thereof, such extension will
be granted in writing by the Authority when ordering such alterations or additions.
16.
Implementation Program:
16.1
The Contractor shall furnish immediately after signing the agreement a program showing the sequence in
which he proposed to carry out the work, monthly progress expected to be achieved, also indicating date of
Implementation, Testing and Commissioning. The schedule should be such that it is practicable to achieve
completion of the whole work within the time limit fixed and in keeping with the milestone program
specified in Para 16 above and shall obtain the approval of the Authority. Further rate of the progress as in
the program shall be kept up to date. In case it is subsequently found necessary to alter this program, the
Contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance the revised program incorporating necessary modifications
and get the same approved by the Authority. No revised program shall be operative without approval of the
Authority.
16.2
The Authority shall have all times the right, without any way violating this contract, or forming grounds for
any claim, to alter the order of progress of the works or any part thereof and the Contractor shall after
receiving such directions proceed in the order directed. The Contractor shall also report the progress to the
Authority within 7 days of the Authority’s direction to alter the order of progress of works.
16.3
The Contractor shall give written notice to the Authority whenever planning or progress of the works is
likely to be delayed or disrupted unless any further drawings or order including a direction, instruction or
approval is issued by the Authority within a reasonable time. The notice shall include details of the drawing
or order required and of why and by when it is required and of any delay or disruption likely to be suffered
if it is late.
17.
Speed of Work:
17.1
The Contractor shall at all times maintain the progress of work to conform to the latest operative progress
schedule approved by the Authority. The contractor should furnish progress report indicating the
program and progress once in a fortnight indicating the stage reached in the design, ordering of material,
manufacture, delivery and supervision of erection of all components of plant. All variances from the
agreed schedule are to be promptly reported. The Authority may at any time in writing direct the
contractor to slow down any part or whole of the work for any reason (which shall not be questioned)
whatsoever, and the contractor shall comply with such orders of the Authority. The compliance of such
orders shall not entitle the contractor to any claim of compensation. Such orders of the Authority for
slowing down the work will however be duly taken into account while granting extension of time if
asked by the contractor for which no extra payment will be entertained.
55
17.2
Delays in Commencement or progress or neglect of work shall lead to forfeiture of earnest money, Security
deposit and withholding of amounts:
If, at any time, the Authority is of the opinion that the Contractor is delaying Commencement of the
work or violating any of the provisions of the contract or is neglecting or delaying the progress of the
work as defined by the tabular statement, he shall so advise the Contractor in writing and at the same
time demand compliance in accordance with conditions of Tender notice. If the Contractor neglects to
comply with such demand within seven days after receipt of such notice, it shall then or at any time
thereafter, be lawful for the Authority without prejudice to other remedies available under the contract
take suitable action in accordance with conditions of contract including forfeiture of security deposit,
imposition of liquidated damages and/or terminate the contract in full or in part.
18.
Suspension of works by the Contractor
18.1
If the Contractor suspends the works, without sanction of the Authority or in the opinion of the Authority
neglect or fail to proceed with due diligence in the performance of his part of the Contract as laid down in
the Schedule rate of progress, or if he continues to default or repeat such default, the Authority shall take
appropriate penal action.
18.2
If the Contractor stops work for 28 days and the Stoppage has not been authorized by the Authority may
at its option terminate the Contract.
18.3
If the Contractor has delayed the completion of works the Authority may take such recourse as available
under the contract.
19.
Extension of the Intended Completion Date
19.1
The Authority may extend the Intended Completion Date if a Variation is issued which makes it impossible
for Completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date.
19.2
The Authority shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21
days of the Contractor asking the Authority concerned for a decision upon the effect of a Variation and
submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has
failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the
new Intended Completion Date.
20.
Delays Ordered
20.1
The Authority may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity within the Work.
21.
Early Warning:
21.1
The Contractor is to warn the Authority at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future events or
circumstances that may adversely affect the Execution of Works.
21.2
The Contractor shall cooperate with the Authority in making and considering proposals for how the effect
of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the work and in carrying
out any resulting instruction of the Authority .
22.
Management Meetings:
56
22.1
The Authority may require the Contractor to attend management meetings from time-to-time. The
business of a management meeting shall be to review the progress and installation related issues of the
project and programme for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early
warning procedure. Additionally, the Contractor shall also be required to attend any other meetings from
time to time as advised by the Authority.
57
C. Inspection, Testing & Installation
23.
Identifying Defects
23.1
The Authority or the authorised official / agency can check the Contractor’s work and notify the Contractor
of any Defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor’s responsibilities. The
Authority may instruct the Contractor to verify the Defect and to uncover and test any work that the
checking authorityconsiders may be a Defect.
23.2
Access to the Contractor's works shall be granted to the Authority at all reasonable times for the purpose
of ascertaining quality and progress
24.
Tests
24.1
If the Authority instructs the Contractor to carry out any test to check whether any work has a Defect, the
Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples.
25.
Correction of Defects
25.1
The Authority or the authorised official / agency may give notice to the Contractor of any Defects before
the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins from the Project Completion Date. The defects
liability period shall be extended for as long as defects remain to be corrected by the Contractor.
25.2
Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct and make good the notified defect
within the time span specified by the Authority's notice without any cost to the Authority.
26.
Uncorrected Defects
26.1
If the contractor has not corrected the defect within the time specified in the Authority's notice, the
Authority shall get it rectified at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
26.2
The Authority may introduce O.K. cards and prescribe the formats there of. O.K. cards shall relate to all
major components of the work. The Contractor / his authorized representative shall be required to initiate
and fill in and present the O.K. card to the construction staff that would check the respective items and send
to the quality control staff for final check and clearance / O.K. Any defects pointed out by the construction
supervision staff or by the Quality Control staff shall promptly be attended to by the Contractors and the
fact of doing so be duly recorded on the back of O.K. card.
26.3
The Authority may also introduce check lists which shall be kept in Bound registers by the supervision
staff. The Contractor may be required to fill up these lists in the first instance and shall be subsequently
checked by the authorised officials / agency.
27.
Quality Control
In addition to the normal inspection by the regular staff in-charge of the work, the work and the final bills
of the Contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract, etc. will also be inspected by the Authority
and any other agency or party approved by the Authority (department QC, third party QC,PMC, PMA etc.)
as the case may be and during inspections by the State or District level Vigilance Cell Unit if any substandard work or excess payments are noticed with reference to measurement books etc., action will be
taken based on their observations and the Contractor shall be liable to refund the amount of over-payment
58
and it shall be lawful for the Authority to recover the same from the Contractor in the manner legally
permissible and these will be effected by the Authority
28.
Inspections
i)
In addition to the quality assurance inspections of the concerned, the Contractor is required to cooperate and
extend all facilities for the routine / regular / surprise, quality control inspections of the Authority or any
authorized official agency.
ii)
In the case of various appurtances in addition to the required quality assurance inspections and tests by the
Authority and its subordinate officials at factory and at site as the case may be, the Contractor is required to
cooperate and extend all facilities for the routine / regular / surprise, quality control inspections and tests and
progress monitoring, by the Authority or any authorised official / agency for the quality check inspections and
tests by third party personnel if any engaged by the Authority. If such inspections involve the inspecting
personnel visits to the various manufacturing units at different stages based on need, the cost of said
inspections shall be borne by agency.
The Contractor shall test all the materials as per agreement specifications and results shall be recorded duly
signed by the Contractor or his representative.
In addition to above, after the supply of materials to site, the Authority is at liberty to recheck the materials
supplied at the cost of the Contractor and results shall be binding. If any non-compliance to the specifications
is noticed, the entire lot will be rejected and payment made if any will be recovered from the Contractor.
59
D. Cost Control
29.
Bill of Quantities (BoQ):
29.1
The Bill of Quantities will contain the requisite items and their estimated quantities for the project work to
be done by the Contractor.
The estimated Bill of Quantities for this work has been specified in Schedule – A of the price bid
document.
29.2
30.
Changes in the Quantities
30.1
The Contractor is bound to execute all supplemental works that are found essential, incidental and
inevitable during execution of project works.
30.2
The payment of rates for any supplemental items beyond the quantities estimated in the BoQ will be
regulated as under:
For quantities in excess of the estimated BoQ, the PMA or any authorized official / agency shall validate
the requirements and necessity of variations in quantity or extra items after due diligence, based on site
conditions and work contingencies.
The recommendations of the PMA or any authorized official / agency of the Authority will be submitted to
the Authority for its consideration and necessary approval.
For variation in quantities upto 25% excess or less of the estimated quantity in BoQ, the unit rates quoted
by the bidder in his price bid under Schedule-A shall be applicable. Beyond this, the Contractor is eligible
for variation in quantities and the price there of as per mutually agreed terms and conditions.
31.
Extra (New) Items
31.1
Extra items of work shall not vitiate the contract. The reimbursement for extra items shall be validated by
PMA and cleared by the Authority. The Contractor shall be bound to execute extra items of work as
directed by the Authority. The rates for extra items shall be worked out as per mutually agreed terms and
conditions.
For new items which are beyond the scope of the BoQ, the PMA or any authorized official / agency shall
validate the requirements and necessity of such new / extra items after due diligence, based on site
conditions and work contingencies
The Contractor shall submit in writing well in advance at least 14 days before the Authority a statement of
extra items if any that they need to initiate during the course of project works.
31.2
31.3
32.
Payment Certificates
32.1
The Contractor shall submit to the Authority monthly statements of the estimated value of the work
completed less the cumulative amount certified previously.
The value of work executed shall be determined by the Authority.
The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bill of Quantities
completed.
The Authority may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item
previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information.
32.2
32.3
32.4
60
33.
Payments
33.1
Payment Schedule
Clause
No.
M1
Payment Milestone
Fiber Procurement
Placement &
Order
Field Validation of the
network route / design /
architecture
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
Payment as a
percentage of the
Total contract
value
Commissioning of the NOC
Setup, Headend and all other
components of NOC at
identified
location
in
Visakhapatnam
Commissioning of atleast
95% of PoPs & network in
the first two identified
districts
Commissioning of atleast 95%
of PoPs & network in the next
five identified districts
Commissioning of 95% of
PoPs & network in the
remaining six districts
5%
1. Proof of the placement of OFC purchase order for
the entire project,
2. Letter of acceptance from the Department on
validation of:
a. Route Map
b. Network Design
c. Network Architecture
15%
Commissioning Reports issued by the Project
Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification /
testing
(PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the
date of submission of claims)
15%
Commissioning Reports issued by the Project
Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification /
testing
(PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the
date of submission of claims)
20%
Commissioning Reports issued by the Project
Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification /
testing
(PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the
date of submission of claims)
25%
Commissioning Reports issued by the Project
Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification /
testing
(PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the
date of submission of claims)
10%
Commissioning Reports issued by the Project
Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification /
testing
(PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the
date of submission of claims)
10%
Letter of acceptance from the Department on approved
O&M Report
Commissioning of all the PoPs
and any leftover works
End of O&M Phase
Documents to be submitted
61
Note: In case of any variations / extra items, such claims will be considered only with reference to the
entire project BoQ and the procedure as defined in Section 30 shall be followed.
Payments will be made to the Contractor under certificates, within 21 days from the date of certification by
the PMA or any authorized official / agency.
34.
Certificate of Completion of works
34.1
Certificate of Completion of works
34.1.1 When the whole of the work has been completed and has satisfactorily passed any final test that may be
prescribed by the Authority, the Contractor may give a notice to that effect to the Authority accompanied
by an undertaking to carry out any rectification work during the period of maintenance, such notice and
undertaking shall be in writing and shall be deemed to be request by the Contractor for the Authority to
issue a Certificate of completion in respect of the Works. The Authority shall, within twenty one days of
the date of delivery of such notice either issue to the Contractor, a certificate of completion stating the date
on which, in his opinion, the works were completed in accordance with the Contract or give instructions in
writing to the Contractor specifying all the Works which, in Authority opinion, required to be done by the
Contractor before the issue of such Certificate. The Authority shall also notify the Contractor of any defects
in the Works affecting completion that may appear after such instructions and before completion of the
Works specified there in. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive such Certificate of the Completion
within twenty one days of completion to the satisfaction of the Authority of the Works so specified and
making good of any defects so notified.
35.
Taxes included in the bid
The price bid quoted by the Contractor should be inclusive of Value Added Tax (VAT) and any other taxes
/ duties / charges that are payable to the Central / State Governments or Statutory / Local bodies at the
prevailing rates as applicable on all materials that the Contractor will have to purchase for performance of
this contract.
36.
Liquidated Damages
36.1
If for any reason, which does not entitle the Contractor to an extension of item, the rate of progress of
works, or any section is at any time, in the opinion of the Authority too slow to ensure completion by the
prescribed time or extended time for completion, the Authority shall so notify the Contractor in writing and
the Contractor shall there upon take such steps as are necessary and the Authority may approve to expedite
progress so as to complete the works or such section by the prescribed time or extended time. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such steps. If as a result of any notice
given by the Authority under this clause the Contractor seeks the Authority permission to do any work at
night or on Sundays, if locally recognized as holidays, or their locally recognized equivalent, such
permission shall not be unreasonably refused.
36.2
If the Contractor fails to complete whole of the works or any part thereof or section of the works within the
stipulated periods of individual milestones (including any bonafide extensions allowed by the competent
authority without levying liquidated damages), the Authority, may without prejudice to any other method
of recovery will deduct at the rates as specified below, subject to a maximum of 10% of the contract value.
The payment or deductions of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to
complete the works, or from any other of his obligations and liabilities under the contract.
62
36.3
Quantum of Liquidated Damages as assessed below shall be levied by the Authority. The decision of the
Authority thereon shall be final and binding on the Contractor. Further, the same shall not be challenged by
the Contractor before Arbitration tribunal. This issue shall stand specifically excluded from the purview of
the arbitration clause and as such shall not be referred to arbitration.
Reference
Targeted time schedule
Milestone 1:
Commissioning of the NOC
setup & commissioning of at
least 95% POPs in the first 2
identified
districts
and
commencing of service to the
first customer.
D+18 weeks
Milestone 2:
Commissioning all PoPs and
related works in all Districts.
D+37 weeks
Milestone 3:
Completion of all project works
and Project Go-Live
D+39 weeks
Rate for Liquidated Damages
INR 10,00,000/- per day until
the defined milestone-1 is
achieved
INR 10,00,000/- per day until
the defined milestone-2 is
achieved.
INR 10,00,000/- per day until
the defined milestone-3 is
achieved.
D: Date of Agreement
37.
Securities
37.1
The Security Deposit and Additional Security (for discount tender percentage beyond 25%) shall be
provided to the Authority not later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in
an amount and form and by a bank acceptable to the Authority. The Security Deposit shall be valid until a
date 90 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period and the additional security shall be valid
until a date 90 days from the date of issue of the certificate of completion.
38.
Cost of Repairs
38.1
Loss or damage to the Works or material between the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction
Period shall be remedied by the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the
Contractor’s acts or omissions.
63
E. COMPLETING THE CONTRACT
39.
Completion
39.1
The Contractor shall request the Authority to issue a Certificate of completion of the contract and the
Authority will do so upon deciding that all the works related to the project/contract are completed.
40.
The contract completion period will be 12 months after the completion of the project works under
Warranty / Operations & Maintenance.
40.1
The Authority shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the authorized official / agency
issuing a certificate of Completion.
41.
Final Account
41.1
The Contractor shall supply to the Authority a detailed account of the total amount that the Contractor
considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Authority shall
issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56
days of receiving the Contractor’s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Authority shall issue
within 56 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the final
account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Authority shall decide on the amount
payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate within 56 days of receiving the Contractor’s
revised account.
42.
Termination
42.1
The Authority may terminate the Contract if the Contractor causes a fundamental breach of the Contract.
42.2
Fundamental breaches of Contract include, but shall not be limited to the following.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
The Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current program
and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Authority.
The Contractor has become bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for a reconstruction or
amalgamation.
The Authority gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental breach of
Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the
Authority; and
The Contractor does not maintain safety, security measures as required
The Contractor has delayed the completion of works by the number of days for which the maximum
amount of liquidated damages can be paid as defined.
If the Contractor, in the judgment of the Authority has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in
competing for or in the executing the contract.
If the Contractor having been given by the Authority a notice in writing to rectify, reconstruct or
replace any defective work or that the work is being performed in an inefficient or otherwise improper
or un-workman like manner shall omit to comply with the requirement of such notice for a period of
fifteen (15) days thereafter.
If the Contractor persistently neglects to carry out his obligations under the contract and/ or commits
default in complying with any of the terms and conditions of the contract and does not remedy it or
take effective steps to remedy it within fifteen (15) days after a notice in writing is given to him in that
behalf by the Authority.
64
i)
j)
If the Contractor being a company passes a resolution or the court shall make an order that the
company shall be wound up or if a receiver or a manager on behalf of a creditor shall be appointed or
if circumstances shall arise which entitle the court or the creditor to appoint a receiver or a manager or
which entitle the court to make a winding up order.
If the Contractor assigns, transfers, sublets (engagement of labour on a piece-work basis or of labour
with materials not to be incorporated in the work, shall not be deemed to be subletting) or otherwise
parts with or attempts to assign, transfer, sublet or otherwise parts with the entire works or any portion
in contravention to the provisions of this tender.
For the purpose of this paragraph: “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of
anything of value to influence the action of a public official in the procurement process or in contract
execution. “Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a procurement
process or the execution of a contract to the detrimental to the Government and includes collusive practice
among Bidders (prior to or after Tender submission) designed to establish Tender prices at artificial noncompetitive levels and to deprive the Government of the benefits of free and open competition.
42.3
Notwithstanding the above, the Authority may terminate the contract as per the conditions of contract, in
the interest of public convenience.
42.4
If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and secured
leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible. Upon such termination on the ground of fundamental reaches
committed by the Contractor, Performance Guarantee under the contract shall be liable to be forfeited and
shall be absolutely at the disposal of Authority.
42.5
In the event of above courses being adopted by the Authority for fundamental breaches committed by
Contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reasons of
his having purchased or procured any materials or entering into any engagements or made any advances on
account or with a view to the execution of the work or the performance of the contract. And in case action
is taken under any of the provision aforesaid, the Contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid any
sum for any work thereof or actually performed under this contract unless and until the Authority has
certified in writing the performance of such work and the value payable in respect thereof and Contractor
shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified.
43.
Property
43.1
All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works and Works are deemed to be the property of
the Authority.
The title of ownership of supplies furnished by the Contractor shall not pass on to the Authority for any
supplies / material till all the supplies / material are finally accepted by the Authority after commissioning
and issue of certificate(s).
However, the Authority shall have the lien on all such supplies/material as soon as any advance progressive
payment is made by the Authority to the Contractor for such Supplies/material and the Contractor shall not
subject these supplies/material for use other than those intended under this Contract.
43.2
43.3
65
F. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
44.
Availability of access to electrical poles, site at NOC, Substations and POPs:
a) The Contractor will be provided right of way & the requisite access to the electrical assets such as electrical
poles, substations, distribution / transmission structures, as needed to pull aerial optical fiber cable and the
requisite space to set up Points of Presence (PoPs) at identified substations and other identified locations
where PoPs are to be set up.
b) Requisite space for Network Operating Centre at Visakhapatnam will be provided by the Authority.
c) The Authority will facilitate provision of necessary electrical connections with requisite loads and the
electrical connection charges and consumption charges will be borne / reimbursed by the Authority.
d) The field works such as pulling / installing the fiber over the electrical poles and setting up PoPs at
substations shall be carefully executed by the contractor or his employees as per the guidance of the local
electricity department officials, duly following the prescribed safety / security measures.
45.
Compliance with Labour Regulations
45.1
During continuance of the contract, the Contractor and his sub-Contractors shall abide at all times by all
existing labour enactments and rules made there under, regulations, notifications and bye laws of the State
or Central Government or local authority and any other labour law (including rules), regulations, bye laws
that may be passed or notifications that may be issued under any labour law in future either by the State or
the Central Government or the local authority and also applicable labour regulations, health and sanitary
arrangements for workmen, insurance and other benefits. Salient features of some of the major labour laws
that are applicable to construction industry are given below. The Contractor shall keep the Authority
indemnified in case any action is taken against Department by the competent authority on account of
contravention of any of the provisions of any Act or rules made thereunder, regulations or notifications
including amendments. If the Authority is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as may be necessary
to cause or observe, or for non-observance of the provision stipulated in the notifications/bye
laws/Acts/Rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on the part of the Contractor, the Authority
shall have the right to deduct any money due to the Contractor including his amount of performance
security. The Authority shall also have right to recover from the Contractor any sum required or estimated
to be required for making good the loss or damage suffered by the Authority .
The employees of the Contractor and the Sub-Contractor in no case shall be treated as the staff of the
Authority at any point of time.
46.
Liabilities of the Contractor
46.1
Accident Relief and workmen compensation: The Contractor should make all necessary arrangements for
the safety of workmen on the occurrence of the accident, which results in the injury or death of any of the
workmen employed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall within 24 hours of the happenings of the
accident and such accidents should intimate in writing to the officials of the Authority the act of such
accident. The Contractor shall indemnify the Authority against all loss or damage sustained by the
Authority resulting directly or indirectly from his failure to give intimation in the manner aforesaid
including the penalties or fines if any payable by the Authority as a consequence of Authority failure to
give notice under workmen’s compensation Act or otherwise conform to the provisions of the said Act with
regard to such accident.
66
46.2
In the event of an accident in respect of which compensation may become payable under the workmen’s
compensation Act VIII 23 whether by the Contractor or by the Authority it shall be lawful for the Authority
to retain such sum of money which may in the opinion of the Authority be sufficient to meet such liability.
The opinion of the Authority shall be final in regard to all matters arising under this clause.
46.3
The Contractor shall at all times indemnify the Govt. of A.P. against all claims which may be made under
the workmen’s compensation act or any statutory modification thereafter or rules there under or otherwise
consequent of any damage or compensation payable in consequent of any accident or injuries sustained or
death of any workmen engaged in the performance of the business relating to the Contractor.
47.
Contractor’s Staff, Representatives and Labour
48.
(a)
The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain on the works, staff of qualified Engineers, and Supervisors
of sufficient experience of similar other jobs to assure that the quality of work turned out shall be as
intended in the specifications. The Contractor shall also maintain at the works, a Work Manager with
sufficient status, experience and office and duly authorize him to deal with all aspects of the day-today
work. All communications on any commitments from the Work Manager shall be considered as
binding on the Contractor.
(b)
The Contractor shall at all times submit details of skilled and unskilled labour and equipment
employed to the Authority in prescribed proforma as he may require to assess and ensure the proper
progress of work.
Accommodation and food
The Contractor should arrange accommodation he needs, at his own cost. The Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for supply of food grains, fuel and other provision to his staff and labour including controlled
commodities.
49.
Relationship
Contractor shall have to furnish information along with tender, about the relationship he is having with any
official of the Authority
50.
Protection of adjoining premises
The Contractor shall protect adjoining sites against structural, decorative and other damages that could be
caused by the execution of these works and make good at his cost any such damages.
51.
Work during night or on Sundays and holidays
The works can be allowed to be carried out during night, Sundays or authorized holidays in order to enable
him to meet the schedule targets and the work shall require almost round the clock working keeping inview:
(i) The provisions of relevant labour laws being adhered to
(ii) Adequate lighting, supervision and safety measures are established to the satisfaction of the Authority
and
(iii) The construction programme given by the Contractor and agreed upon by the Authority envisages such
night working or working during Sundays or authorized holidays.
67
52.
Layout of material stacks
The Contractor shall deposit materials for the purpose of the work on such parts only of the ground as may be
approved by the Authority before starting work. A detailed survey, clearly indicating position and areas where
materials shall be stacked and sheds built is to be conducted by the Contractor at his own cost and only after
obtaining necessary approval of the plan for use of sites by the Authority, the Contractor can use the sites
accordingly.
53.
Plant and Equipment
53.1
The Contractor shall have sufficient plant, equipment and labour and shall work such hours and shifts as
may be necessary to maintain the progress on the work as per the approval progress Schedule. The working
and shifts hours shall comply with the Govt. Regulations in force.
53.2
It is expressly and clearly stated that Contractor shall make his own arrangements to equip himself with all
machinery and special tools and plant for the speedy and proper execution of the work and the department
does not undertake responsibility towards their supply.
54.
Inconvenience to public
The Contractor shall not deposit materials at any site, which will cause inconvenience to public. The Authority
may direct the Contractor to remove such materials or may undertake the job at the cost of the Contractor.
55.
Conflict of interest
Any bribe, commission, gift or advantage given, promised or offered by on behalf of Contractor or his partner,
agent or servant or any one on his behalf to any officer, staff, representatives of the Authority , or any persons
on their behalf, in relation to the obtaining or to execution of this, or any other contract with the Authority
shall in addition to any criminal liability, which it may occur, will lead to the cancellation of this contract and
the Authority is not liable for any loss or damage to the Contractor resulting from any such cancellation. The
Authority shall then be entitled to deduct the amount, so payable from any money, otherwise due to the
Contractor under this or any other contract.
56.
Contract documents and materials to be treated as confidential
All documents, correspondences, decisions and orders, concerning the contract shall be considered as
confidential and/or restricted in nature by the Contractor and he shall not divulge or allow access to them by
any unauthorized person.
57.
General obligations of Contractor
57.1
The Contractor shall, subject to the provision of the contract and with due care and diligence, execute and
maintain the works in accordance with specifications and drawings.
57.2
The Contractor shall promptly inform the Authority of any error, omission, fault and such defect in the
design of or specifications for the works which are discovered when reviewing the contract documents or
in the process of execution of the works.
57.3
Pending finalization of disputes, the Contractor shall proceed with execution of work with all due
diligence.
68
58.
Security Measures
58.1
Security requirements for the work shall be in accordance with the Government’s general requirements
including provisions of this clause and the Contractor shall conform to such requirements and shall be held
responsible for the actions of all his staff, employees and the staff and employees of his sub-Contractors.
58.2
All Contractors’ employees and representatives shall wear identification badges provided by the
Contractor. Badges shall identify the Contractor and his employees and shall be worn at all times while at
the site.
58.3
All vehicles used by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with Contractor’s name.
58.4
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and security of the works for the duration of the contract
and shall provide and maintain continuously adequate security personnel to fulfill these obligations. The
requirements of security measures shall include, but not limited to maintenance of order on the site,
provision of all lighting, fencing, guard flagmen and all other measures necessary for the protection of the
works within the colonies, camps and elsewhere on the site, all materials delivered to the site, all persons
employed in connection with the works continuously throughout working and non-working period
including nights, Sundays and holidays for duration of the contract.
58.5
Separate payment will not be made for provision of safety / security services.
59.
Firefighting measures
59.1
59.2
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate firefighting equipment and take adequate fire
precaution measures for the safety of all personnel and temporary and permanent works and shall take
action to prevent damage to destruction by fire of trees shrubs and grasses.
Separate payment will not be made for the provision of fire prevention measures.
60.
Sanitation
The Contractor shall implement the sanitary and watch and ward rules and regulations for all forces
employed under this contract and if the Contractor fails to enforce these rules, the Authority may enforce
them at the expenses of the Contractor.
61.
Training of personnel:
The Contractor shall provide free of any charge vocational technical training with adequate facilities to
identified government officers, students, engineers, supervisors, foremen, skilled workmen etc. not
exceeding fifteen in number at a time on the Contractor’s work at identified locations as directed by the
Authority. The salaries, allowances etc. of the trainers will be borne by the Authority and the training
schemes will be drawn up by the Authority in consultation with the Contractor.
62.
Ecological balance:
62.1
The Contractor shall maintain ecological balance by preventing de-forestation, water pollution and
defacing of natural landscape. The Contractor shall so conduct his implementation as to prevent any
unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the work. In
respect of the ecological balance, Contractor shall observe the following instructions.
62.2
Where unnecessary destruction, scarring, damage or defacing may occur, as result of the operation, the
same shall be repaired, replanted or otherwise corrected at the Contractor’s expense.
69
62.3
All trees and shrubbery which are not specifically required to be cleared or removed for construction
purposes shall be preserved and shall be protected from any damage that may be caused by the Contractor’s
construction operation and equipment. The removal of trees and shrubs will be permitted only after prior
approval by the competent authority. Trees shall not be used for anchorages.
62.4
The Contractor’s activities shall be performed by methods that will present entrance or accidental spillage
of solid matter contaminants, debris and other objectionable pollutants and wastage into river. Such
pollutant and waste include earth and earth products, garbage, industrial wastes, radio-active substances,
mercury, oil and other petroleum products, aggregate processing, mineral salts and thermal pollution.
Pollutants and wastes shall be disposed off in a manner and at sites approved by the competent authority.
62.5
In conduct of activities and operation of equipment the Contractor shall utilize such practicable methods
and devices as are reasonably available to control, prevent and otherwise minimize the air pollution. The
excessive omission of dust in to the atmosphere will not be permitted during the manufacture, handling and
storage of necessary material and the Contractor shall use such methods and equipment as a necessary for
collection and disposal or prevention of dust during this operation. The Contractor’s methods of storing and
handling material shall also include means of eliminating atmospheric discharges of dust, equipment and
vehicles that give objectionable omission of exhaust gases shall not be operated.
62.6
Separate payment will not be made for complying with the provisions of this clause and all cost shall be
deemed to have been included in the unit rates and prices included in the contract. If any provision is not
complied with within a reasonable time even after issue of a notice in this respect, the necessary operations
would be carried out by the Authority at the cost of the Contractor. Orders of the Authority in this respect
would be final and binding on the Contractor.
63. Possession prior to completion
The Authority shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed part of work or works or any
part thereof either temporarily or permanently. Such possession or use shall not be deemed as an acceptance of
any work either completed or not completed in accordance with the contract except where expressly otherwise
specified by the Authority.
64. Access to the Contractor’s books
Whenever it is considered necessary by the Authority to ascertain the actual cost of execution of any particular
extra item of work or supply material or of extra items or claims, he shall direct the Contractor to produce the
relevant documents such as payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials and any or all data relevant to
the item or necessary to determine its cost etc. and the Contractor shall when so required furnish all
information pertaining to the aforesaid items in the mode and manner that may be specified by the Authority.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause, the Contractor shall have no obligation to produce any
internal costing mechanisms or any internal financial or commercial data. Further, the Contractor shall not be
required to provide any data relating to its other customers, or any personnel or employees not related to this
project.
65.
Drawings to be kept at site
One copy of the drawings furnished to the Contractor shall be kept by the Contractor on the site and the same
shall at all reasonable time be available for inspection and use by the Authority or any authorized
officials/agency.
70
66.
Income tax
66.1
During the currency of the contract deduction of income tax at applicable rate shall be made from the gross
value of each bill of the contract
The Contractor’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay personnel income taxes in respect of their
salaries and wages as are chargeable under the laws and regulations for the time being in force, and the
Contractor shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be imposed on him by
such laws and regulations
66.2
67.
Supply of material
67.1
67.2
67.3
The Contractor has to make his own arrangements for procurements, supply and use of materials.
All materials so procured should conform to the relevant specifications indicated in the bidding documents.
The Contractor shall follow all regulations of the Authority / Government of India in respect of import
licenses etc., if the procurement of the materials is through imports and he shall be responsible for the
payment of applicable duties and taxes, port clearances, inland transportation etc.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for adequate storage of the materials
The Contractor shall test all the materials as per the agreement specifications and the results shall be
recorded duly signed by the Contractor or his representative
67.4
67.5
68.
Defect liability period (DLP)
68.1
The defect liability period under this contract is 12 months from the Completion Date of the Project
(P.C.D.)
The Completion Date of the Project shall be reckoned as shown below:
Project Completion Date (P.C.D.) = A period of 12 months of O&M from the date of the completion of
works (which is scheduled for a period of 9 months from the date of concluding the agreement).
i.e., P.C.D. = Date of Agreement + Works completion period + 12 months of O&M.
= Date of Agreement + 9 months + 12 months
D.L.P. = P.C.D. + 12 months
68.2
Obligations of Contractor during DLP
68.2.1 If any defect in the fiber network infrastructure equipment is noticed during the defect liability period, the
contractor at his expense shall attend them along with the required men and material for rectification.
68.2.2 In case any defective material provided by the contractor is noticed by the Authority during the defect
liability period, the contractor has to replace / repair the same at free of cost.
69.
Action where no specifications are specified
In the case of any class of work for which there is no such Specifications as referred to in contract, such work
shall be carried out in accordance with the Bureau of Indian Standards Specifications. In case there are no such
Specifications in Bureau of Indian Standards, the work shall be carried out in all respects in accordance with
the instructions and requirements of the Authority .
71
70.
Safety Code
In respect of all labor directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance of the Contractor’s part
of this contract, the Contractor shall at its own expense arrange for the safety provisions as per all statutory
provisions and necessary safety provisions.
71.
Release of Information:
The Contractor shall not, during or any time after the term of the contract, communicate or use in advertising,
publicity, sales releases or in any other medium, photographs, or other reproduction of the work under this
Contract or description of the site dimensions, quantity, quality or other information, concerning the Work
unless prior written permission has been obtained from the Authority.
72.
Compliance with Security Requirements:
During the currency of the project contractor shall adhere and conform to the Network Security Policy of the
Authority. If required the Authority may adopt the guidelines and standards for information security published
by Government of India from time to time. Contractor need to ensure compliance of applicable provision of:
a. The Information Technology Act, 2000” and amendments thereof and
b. Guidelines and advisories for information/network security published by CERT-In/Department of
Electronics and Information Technology (Deity) (Government of India)
c. Network security related guidelines issued by the Department of Telecom.
Security guidelines that are published and are applicable as on the date of bid submission need to be complied
with by the contractor.
In case there are any changes in the security guidelines from time to time in future after the commissioning of
this project, the contractor shall be required to implement the same without any additional cost to the
Authority to the extent the same can be complied with by change in processes or by change in configuration of
existing equipment.
72
4. TECHNICAL BID
Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing
electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure
in the State of Andhra Pradesh
Technical Experience of the Bidder
(after 1st April, 2005)
S.
No
Technical Category
1
Experience of laying / pulling and
installing optical fiber cable (OFC)
in India.
2
Experience of setting up and
maintaining Network Operating
Centre services on WAN in India
3
Experience
in
implementing
Operating Support System &
Business Support System (OSS /
BSS) in communications / internet
service sectors in India
4
Experience in setting up and
maintaining Wide Area Network /
Points of Presence and its related
electronics equipment in different
locations in India
5
Experience of setting up and
managing operations of Cable TV
Headend of minimum 200
channels in India
Experience details (after
1st April, 2005)
Necessary documentary
proof submitted
(Yes / No)
Note:
1) Towards proof of the technical experience, the bidder shall enclose the relevant work order(s) / work
completion certificate(s) from client(s) for each of the work(s) undertaken in India after 1st April, 2005 under
each of the categories of works mentioned above.
2) Evaluation of the technical bid will be conducted as per the methodology explained in para 7 of TENDER
OPENING AND EVALUATION section of this tender document.
3) The technical bids of only those bidders who satisfy all the stipulated eligibility criteria will be considered
for evaluation.
4) The price bids of only those bidders, who get the qualifying score of 60 or more out of 100 marks in
technical bid evaluation, will be considered for opening.
73
5.
PRICE BID
i. SCHEDULE - A
Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing
electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of
Andhra Pradesh
Bill of Quantities (BoQ)
APPENDIX – 1 FIBER BOQ
S.No.
1
1a.
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Unit of
Unit Cost
Measure
Quantity
in INR
ment
A. Optical Fiber Cable & Installation
Supply of 24 Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as
Kms
20,500
per specification - wind speed 100 Km/hour
Supply of 24 Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as
Kms
2,000
per specification - wind speed 150 Km/hour
Universal Pole Accessories
Pole
3,75,000
Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing
Nos.
12,000
Installation of Aerial OFC as per standard
Kms
21,000
practices
B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Fiber
Nos.
12
Distribution Management System
Rack (42U Rack)
Nos.
12
Air Conditioning (2 Ton)
Nos.
24
UPS (5 KVA with 4hrs.backup)
Nos.
12
Diesel Generator (15KVA silent DG)
Nos.
12
Providing necessary civil, electrical and furnishing
works required for the installation of electronics in
Sqft.
12000
PoP
Towards 3 Phase Electricity Wiring Charges per
Connection
12
PoP
To provide Earthing measures at each PoP as per
standard practices
Connection
12
Item description including Specification
C. Supply, Installation & commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs
Fiber Distribution Management System
Nos.
49
Rack for Equipment Installations (42U Rack) :
Nos.
49
Indoor Box with Forced Cooling Arrangement
UPS (3KVA with 4hrs. backup)
Nos.
49
Earthing
Nos.
49
One time Electricity Wiring Charges
Nos.
49
D. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs
Fiber Distribution Management System
Nos.
605
605
Rack (42U Rack) : Indoor Box
Nos.
UPS (1KVA with 4hrs. backup) Online, SNMP
605
Nos.
Enabled
605
Earthing
Nos.
605
One Time Electricity Wiring Charges
Nos.
74
Amount
1
2
3
4
5
E. Sub Station Level PoP
Fiber Distribution Box
Nos.
Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U
Nos.
UPS (1KVA with 2hrs. backup) Online, SNMP
Nos.
Enabled
Earthing
Nos.
One Time Electricity Wiring Charges
Nos.
1784
1784
1784
1784
1784
APPENDIX – 2 Electronic Components BOQ
A. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP
1
2
2.1
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District
IP MPLS Nodes
Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM) Incl
NOC
District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client
incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks.
Number of degrees – 2 ( way) – 40 channel
Associated Planning Tool
Nos.
10
Nos.
11
Nos.
9
Nos.
1
Nos.
1
Nos.
10
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
2.2
District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client
incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks.
Number of degrees – 4 ( way)
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
2.3
NOC DWDM – with 120X10G protected client
incl SFP and 24 x 100G trunk.- 40 channel
Number of degree – 4 (way)
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
Zonal DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client &
2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
3
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
4
Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM Network
Nos.
20
5
CWDM Equipment
Nos.
11
6
GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
11
7
EQAM Converters With amplifier
Nos.
11
75
1
1.1
1.2
2.1
B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs
Zonal IP MPLS Nodes
Nos.
49
Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl
Nos.
47
SFP and 8 x 10G incl SFP
Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl
Nos.
2
SFP and 12 x 10G incl SFP
Zonal Hub DWDM – with 4x 10G protected
Client & 2x80G trunk port/s ,4 Channel
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
Nos.
47
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
2.2
Zonal Hub DWDM – with 6 x 10G protected
Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
Associated Planning Tool
Nos.
2
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
3
4
5
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.2
3
4
5
1
2
3
EQAM Converters With amplifier
Nos.
49
CWDM equipment
Nos.
49
GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
49
C. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs
Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 2x10 G
Nos.
488
Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 4x10G
Nos.
83
GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
571
GPON OLT 2x10G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
34
CWDM Equipment
Nos.
605
EQAM Converters With amplifier
Nos.
488
EDF amplifier
Nos.
83
D. Sub Station Level PoP
GPON OLT 2X1G(10 Km) sfp, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
1,784
OLT
EDF amplifier
Nos.
1,784
CWDM Equipment
Nos.
1,784
APPENDIX – 3 NOC BOQ
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
2.1
2.2
A. Network Operating Centre (Proposed to be located at Visakhapatnam)
EMS, OSS, BSS, NMS Interfaces, GIS Interfaces
and Fault Management and Video wall for NMS
EMS
Nos.
1
GPON EMS
Nos.
1
OSS/BSS
Nos.
1
Video wall for NMS
Nos.
1
Electronics (IPMPLS - backbone for state HQ PoP
with meetme room cross connects)
Core IP MPLS Router
Nos.
2
Core Switch
Nos.
2
76
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
4
5
Firewall
Nos.
4
Nos.
Set
2
1
Set
1
Set
1
ISP peering Routers, Upstream Routers, BRAS,
CGNAT (IPV4 & IPv6), CDN and Video streaming
system, Caching system, Lawdull intercept system,
Blade chassis, AAA servers, Storage.
BRAS Router
Server pool for OSS / BSS , Caching & Storage
Civil and Electrical Infra with 20 KVA UPS (1+1),
Silent DG of 45 KVA (1+1), Air conditioning and
Earthing, Fire and Safety Facilities. IP Phones, Video
conference equipment.
CATV Headend with Antenna Farm ( 250 channel- 20
HD, 230 SD / MPEG 4)
APPENDIX – 4 Miscellaneous
1
Lumpsum
Any Costs towards miscellaneous items, etc
Grand Total Amount
Note:
1. The cells with Black Colour should not be filled
2. A separate excel file by the name “Price Bid BoQ Schedule A.xls” is placed in the e-procurement
platform for quoting the unit rates.
S.No.
* Optional Items which are not
part of Price bid
Unit of
Measurement
Quantity
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
Nos
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit Cost
in INR
Optical SFP modules
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1gb -SR (300 mtrs)
1gb -LR (10 Kms)
1gb -ER (40 Kms)
1gb -ZR (80 Kms)
10gb -SR (300 mtrs)
10gb -LR (10 Kms)
10gb -ER (40 Kms)
10gb -ZR (80 Kms)
100gb -SR (300 mtrs)
100gb -LR (10 Kms)
100gb -ER (40 Kms)
100gb -ZR (80 Kms)
*These are optional items only and the estimated costs of these shall not be considered under the price bid quote by the
bidders. These are indicative only and the item rates quoted here will be utilized only in case these items are utilized as new /
extra items due to work contingencies as per need.
NOTE:
1) The rates to be quoted by the bidder as mentioned above shall be inclusive of warranty on material /
equipment to be supplied / installed / commissioned and also shall be inclusive of cost towards the
operation / maintenance of the network / assets for a period of 12 months reckoned from the Project Works
Completion Date (i.e. Go-Live Date, which is targeted at 9 months from the date of signing the agreement)
77
2) The rates to be quoted by the bidder as mentioned above shall be inclusive of all the taxes / duties such as
VAT, Excise Duty, Service Tax & Service charges etc. to be payable at the prevailing applicable rates by
the bidder. There will not be any liability on part of the Authority to pay any taxes / charges as part of the
project components or works as mentioned above.
3) The estimated quantities as mentioned above in the BoQ under Schedule – A are based on the network
route / fiber grid architecture designed for this project. However, there may be variations in the exact
quantities required at the time of work execution based on the local field conditions and work
contingencies. In such case, the variations in quantities and the rates thereof will be dealt with as per the
provisions contained in paras 29-31 under the section “3.D. COST CONTROL” of this tender document.
4) The rates quoted by the bidder as above in the BoQ under schedule-A will not be considered for evaluation
purpose either technical or financial. These rates will be utilized only for the purpose of arriving at
variation costs, as per need.
5) The total price bid, i.e., the sum of the amounts from all the items in the BoQ as per the rates quoted above
under schedule-A shall match with the total price bid quoted under schedule-B.
In case of any
discrepancy, the price quoted in schedule-B shall prevail. In such case, the rates quoted in schedule-A will
be adjusted proportionately.
78
PRICE BID
ii.
SCHEDULE - B
Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing
electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of
Andhra Pradesh
Estimated Contract Value (ECV): Rs.3,29,00,00,000/(Rupees Three Hundred and Twenty Nine Crores only)
I/We ………………… do hereby express the willingness to execute the aforesaid work as per the
conditions, standards, specifications, rules, regulations, etc., stipulated in this tender document at an overall
percentage of ………………% (in figures) …………………………….(in words) excess / less over the estimated
contract value (ECV) mentioned above.
Important Note: The price quoted by the bidder for individual items under BoQ in Schedule-A and also the
overall price bid as a percent of ECV in Schedule-B shall be inclusive of (i) All duties, taxes, and other levies
payable by the Contractor as per the prevailing State / Central Government rules, including VAT &Service Tax etc.
and (ii) towards warranty and the cost of operations and maintenance of the assets and the fiber network
infrastructure created under this project for a period of 1 year reckoned from the project works completion date (the
project works completion date is targeted to be 9 months from the date of concluding the agreement).
The tender will be awarded based on the methodology detailed in the section “2.E. TENDER OPENING AND
EVALUATION” of this tender document.
79
6.
Technical Documents to be submitted by the bidder in support of BoQ / Specifications
1) The bidder shall submit the following details related to each of the BoQ items in separate statements:
a) OEM
b) Make
c) Model
d) Detailed Part Numberwise Bill of quantity for each component
2) The bidder shall submit Manufacturer Authorization Form (MAF) for the following components in separate
statements:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Optical Fiber cable
UPS
DG Set
Networking components
Software including OSS, BSS, NMS, OS, etc.
Firewall
Servers
CATV Headend
3) The bidder shall also submit item-wise deviation, if any, from the stipulated technical specifications as
mentioned in this tender document.
In case no deviation statement is submitted, it shall be deemed that the bidder conforms to all the stipulated
technical specifications for all items.
80
7. Checklist of Key Documents to be submitted by Bidder
The following table provides an indicative list of documents to be submitted by the Bidder along with the Bid. This
list is not exhaustive and the bidder has to carefully go through the tender document and ensure all requisite
forms/documents are submitted.
S.No.
Documents to be Submitted
1.
Bid Security (EMD)
2.
Tender Fee
3.
Permanent Account Number of Bidder ( Income Tax)
4.
VAT Registration Number
5.
Service Tax Registration Number
6.
Certified copies of certificates / documents as per General Eligibility
Criteria
7.
Certified copies of certificates / documents as per Technical Eligibility
Criteria
8.
Certified copies of certificates / documents as per Financial Eligibility
Criteria
9.
Technical bid detailing the technical experience of the bidder in the
stipulated categories and the supporting documents
10.
Price bid under Schedule-A individual rates of BoQ
11.
Price bid under Schedule-B
12.
13.
14.
Details of Make, Model, Part number of the items under BoQ
proposed to be utilized by the bidder in this project in a separate
statement
Manufacturer Authorization Forms for Fiber Optical Cable, UPS, DG
Set, AC, Networking Components, Software, Firewalls, Servers and
CATV Headend etc.
Deviation Statement detailing the deviations, if any, from the stipulated
Technical Specifications proposed to be adopted by the bidder for this
project in a separate statement
81
Submitted
(Yes / No)
Technical Specifications and requisite Features / Characteristics of various
components under the project.
Note:
a) Bidder must comply with all the technical specifications given in this tender document. Any deviations
from the prescribed specifications shall be mentioned in the deviation statement format given in the “Forms
of Tender” under Annexure II.
b) All the equipment power supplies should be compatible with Indian standards and support 220 - 240V /
50Hz AC.
c) The quantities mentioned are not fixed and may change during implementation phase depending on the
cable laying routes. The Bidders shall consider this fact while submitting the bid.
d) Vendor is expected to provide adequate Installation accessories and patch cords to terminate the interfaces
in the FDF. Patch cords are required to be of 20Mtr length.
APPENDIX – 1 FIBER BOQ
Unit of Measurement
(UOM)
Quantity
Kms
20,500
Supply of 24Core Optical Fiber ADSS
Cable as per specification - wind speed 150
Km/hour
Kms
2,000
2
Universal Pole Accessories
Pole
3,75,000
3
Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing
Nos.
12,000
4
Installation of Aerial OFC as per standard
practices
Kms
21,000
S.No.
Item description including Specification
A. Optical Fiber Cable & Installation
1
1a.
Supply of 24Core Optical Fiber ADSS
Cable as per specification - wind speed 100
Km/hour
B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP
1
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of
Fiber Distribution Management System
Nos.
12
2
Rack (42U Rack)
Nos.
12
3
Air Conditioning (2 Ton)
Nos.
24
4
5
6
UPS (5 KVA with 4hrs. backup)
Diesel Generator (15KVA silent DG)
Nos.
Nos.
12
12
Providing necessary civil, electrical and
furnishing works required for the installation of
electronics in PoP
Sqft.
1000
per district
82
7
Towards 3Phase Electricity Wiring/Cabling
Charges per PoP
8
To provide Earthing at each PoP
as per standard practices
Connection
12
Nos.
12
C. Supply, Installation & commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs
1
Fiber Distribution Management System
Nos.
49
2
Rack for Equipment Installations (42U Rack)
: Indoor Box with Forced Cooling
Arrangement
Nos.
49
3
UPS (3KVA with 4hrs. backup)
Nos.
49
4
5
Earthing
Nos.
49
One time Electricity Wiring/ Cabling Charges
Nos.
49
D. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs
1
2
3
Fiber Distribution Management System
Rack (42U Rack) : Indoor Box
Nos.
Nos.
605
605
UPS (1KVA with 4hrs. backup) Online,
SNMP Enabled
Nos.
605
4
5
Earthing
Nos.
605
One Time Electricity Wiring/Cabling Charges
Nos.
605
Nos.
Nos.
1784
1784
1784
E. Sub Station Level PoP
1
Fiber Distribution Box
2
Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U
3
UPS (1KVA with 2hrs. backup) Online,
SNMP Enabled
4
5
Nos.
Earthing
Nos.
One Time Electricity Wiring/Cabling Charges
Nos.
83
1784
1784
Appendix – 1 FIBER BOQ
A Optical Fiber Cable & Installation
A.1/ 1.a Fiber Specifications for 24 core ADSS cable
S. No.
Description
1
Fiber used should be complying as per ITU-T G.652 D.
2
Fiber Geometrical Parameters
2 (a)
MFD at 1310 nm –
9.2 +/- 0.4 µm
2 (b)
MFD at 1550 nm –
10.4 +/- 0.5 µm
Core Diameter (Typical) -
8.6 µm
Cladding Diameter -
125 +/- 1.0 µm
Cladding Non-Circularity -
1%
2I
2 (d)
2I
2 (f)
Core Clad concentricity error – 0.6 µm
2 (g)
Diameter over primary coated with double UV cured acrylate – 245 μm ± 10 μm
2 (h)
Coating / Cladding Concentricity < 12
3
Fiber Optical/Transmission Properties
3 (a)
Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1310 nm < 0.34 dB/Km
3 (b)
Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1490 nm < 0.24 dB/Km
3I
Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1550 nm < 0.21 dB/Km
3 (d)
Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1625 nm < 0.24 dB/Km
Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) between 1380-1390 nm < Attenuation at 1310 nm
3I
(After Hydrogen Ageing)
3 (f)
Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1310 nm < 0.36 dB/Km
3 (g)
Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1490 nm < 0.26 dB/Km
3 (f)
Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1550 nm < 0.23 dB/Km
3 (g)
Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1625 nm < 0.26 dB/Km
3 (h)
Chromatic Dispersion (1285-1330)nm ≤
3.5
3 (i)
Chromatic Dispersion (1270-1340)nm ≤
5.3
3 (j)
Chromatic Dispersion at 1550nm
≤
17.5
3(k)
Chromatic Dispersion at 1625nm
≤
22
3 (l)
PMD (1310 nm & 1550 nm)
<
0.3 ps/√Km
3 (m)
LDV (1310 nm & 1550 nm)
<
0.2 ps/√Km
3 (n)
Zero Dispersion Slope
<
0.092 ps/(nm.sq.km)
3 (o)
Zero dispersion wave length range
-
1300 – 1324 nm
3 (p)
Cable cut off
- 1260 nm Maximum
84
S. No.
4
Description
Fiber Reliability Parameters
Proof test strain level -
4 (a)
1%
Test method – IEC-60793-1-30
Dynamic Tensile strength (Un-aged) - > 3.8 Gpa
4 (b)
Test method – IEC-60793-1-31
Dynamic Tensile strength – (Aged)
4I
- > 3.0 Gpa
Test method – IEC-60793-1-31
Stripability Force to remove primary coating – 1.3 < F < 8.9 N
4 (d)
Test method – IEC-60793-1-32
Dynamic Fatigue
4I
>
20
Test method – IEC-60793-1-33
Fiber Curl
4 (g)
20
Test method – IEC-60793-1-33
Static Fatigue
4 (f)
>
>
4.0 mtrs
Test method – IEC-60793-1-34
Macro bend
4 (h)
Test method – IEC-60793-1-47 / FOTP – 62
Change in Attenuation when fiber is coiled with 100 turns on 30 + 0.1 mm radius mandrel.
4 (h)(i)
< 0.05 dB/km at 1550 nm
< 0.5 dB/km at 1625 nm
Change in Attenuation when fiber is coiled with 1 turn on 32 + 0.5 mm diameter mandrel.
4 (h)(ii)
< 0.5 dB/km at 1550 nm
< 1.0 dB/km at 1625 nm
5
OFC CONSTRUCTION
Cross sectional view:
5 (a)
85
S. No.
Description
5 (b)
Buffer tube: Four numbers of primary coated colored fibers shall be protected by loose packaging within
a tube which shall be filled with thixotropic jelly.
Color sequence of fibers inside tubes should be Blue, Orange, Green& Brown.
5I
Central Strength Member: Solid FRP non – metallic strength member in the center of the cable core
shall be provided.
5 (d)
Cable Core: Primary coated fibers in loose tubes, stranded together around a central strength member
(using reverse lay techniques), shall form the cable core. Color sequence of loose tubes around FRP
should be Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate& White.
5I
The main cable core containing fibers shall be wrapped by a layer of water swell-able tape. Aramid yarn
reinforcement shall be done over water swell-able tape to provide sufficient tensile strength.
5 (f)
A circular and uniform tough weather resistant polyethylene compound HDPE/MDPE material
sheath/Jacket, black in color, (UV Stabilized) shall be provided over and above the reinforcement of
Aramid Yarn. Thickness of outer sheath should be minimum 1.5 mm.
5 (g)
Two ripcords shall be placed diagonally opposite to each other below the outer jacket to strip the HDPE
outer jacket.
6
OFC MECHANICAL PARAMETERS
Tensile Strength - 3000 N at maximum allowable 0.25 % Fiber strain
6 (a)
Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E1
Crush resistance - 2500 N/100 MM X 100 MM
6 (b)
Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E3
Impact Resistance – 50 N from 0.5 M
6I
Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E4
Torsion - +/- 180
6 (d)
Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E7
Cable Bending Test – 20 D, 4 Turns, 10 cycles
6I
Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2 E11
Abrasion resistance - Needle – 150 gm, Dia – 1 mm, Weight – 500 gm
6 (f)
No of cycles – 100, Duration 1 minute
Test Method – IEC-60794-1-2-E2
Repeated Bending - 20D, 35 Cycles
6 (g)
IEC 60794-1-2 E6
Drip Test – 30 cm, 70°C, 24hr
6 (h)
IEC 60794-1-2-E14
Water Penetration test - 1m head, 3m samples, 24 hrs
6 (i)
IEC 60794-1-2 F5
7
OFC Environmental Parameters
86
S. No.
Description
7 (a)
Installation -
7 (b)
Operation -
-10°C to + 60°C
- 20°C to + 70°C
7I
Storage & Transport - -20° to + 70°C
8
Optical Fiber Cable Loading Conditions
8 (a)
Maximum Span length - 65 Meters
8 (b)
Installation Sag -
8I
1.0 %
Operational Sag - 1.5 %
8 (d)
Wind Speed
- 100 Km/hour or 150 km/hour
8I
Ice loading
- Nil
9
Optical Fiber Physical Parameters
9 (a)
Cable Diameter - 10.4 +/- 0.5 mm
9 (b)
Cable Weight - 77 +/- 10% kg/km
Printing details : NAME OF MANUFACTURER SM G652 D 24 F ADSS Laser symbol Year of
manufacturer length code Meter Marking
9I
(White Hot Foil Embossing)
Optical Fiber
9 (d)
2
F / Buffer tube
Color - Blue, Orange, Green, Brown
Loose tube
9I
Number – 6
Color Sequence – Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate, White
9 (f)
10
Outer Sheath color - Black
Optical Fiber Cable packing details
10 (a)
Cable length in a drum – 2/4 +/- 5 % km
10 (b)
Short length - MAX 5 %
10 I
Order Tolerance - +/- 5 %
87
A.2 Universal Pole Accessories
Tension Pole Assembly – Should Contain following









Twisted Link
Stay Clamp
Tension Hook
Turn Buckle
Extension Link
Thimble
Terminating Helix
Jumper Cable Clamp
Protective Helix
Tension Hook:
Dimensions in MM:
L1
177
L2
75
L3
50
D
12
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
To be used here C-Bracket is available on pole for fitment of Tension Hook.
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
2
Description
Body
Nut
Material
Alloy Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
88
Ref Spec
IS:2004
IS:1363
Qty
3
4
5
Plain Washer
Spring Washer
Spilt Pin
Mild Steel Galvanised
Spring Steel Galvanised
Stainless Steel
TENSION HOOK
NOT TO SCALE
IS:2016
IS:3063
IS:549
Unit-MM
TURN BUCKEL:
Dimensions in MM:
L1
L2
170
100
L3
140
D1
18
D2
18
D3
12
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
MIN Length : 290 MM
MAX Length : 400 MM
Range of ADL : 110 MM
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
2
3
Description
Body
Nut Bolt
Nut
Material
Mild Steel Forged Glav
Mild Steel Forged Glav
Mild Steel
Extension Link:
Dimensions in MM:
89
Ref Spec
IS:2004
IS:2062
IS:1363
Qty
L1
465
T1
5
W1
14
W2
16
W3
30
D1
16
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
2
3
4
Description
Strap
Rivet & Washer
Split Pin
Bolt & Nut M16
Material
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Stainless Steel
Mild Steel Galvanised
Ref Spec
IS:2067
IS:2016
IS:549
IS:1363
Qty
Clevis Thimble:
Dimensions in MM:
L1
L2
L3
102
42
15
T1
4
T2
9
R1
23
R2
15
R3
8
W1
92
W2
40
W3
18
D1
16
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
FEROUS PARTS ARE HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
2
3
4
Description
Clamp
Rivet M16 x 45
Washer
Split Pin
Material
Aluminium Alloy GDC
Galv Steel
Galv Steel
Stainless Steel
CLEVIS THIMBLE
NOT TO SCALE
Unit-MM
Protective Helix (T):
For Example
Dimensions (For Cable Size, D – 14.4 MM)
i.
DIA OF EACH WIRE – 3.2 ± 0.1
90
Ref Spec
IS:617
IS:2016
IS:2016
IS:549
Qty
ii.
NO OF SETS – 3
iii.
NO OF WIRE PER SET – 5
iv.
LENGTH OF HELIX – 1000
Dimension details for other cable size shall be indicated by the Manufacturer including the pitch of HELIX.
Note: Ends of RODS shall be deburred Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
1
Description
Protective Helx
Material
Aluminium Alloy 6061
Ref Spec
Qty
Ref Spec
Qty
Terminating Helix:
Dimensions for Example
L1
1000
T1
2.2±0.1
D is DIA of each Wire ROD
No. of Wires used – 5
Note: Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
Dimension details for differe Cable size to be decided AP type Test Approval
For Example Cable Size
Ends of RODA shall be Debur Length of Terminating Helx 1000MM
Terminating Helix to be used with Thimble C DIA – 14.4 MM
Description
1
DEADEHD GRIP
Jumper Cable Clamp:
Material
Aluminised Steel
Dimensions in MM:
L1
L2
105
65
Dimensions in MM of Insert PAD:
L
40
D1
17.5
D2
5-6
INNER DIA
15
W
35
OUTER DIA
30
91
Note: Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
Insert in TOW HALVES D to suit Cable DIA Ferrous Parts are HOT DIP GALVASIED as per IS:2629
1
2
3
Description
STRAP
Insert
Wing Bolt
Material
Mild Steel GALY
Polychloradprene Compounded
Mild Steel GALY
Ref Spec
IS:2062
Qty
IS:2062
Pole Mounted Stat Clamp (Tubular):
Dimensions in MM:
Pole Mouted Stay Clamp Tubular
L1
210
L2
20
D1
150
D2
16
T1
5
W
30
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Clamp
Bolt & Nut M16
Rivet 16
Washer
Split Pin
Material
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Stainless Steel
Pole Mounted Stay Clamp (Rail):
92
Ref Spec
IS:2062
IS:1363
IS:2016
IS:2016
IS:549
Qty
Pole Mounted Stay Clamp (Rail)
L1
L2
L3
L4
270
170
251
151
L5
20
L6
32
L7
50
L8
120
T1
5
T2
20
D1
16
W1
60
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
Description
Clamp
Bolt & Nut M16
Rivet 16
Washer
Split Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Material
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Stainless Steel
Suspension Pole Assembly: Should Contain Following





Twisted Link
Stay Clamp
Protective Helix
Suspension Set
Vibration Damper
Suspension Pole Assembly
NOT TO SCALE
Unit – MM
Twisted Eye Link:
93
Ref Spec
IS:2062
IS:1363
IS:2016
IS:2016
IS:549
Qty
Dimensions in MM:
L1
L2
W1
138
100
27
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
1
Description
Link
W2
38
Material
Mild Steel
DIA
18
Ref Spec
IS:2062
Qty
Protective Helix (S):
For Example
Dimensions (For Cable Size, D – 14.4 MM)
i.
DIA OF EACH WIRE – 3.2 ± 0.1
ii.
NO OF SETS – 3
iii.
NO OF WIRE PER SET – 5
iv.
LENGTH OF HELIX – 1400
Dimension details for other cable size shall be indicated by the Manufacturer including the pitch of HELIX.
Note: Ends of RODS shall be deburred Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
1
Description
Protective Helx
Material
Aluminium Alloy 6061
Armour Grip Suspension Set:
94
Ref Spec
Qty
For Example
Dimensions:- Cable Size – 14.4 MM DIA
Cable DIA
L1
L2
L3
L4
Colour Code
14.4
115
200
800
1400
Brown
DIA AGS
ROD
4.25±0.1
Note: Dimensions for different Cable Sizes to be decided after TEST Approval insert Dimensions in MM
Inner DIA
AT – A- A – 22
AT – B-B -22
Outer DIA
33
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Clamp
Inserts) Suspen Clipper
Strap
AGS Helix
Protective Helix
Rivet M16
Flat Washer
Split Pin
Twisted Eye
Material
Aluminium Alloy GDC
Polychloroprene Compounded
Aluminium Alloy
Aluminium Alloy6061
Aluminium Alloy6061
Mild Steel Galvanised
Mild Steel Galvanised
Stainless Steel
Mild Steel Galvanised
Ref Spec
IS:617
IS:617
IS:2062
IS:2016
IS:2549
IS:2062
Spiral Vibration Damper:
Dimensions in MM:
L1
1346
GL
446
DL
900
95
D1
12±1
Qty
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
Description
Material
1
Spiral Visration Damper
Polyvinyl Cokpounded
Ref Spec
Qty
Demountable Pulley :
Dimensions in MM:
L1
280
W1
50
W2
92
Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102
(Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified)
FEROUS PARTS ARE HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629
Description
Material
1
HOOK
Galvanised Steel
2
BODY
Galvanised Steel
3
SPOOL
Aluminium Coated Neoprene
DEMOUNTABLE PULLY
NOT TO SCALE
D
12
Ref Spec
Unit-MM
A.3 Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing






Features
Standard fiber count 24 to 48 F
Universal type i.e. suitable for all type of cable (ADSS OFC, Armoured
and metal free cable)
Provide scope for straight / branch joints
Resistant to chemicals and corrosive atmosphere.
Easy re-entry and closing with mechanical plastic clamp.
Shall be water and air proof.
96
Qty





Ribs on the body for extra strength
6 Cable entry port & 1 oval port
Suitable for cable size upto-30mm
Mounting Bracket for erecting on pole vertically straight.
Dome type


Dimensions
Length-395mm ±5%
Outer diameter-273mm ±5%
A.4 Installation of Aerial OFC
Refer Annexure IV : Implementation and safety Guidelines
B Supply, Installation & commissioning of Fiber Distribution Management System
B.1
Fiber Distribution System
S. No.
Description
1
Introduction:
1U Rack mount module shall provide management of optical fibers of a cable, with flexibility and reliability. It
shall provide management of fibers in a consistent and structured manner. It should also facilitate reconfiguration
and testing of fibers, cables and network.
Communication equipment is to be placed at an indoor location. The location would have multiple cables
converging and hence requires a system to handle the large number of fibers. These cables shall be routed through
race ways either from the bottom (under floor) or overhead.
Functional Requirements:
The 1U Rack mount module shall be able to accommodate all types of optical fiber cable structures including
ribbonised optical fiber cable having 12 fibers perribbon, adopting different construction practices. i.e. the Unitube,
Multi loose tube design, Intrusion Proof Cable Design, besides Aerial & other Underground optical Fibers cables
2
2.1
2.2
The 1U Rack mount module provide positive Fiber management i.e. facilities to carry out the expansion,
reconfiguration & maintenance etc. without disturbing or affecting the existing fibers already in use or inflicting
any damage to pig tails, patch cords, optical fibers (individual & ribbon), optical fiber cables, fiber splices
(individual & ribbon) during normal cable and element handling. It shall provide well engineered bend radius
control throughout the system
2.3
The 1U Rack mount module provides slack storage space for input cable
2.4
The 1U Rack mount module shall have provision for slack management for storing the extra length of optical
Fibers and ribbonised optical fibers & pigtails,
which shall not experience bend below the critical bend radius.
The module shall be easily opened and closed without any degradation
in the performance of Fibers. The shelves should have slides upon which the Splice Tray Assembly & Patch Panel
Identification mechanism of incoming and outgoing cables/pigtails/patch cords/ ribbon fibers and adaptors shall be
provided.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
3
3.1
The system shall be suitable for Optical Fiber Cables having single mode fibers (individual Fiber & Ribbon Fiber)
as per ITU-T Rec. G.652D etc for transmission at wavelengths of 1310nm and 1550nm; and for up-up gradation at
1625 nm wavelength without modification.
The components of module include splicing cum patching shelves, shall be provided as per the requirement at all
fiber terminations
Technical Requirements:
a) Number of ports minimum 24
97
S. No.
3.2
Description
b) Stackable splice tray.
c) Cable entry from rear or sides. Radius controlled cable routing.
d) Front Access to cable connectors.
Dimensions
Width: 485 mm ± 2 %.
Depth: 300 mm ± 2 %.
Height: 44 mm ± 2%
3.3.
It shall be possible to fix the fiber splicing cum patching shelf on the 19” rack, with mounting screws and nuts..
3.4
Splice Trays shall be easily flipped at an angle of 90 degrees based on the hinge clip.
3.4.1
The single fiber Splice Tray shall be able to accommodate 12 Fibers. This Splice Tray shall assemble with other
hinging Splice Trays.
3.4.2
The fastening arrangements for entry of the fibers into the splice Tray shall be suited to secondary coated fibers and
primary coated fibers in tubes, without there being any risk of bending loss or damage to the fibers or the
secondary tubes.
3.4.3
It shall be possible to take any individual fiber out of the splice tray for repair during normal operation, without
damaging the remaining fibers.
3.4.4
The splicing Tray shall be non-metallic and made of ABS Blend material
3.4.5
Single mode Fibers conforming to G652D and etc for transmission at 1310 nm and 1550nm wavelengths and for
up-gradation at 1625 nm wavelength without any modification
3.5
Insertion Loss: 0.3dB
Return Loss: >50dB for PC &>60dB for APC
3.5.1
1.5 meter length of individual connectorized 0.9mm fiber for mounting on the Patch Panel
3.6.7
Quantity of splice trays (Fiber organizer) Type of cable splice trays Fiber splice/tray12fiber 2
4
4.1
TESTS:
Visual Test:
The box shall be examined physically for the workmanship, design and technology employed. It shall be checked
for any flaws, defects, and cracks visible to naked eye.
4.2
Variation in attenuation (Residual loss)
Test Parameters:
Wavelength of operation: 1310nm & 1550nm
Change in attenuation: ±0.1dB
Requirement:
The fiber attenuation shall be measured, leaving the fiber un-looped, after the arrangement on the tray and
stabilization time of one hour.
98
S. No.
Description
4.3
Axial Tension (Sheath retention):
Test Parameters:
Tension applied longitudinally: 25N (2.54 Kg)
Test time: 10 minutes
Requirement:
Variation in attenuation (Residual Loss, Fiber Organisation) shall be checked after the completion of test and the
variation in attenuation shall be +0.1dB. There shall be no visible flaws or defects after the test.
4.4
Environmental cycle:
Test Parameters:
Lowest temperature: -15°C
Highest temperature: -60°C
Dwell Time:
4 hrs
Transition time: 2hrs
Cycle duration: 10 and 1/2 hrs.
Number of cycles: 10
Requirements: The Variation in attenuation (Residual Loss, Fiber Organization) shall be checked after the
completion of the test and it shall be limited to ±0.1 dB. There shall be no visible flaws or defects after the test
B.2 Rack (42U Rack)
S. No.
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Height
42 U
Type
Floor mount with caster wheels
Wire managers
Two vertical and four horizontal
Power distribution
(50 points – 5Amp sockets) power distribution
Door
Glass door in front with lock
Fan trays
With 4 fans
Depth
1000 mm
Metal
Aluminum extruded profile
Side panels
Detachable side panels
Width
19” equipment mounting, extra width is recommended for managing voluminous cables
21
22
23
Castors
Suitable castors with brakes
Should have provision to integrate the UPS. It should have integrated light for remote
inspection, IP camera, motion sensor, temperature sensor, voltage sensor, smoke sensor and
battery life / status option (This feature is applicable for Zonal and Mandal PoPs)
99
B.3 Air Conditioning (2 Ton Split)
EER ( w/w)
2.7
Min Star Rating
3 Star & Above
Power V/Hx/Ph
220 – 240V / 50Hz 1Ph
Ton
2
Capacity (BTU/hr)
24000
Refrigerant
R22
Air Flow Volume (m3/h)
1100
Power Consumption
2340 W
Operation Current
10.8 A
Capacity
24000 BTU
Noise Level (Indoor) should be better than
High
48 dB (A)
Mid
45 dB (A)
Low
42 dB (A)
Outdoor
59 dB (A)
Compressor
High quality famous brand rotary type compressor
Elegant panel design, with LED/LCD central Display
Galvanized outdoor unit or plastic outdoor unit for anti-corrosion
B.4 UPS (5KVA with 4hrs backup) – SNMP enabled
S.No.
Description
1
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
2
UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter
3
Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life
4
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
5
Type: Online
6
Capacity: 5 KVA, 3-Phase
7
Backup time: 4 hrs.
8
Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5%
9
Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V
10
Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V
11
Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz.
12
Input Power Factor: > 0.9
13
Output Power Factor: 0.8 lag to unity PF
14
Output Harmonic Distribution < 8%
15
Waveform: Pure Sine Wave
16
Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load
17
Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP
18
Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket
100
19
Battery Type: SMF-VRLA
20
Battery AH: 100 AH
21
No. of Batteries: 16 Nos.
22
DC voltage (input): 192V DC
23
VAH: 19200 VAH
24
Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero
25
26
Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes
Inverter Efficiency: 90%
27
Overall Efficiency: 85%
28
Crest Factor: 3:1
29
Regulation: +/- 1%
30
Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz
31
Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s &Highspeed pulse
blanking. O/P Over Load, O/P Over Voltage, O/P Under Voltage O/P Short Circuit, Battery Charging
Current & Inverter Over Temperature
B.5 Diesel Generator (15 KVA Silent DG)
S.No.
Description
1.
Engine type: Multi cylinder, in accordance with IS 10002-1981 with latest amendments
2.
Method of starting: Electric start 12 V DC
3.
Type of fuel: High speed diesel
4.
Rating Continuous: 20 BHP
5.
Output: Minimum 18 BHP under NTP conditions
6.
Rated Speed: 1500 RPM
7.
Output: 15 KVA
8.
P.F: 0.8 lag
9.
Voltage: 220 V, 1 Phase, AC
10.
Type: Continuous running duty type
11.
Frequency: 50 Hz
12.
Phase: 3-Phase
B.6 Civil, electrical and furnishing works

Establishing a 1000-1500 Sft POP Room with the Air conditioning
101

False Ceiling, false flooring and creation of office space. Approximate area to be upgraded is 1000 sft
which may vary from location to location with the minimum following qty.
S.No.
Description
Quantities
Civil works
1
False Ceiling (In Sq.Mtrs)
10
Suspended false ceiling using GI section as perimeter
channels and intermediate supports with 12mm Gypsum
board screwed to the bottom and finished to appear seamless,
with 2 coats of plastic emulsion paint applied over the base
primer.
2
Flooring (In Sq.Mts)
10
Flooring using first quality antistatic vinyl flooring in the
NOC ROOM
3
3.1
Partitions for server Room 10 sq.mt size
Full partitions (Upto ceiling height)
Full Height : Semi glazed Partitions using medium gauge
62.5 X 37.1X1.5mm) power coated Aluminium
Sections upto ceiling height (102pprox..300 cms), and 5mm
plain/ground glass panels for the panels, and 12mm both sides
pre-laminated particle board panels for bottom half and the
portions above the door height.
4
Doors (Per unit)
Semi glazed aluminium doors of 210 cms height, using
50X44.5X1.8mm, Powder coated aluminium
2
Sections with 5.mm plain/ground glass panels for the top
portion, and 12mm both sides pre-laminated particle board
panels for bottom half. Door to be fitted with good quality
concealed door closer of Everite/Dyna make and lock
5
Tables 4Ft x @2 Ft size
4
6
Chairs
4
7
Visitor chairs
8
8
Half Cabins
4
Half Partitions upto 135cms height (in Sq.Mtrs)
2
Provisioning of Networking and electrical points
8
Biometric access control system to the server room with
motion sensors and an IP Camera
1
8.1
9
10
B.7 Electricity Wiring
Bidder shall draw the required Electricity power source from relevant Power Company by applying for the new
connection, And Installing an appropriate rated power meter at the premises.
The electrical wiring necessary for the PoPs / NOC to be provided by the Bidder as per the standard
specifications of the electrical wiring stipulated with drawings to be approved by the Authority.
At District level and at the NOC, the connection shall be 3-Phase whereas for Mandal & Zonal level single phase
wiring shall be done.
B.8 Earthing
Excavation of earth pit ,putting CI pipe with flange on one end ( as per ISS 718/74) of dia 800 mm and 2.54
meters long inside the pit and back filling the pit with BH coke, salt and CI pipe.( In NON rocky Area)
102
S.No
1
Description
CI PIPE 80 mm dia,3 mm thickness, 2.5 mtrs
Length)
Qty
Unit
1
each
2
BH coke
40
Kg
3
Salt
20
Kg
4
Hume pipe of 600 mm dia
1
each
5
6
Earth pit size 0.9X0.9X2.75 Meters
Earthing of CI earth pipes with 50X6 mm GI flat /
10 swg bare copper wire.
1
1
each
each
Construction of Earth Pit in rocky soil / Chemical Earth Pit
Hard rocky soil, 300mm bore up to 10 ft. deep shall be made using earth auger or any other method.
Sleeve the soil and remove the gravels and stones. If soil quality is good (without murum & rocks)
then add some quantity of earth enhancement material in the soil for using as backfill.
If the soil seems unusable (Containing large quantity of gravel, stones, murum, sand etc.)the replace
the soil with black cotton soil.
Insert the electrode at the centre of the earth pit and arrange to keep it vertical in the pit.
Arrange for adequate quantity of water supply for the pit.(Approx. 600 litres).
Fill the pit with the backfill material and keep on adding the earth enhancement material surrounding
the electrode and simultaneously watering the pit.
Chemical Earthing using Electrode of size 50 mm dia, 3 meter long connected with 32X4 mm GI
internal strip complete with excavation, civil works, cast iron cover with back fill compound.
The voltage between Neutral & Earth not to exceed 2 volts.
GI Strip of size 25mm X 5mm including installation
Back Fill Compound 40 kg
C Zonal Hub Level PoPs
C.1
Fiber Distribution Management System
S. No.
Description
1
2
3
Features
Standard fiber count 24F
Universal type i.e. suitable for all type of cable
(ADSSOFC, Armoured and metal free cable)
4
5
6
7
8
9
Splices shall be securely housed.
Power coated metal body
Totally corrosion proof
Dimensions
Length-600mm
Width-375mm
103
10
11
12
Height-175mm
Cable entry port-6
Suitable for cable size upto-38mm
C.2 Rack for equipment installations (42U Rack): Indoor box with forced cooling
arrangement
Refer to B.2 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
C.3 UPS (3KVA with 4 hrs backup) – SNMP enabled
S.No.
Description
1.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
2.
UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter
3.
Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life
4.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Type: Online
Capacity: 3 KVA
Backup time: 4 hrs.
Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5%
Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V
Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V
Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz.
Input Power Factor: > 0.9
Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF
Output Harmonic Distribution < 8%
Waveform: Pure Sine Wave
Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load
17.
18.
Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP
Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Battery Type: SMF-VRLA
Battery AH: 120 AH
No.of Batteries: 8 Nos.
DC voltage (input): 96V DC
VAH: 11520 VAH
Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero
Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Inverter Efficiency: 90%
Overall Efficiency: 85%
Crest Factor: 3:1
Regulation: +/- 1%
Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz
Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses &
High speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit
104
32.
LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage
33.
34.
Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load
THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load
35.
Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007
C.4 Earthing
Refer to B.8 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
C.5 Electricity Wiring
Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
D Mandal Level PoPs
D.1 Fiber Distribution Management System
Refer to C.1 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
D.2 Rack (42U Rack): Indoor Box
Refer to B.2 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
D.3 UPS (1 KVA with 4hrs backup) – SNMP enabled
S.No
Description
1.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
2.
UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter
3.
Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life
4.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
5.
Capacity: 1 KVA
6.
Backup time: 4 hrs.
7.
Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5%
8.
Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V
9.
Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V
10.
Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz
11.
Input Power Factor: > 0.9
105
12.
Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF
13.
Output Crest Factor 3:1
14.
Output Harmonic Distribution < 8%
15.
Waveform: Pure Sine Wave
16.
Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load
17.
Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP
18.
Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket
19.
Battery Type: SMF
20.
Battery AH: 120AH
21.
No. of Batteries: 3 Nos
22.
DC voltage (input): 36V DC
23.
VAH: 4320VAH
24.
Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero
25.
Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes
26.
Inverter Efficiency: 90%
27.
Overall Efficiency: 85%
28.
Crest Factor: 3:01
29.
Regulation: +/- 1%
30.
Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz
31.
32.
Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses &
High speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit
LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage
33.
Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load
34.
THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load
35.
Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007
D.4 Earthing
Refer to B.8 specifications of Fiber BoQ
D.5 Electricity Wiring
Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
E Substation Level PoP
E.1
Fiber Distribution Management System
Refer to C.1 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
106
E.2 Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U
S.No.
Description
1
Height
12 U
2
Type
Wall / floor mount
3
Wire managers
One horizontal
4
Power
(6 points – 5Amp sockets) power distribution
5
Door
Glass door in front with lock
6
Fan trays
With 1/2 fans
7
Depth
800 /1000 mm
8
Metal
Aluminum / Steel
9
Side panels
Detachable /non detachable side panels
10
Width
19” equipment mounting, extra width is recommended for managing voluminous cables
11
Should have provision to integrate the UPS. It should have integrated light for remote inspection,
motion sensor, temperature sensor, voltage sensor, smoke sensor and battery life / status option
(This feature is applicable for Zonal and Mandal PoPs)
E.3 UPS (1 KVA with 2 hrs backup) – SNMP enabled
S.No
Description
1.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
2.
UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter
3.
Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life
4.
True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology
5.
Capacity: 1 KVA
6.
Backup time: 2 hrs.
7.
Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5%
8.
Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V
9.
Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V
10.
Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz
11.
Input Power Factor: > 0.9
12.
Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF
13.
Output Crest Factor 3:1
14.
Output Harmonic Distribution < 8%
15.
Waveform: Pure Sine Wave
16.
17.
Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load
Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP
18.
Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket
19.
Battery Type: SMF
20.
Battery AH: As Required
21.
No. of Batteries: As Required
22.
DC voltage (input): As Required
107
23.
VAH: 1200VAH
24.
Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero
25.
Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes
26.
Inverter Efficiency: 90%
27.
Overall Efficiency: 85%
28.
Crest Factor: 3:01
29.
Regulation: +/- 1%
30.
Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz
31.
Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses & High
speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit
32.
LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage
33.
Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load
34.
THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load
35.
Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007
E.4 Earthing
Refer to B.8 specifications of Fiber BoQ
E.5 Electricity Wiring
Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ
108
Electronic Equipment specifications Overview
S
N
O
Product
1
Mandal
IP-MPLS
Node
2
Mandal
IP-MPLS
Node
3
Mandal
IP-MPLS
Node
Point of Presence
4
Zonal IP
MPLS
Node
5
Zonal IP
MPLS
Node (
Vizianagar
am,
Srikakula
m)
6
District IP
MPLS
Node- 24
port
capable
7
District IP
MPLS
Node- 24
port
capableVijayawad
a
8
SUB
Station
Nodes
Qty
488
34
83
47
Backpane
throughput
62 GBPS
Router
Interfaces
12 x 1G (4 x
1G(10 Km)
SFP and 4
Copper 1G)
and 2 x 10G
( 40 Km)
SFP
EDF
amplifier
for
CATV
Controller/Swi
tch fabric
redundancy
NA
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
4 /8 Port
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
Power
Supply
redundancy
Operating
temperatu
re range
65 C
62 GBPS
NA
NA
NA
62 GBPS
12 x 1G (4 x
1G(10 Km)
SFP and 4
Copper 1G)
and 4 x 10G
( 40 Km)
SFP
NA
NA
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
8 x 1G
LX(10 Km)
SFP and 4 x
10G ( 500
m), 4X10G (
40 Km) SFP
10x10G (
500 m)
SFP
protected
client SFP
and 2 x
100G
trunk. – 4
degree,40
channel
4x 10G (
500 M)
SFP
protected
Client , 2X
100G trunk
port
Number of
degrees -2
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
NA
6x 10G (
500 M)
SFP
protected
Client
,100G
trunk port
Number of
degrees -2
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
Yes
Yes
Yes
4x 10G (
500 M)
SFP
protected
Client , 2X
100G trunk
port
Number of
degrees -2
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
4x 10G (
500 M)
SFP
protected
Client , 2X
100G trunk
port
Number of
degrees -2
4X1G
Copper,
8 GPON
24 QAM
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
2X1G
(10 Km)
SFP , 8
GPON
NA
4 /8 Port
NA
Yes
Yes
120 GBPS
120 GBPS
3.2 TBPS
20 x 10G (
500 m), 4x
10G ( 40
km) SFP,
10X1G (10
Km ) SFP,
10X1 G
copper port
1
3.2 TBPS
20 x 10G (
500 m), 4x
10G ( 40
km) SFP,
10X1G (10
Km ) SFP,
10X1 G
copper port
208
4
40GBps
NA
9
EQAM
with
amplifier
4 channel
DWDM
Parameters
2X10G
(10km)
SFP, 8
GPON
8 x 1G
LX(10 Km)
SFP and 4 x
10G ( 500
m), 8X10G (
40 Km) SFP
2
GPON
40 channel
DWDM
Parameters
10x10G (
500 m)
SFP
protected
client SFP
and 2 x
100G
trunk. – 4
degree,40
channel
10x10G (
500 m)
SFP
protected
client SFP
and 2 x
100G
trunk. – 4
degree,40
channel
NA
109
110X10G
protected
client
110X10G
(500m )
SFP and
22 x
100G
trunk.
110X10G
protected
client
110X10G
(500m )
SFP and
22 x
100G
trunk.
4X1G
Copper
,8
GPON
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
NOC
9
NOC
Core
Routers
2
3.2 TBPS
110x 10G (
500m)
SFP,14X10
G(
40Km)SFP
10
Noc Core
switch
4
3TBPS
144 x 10G
( 500 m)
incl SFP
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
11
BRAS
2
3.2 TBPS
24 x 10G
(500 m)
incl SFP
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
4
40 GBPS
THROU
GH PUT
4x10G
(500m )
SFP, 12X 1
G copper
ports
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
NA
12
Firewall
Note: All operating Voltage 210- 240V C
State Ring Architecture
District Nodes
High end Zonal
Node Srikakulam
District Nodes
Zonal Nodes
NOC
4 Way District
Node At
Vijaywada
110
High end Zonal
Node Vizainagaram
APPENDIX – 2 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS BOQ
S.No.
Item description including Specification
Unit of Measurement
(UOM)
Quantity
A. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP
1
2
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of
District IP MPLS Nodes
Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM)
Incl NOC
Nos.
10
Nos.
11
Nos.
9
District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client
incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks – 40 channel
Number of degrees – 2 (way)
2.1
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client
incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks – 40 channel
Number of degrees – 4 (way) x
2.2
Associated Planning Tool
Nos.
1
Nos.
1
Nos.
10
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
NOC DWDM – with 120X10G protected client
incl SFP and 24 x 100G trunk – 40 channel
Number of degree – 4 (way)
2.3
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
3
Zonal DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client &
2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
111
4
Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM Network
Nos.
20
5
CWDM Equipment
Nos.
11
6
GPON OLT 4X1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
11
7
EQAM Converter with Amplifier
Nos.
11
Nos.
Nos.
49
47
B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs
1
Zonal IP MPLS Nodes
1.1
Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl
SFP and 8 x 10G incl SFP
1.2
Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl
SFP and 12 x 10G incl SFP
Nos.
2
Zonal Hub DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client
& 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel
Nos.
47
Nos.
2
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
2.1
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
Zonal Hub DWDM – with 6 x 10G protected
Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel
Number of degrees – 2 ( way)
2.2
Associated Planning Tool
(Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a
loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient
<= 0.3db per km))
3
EQAM Converter with Amplifier
Nos.
49
4
CWDM equipment
Nos.
49
5
GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
49
Nos.
488
C. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs
1.1
Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 2x10 G
1.2
Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 4x10G
Nos.
83
2.1
GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports
Nos.
571
2.2
GPON OLT 2x10G, 8 GPON ports
34
3
CWDM Equipment
Nos.
605
4
EQAM Converter with Amplifier
Nos.
488
5
EDF amplifier
Nos.
83
Nos.
1784
D. Sub Station Level PoP
1
GPON OLT 2x1G(10 Km) sfp, 8 GPON ports
OLT
112
2
3
EDF amplifier
Nos.
Nos.
CWDM Equipment
1784
1784
A.1 District IP MPLS Nodes
S.No.
Parameter
Minimum Required Specifications
Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route
Processor,Power supply,Switching fabric
Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or
1+N power supply redundancy
Should have two free payload slots for future expansion.
All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput
1
Architecture
The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces.; POS
10GE, 10GE WAN PHY
The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR, LR & ZR are software configurable for
LANPHY/WANPHY mode.
The operating system of the router shall have CPU based architecture.
The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol,
forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules. Failure
of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS.In service bug patching should
be available
The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support
such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and syncE
Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals,
bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories
Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps.
The router should have capability of minimum 3.8 million IPv4 routes and 1.8 Million IPv6
routes
The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and GB Flash , also should support 30GB
storage in SSD
the router should support minimum 1.8 million MAC address, minimum 125k Pseudowires.
Router should have 125k multicast routes.
The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP
2
Performance
Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online
insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing
through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic.
In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast
routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the router
shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic running on
rest of the line cards in the system
All the bandwidth services terminated on the router should be equally distributed amongst
multiple line cards i.e. failure of a single line card should not impact any particular
bandwidth service for more than 50%.
113
3
Protocol Support
Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate
System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), BGP
for IPv4 and
Ipv6,MPBGP,Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual
Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6 Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent
Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols
IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIM-SSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6
and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS
VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel
Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServ-Aware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP), VPLS ,VPWS,Ethernet over MPLS , CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC
4553
Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link
OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731.
The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces
The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and
Multicast traffic.
The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4.
Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration
Shall support the following:
4
QoS Features
Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces,
source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP
Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through
Application Recognition techniques.
Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time
application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management:
WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing
Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control.
Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge.
Minimum 126k egress and 126k ingress hardware queues per line card.
5
Security
Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of
scheduling for HQOS.
Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet,
Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range
etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS
The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for all
interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration.
Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping,
control plane policing,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2
Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for
remote management.
Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available.
The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of
events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available.
Operating temperature - 0 to 40 degrees
6
Management
The proposed router should have 230v AC Power Supply redundant power supply modules,
should be hot swappable
The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the video traffic transiting
through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on both IP and MPLS enabled
interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such as delay, jitter, MPEG MDI
(RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and compressed video formats (MPEG).
7
Interfaces
The proposed router should support 24 x 10G interfaces with 20 nos. of SR optics & 4 nos.
of ER optics
114
The proposed router should have 48 x 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
8
Certifications
The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body
A.2 / A3 Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM)
Consists of 100G trunk system, Client interface, Amplifier, ROADM and Planning Tool
A.2.a: DWDM 100G trunk system
S.No.
Sub Category
1
Interfaces
2
100G performance
specification
Requirement
The proposed DWDM trunk system should be populated with following
ports:
2 x 100 G trunk ports (single or dual cards)
100G DWDM Transponder must use a coherent receiver with a receive and
transmit DSP. The receive DSP performs compensation for Chromatic
Dispersion (CD), Polarization impairments, performs carrier phase
estimation and FEC decoding. The transmit DSP performs CD precompensation, Nyquist shaping and FEC coding.
Vendor must develop the DSP ASIC for the coherent DWDM Transponder
in-house
The Coherent DWDM Transponder must support multiple trunk side bit
rates and at a minimum 50G, 100G must be supported. The bit rate must be
configurable through EMS/NMS software.
The modulation scheme for 100G DWDM must be CP-DQPSK (Coherent
Polarized Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) also called PMQPSK.
The Coherent DWDM transmitter and receiver must support atleast 40
channels in the C-Band rom 1528.77 and 1566.72nm (C-Band – 50 GHz) /
4 Channel for A3 and B2 line items
3
100G performance
specification
The Coherent DWDM Transponder must have a grid-less laser i.e. tunable
in increments of +/- 0.1 Ghz.
The minimum back to back OSNR that is required for the 100G CP-DQPSK
signal to operate at a BER of IE-15 @ 0.5nm RBW should be 5.5dB
the maximum reach of the 100G CP-DQPSK DWDM signal for G.652
fiber with standard specifications of loss coefficient , CD , PMD should be
4800 km
The maximum Chromatic dispersion tolerance for 100G CP-QPSK DWDM
signal should be 80,000ps/nm
The maximum polarization mode dispersion tolerance in DGD should be
180ps
4
100G standards
compliance
The Output Power range of the 100G transmitter should be in "+1dBm to 1.5dBm"
The minimum required Optical Return Loss should be 27 dB
Support for G.709, G.975, G.691, GR-253-Core-Issue04; G8021
115
5
100G laser safety
6
100G protection
100G OTN
7
8
9
10
100G OTN performance
monitoring
100G performance
monitoring
100G performance
monitoring
Support for Automatic Laser Shutdown and restart based on ITU-T G.664
(06/99)
Support for LC duplex connectors with shutters
Support for UL 60950-1 - Edition 2, March 2007
Vendor must support 100G DWDM interface protection with redundant
interfaces on separate DWDM cards
Support for G.709 Generic Communication Channel GCC ob the 100G
DWDM interface
The 100-Gbps DWDM Trunk provides support for both Transparent and
Non-Transparent signal transport Performance Monitoring
Calculation and accumulation of the Performance Monitoring data in 15minute to 24-hour intervals as per G.7710.
Should support : OPT, LBC,OPR, RCD, PMD, OSNR
A.2.b: Client Interface
S.No.
Sub Category
Requirement
1
Interfaces
2
Interfaces
The proposed DWDM Client card should be populated with following ports:
10x10 Gigabit Ethernet ports on a single slot
The proposed DWDM system should also support the following Ports
2 x 10 GE,/2 x 40 GE/1 x 100GE interfaces on a single slot
The 10G client interfaces must support the following protocols
OC-192/STM-64 (9.95328 Gbps);10GE LAN PHY (10.3125 Gbps);10G
FC (10.518 Gbps);8G FC;OTU-2;Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps);G.709
over clocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G; Sup43 Clause 7.1
(11.0957 Gbps)
3
4
5
6
7
10G protocol support
10G pluggables
10G pluggables
10G OTN FEC
10G laser safety
For grey SFP+ , SR , LR , ER and ZR reaches must be supported
10G client traffic should be transported transparently
10G client interface must support ITU-T G.975 FEC coding; ITU-T G.975.1
(Sub-clause I.7) FEC coding
Support for UL 60950-1 - Edition 2, March 2007
Support for IEC 60825-1: 2001 Ed.1.2 (incl. am1+am2) Safety of laser
products Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements and users
guide;IEC60825-2 Ed.3 (2004) Safety of laser products Part 2: Safety of
optical fiber communication systems + A1:2006;
Support for f21CFR1040 (2008/04) (Accession Letter and CDRH Report)
Automatic Laser Shutdown and restart (ALS) according to ITU-T G.664
(03/06). Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff (Laser Notice No. 50) , June
2007
8
10G client protection
9
10G OTN
10
10G performance
monitoring
Vendor must support 10G client interface protection with redundant
interfaces .
Support for G.709 Generic Communication Channel GCC ob the 10G client
interface
Calculation and accumulation of the Performance Monitoring data in 15minute to 24-hour intervals as per G.7710
SONET PM should be available according to Telcordia GR-253 standard
SDH PM should be available according to ITU-T G826 / ITU-T G.828
A.2.c: Amplifier: Coherent
116
S.No.
Sub Category
Requirement
The amplifiers should have flexibility to be Software-configured as preamplifier, post-amplifier
There shall be active control of express traffic to adapt instantly the
amplifier-pair to wavelength count never being affected by any degradation
arising out from rapid reconfigurations. Sudden addition/removal of
channels at intermediate site must not affect whole transmission of DWDM
signals.
The optical amplifiers shall respond automatically to changes in the number
of channels without the need for manual intervention or realignment.
Integrated VOA shall allow the amplifier units to automatically compensate
for variations in span-attenuation due to ageing and splicing etc.
1
General
The adaptation response for restoration after ILA fault, fiber-plant
restoration or change in power levels etc., shall be immediate. The In Post
Amplifier and Pre Amplifier shall support in built optical spectrum
monitoring device, which will not only apply the correction to channels to
keep the spectrum flat, but also shall be used for the monitoring of optical
monitoring as per ITU-T G.697.
The optical amplifiers must implement the following mechanisms to
maintain error free system operation under dynamic conditions:
a) Fast gain control loop: to protect against short term transient conditions
such
sudden
loss
of
channels.
b) Slow output power control loop: to protect against long term conditions
such fiber aging.
should have a single stage amplifier with no DCU stage
The proposed amplifiers should have a gain range of 24 to 32 db and the
gain loss of 26 db should be sustained
The amplifier must have an embedded gain-flattening filter
2
coherent amplifier features
The amplifiers should support two modes of operation - constant gain and
constant power - while also providing Amplified Spontaneous Emission
(ASE) compensation in either modes
The amplifier should provide fast-transient suppression to respond quickly
to network changes without adding impairments and degradation.
The amplifier must have programmable tilt using software-controllable
variable optical attenuators (VOAs)
The amplifier should have extensive optical monitoring with photo diodes,
to provide nodal- and network-based automatic power-level management.
Input power range (PIN) for single channel at -5dBm output power should
be 0 t0 15 dBm
input power range for Full-channel load or single-channel load at 20dBm
output power should be –7 to 8 dBm
Output power range :–5 to 20 dBm
3
coherent amplifiers
specifications
ns
Output power shut-off threshold: 20.5 dBm
Standard gain range (with controlled gain tilt):12 to 24 dB
Extended gain range (with uncontrolled gain tilt): 24 to 27 dB
Gain ripple at target gain tilt = 0 dB for a single amplifier: 0.5 to 1.2 dB
Gain ripple at target gain tilt = 0 dB for six amplifiers in cascade: Up to 4
dB
117
Gain tilt error at target gain tilt = 0 dB: 1 dB ±0.5 dB
Gain set resolution (constant gain mode): 0.1 dB
Output power set resolution (constant power mode):0.1 dB
Settling time for power and gain regulation (from 10 to 90% of final set
point) : 5 ms to 1 sec
Short-term stability range : Gain, output power, and gain tilt: ±0.1, ±0.1,
and ±0.1 dB
Maximum output power in amplifier-disable mode: –15 dBm
Input reflectance: 40 dB;Output reflectance: 40 dB;Backward ASE power:
"-25dB";Pump-power leakage: "-20dB"
Total number of 40 channels supported should be 1528 to 1570 nm
4
Optical safety
amplifiers should comply to the following :EN or IEC-60825-2 Third
edition (2004-06); EN or IEC 60825-1 Consol. Ed. 1.2 - incl. am1+am2
(2001-08); 21CFR1040 (2004/04) (Accession Letter and CDRH Report);
IEC-60825-2 Third edition (2004-06); ITU-T G.664 (2006)
5
Safety
amplifiers should comply to he following :UL/CSA 60950 -1 First Edition
(2003); GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 (Type 2 and Type 4 equipment); UL/CSA
60950 -1 First Edition (2003);IEC 60950-1 (2001/10)/Amendment 11:2004
to EN 60950-1:2001, 1st Edition (with all country deviations)
A.2.d: ROADM:
S.No.
Sub Category
Requirement
ROADM should be able to handle 40 different wavelengths of C- Band in
each direction
The ROADM at ring junctions must support at minimum 4degrees
The ROADM at other nodes must support at minimum 2 degrees
The ROADM shall create a fully non-blocking multi-directional optical
switching node with no limitations to the number of channels added or
dropped or passed through from any direction. Restrictions on dropping if
any should be clearly indicated
1
ROADM specification
Each side of an ROADM node is to be split logically and physically,
ensuring that there are no single points of failure that would cause
add/drop traffic to be lost on multiple degrees.
The ROADMs must have a OCM module for power monitoring
The ROADMs must have per channel VOAs to equalize all the DWDM
channels - added locally and expressed
ROADM must be fully remotely configurable from the EMS/NMS
Add/Drop channels shall be remotely selected.in a flexible way.
It must be possible to upgrade in service from two directions to multiple
directions without affecting existing infrastructure or traffic.
2
Functional View
The network management interface should provide a node level view of
the internal patch cord connections and the signal flow in the node for all
directions
118
The network management interface should provide a network level view of
the internal patchcord connections of all the nodes and the end to end
signal flow in the network
3
4
5
Network Functional View
Power Correction
Node Setup
In the above network level view, it should be possible to view at all points
in the network , the following Power values in dBm;Span loss values in
Db;Patchcord verification for all internal connections based on the power
values;Individual circuit paths and associated parameters
A mechanism should be available to monitor power at a network level and
correct changes in power due to channel addition / deletion and fiber
degradation
The planning tool should be able to generate installation files that can be
loaded onto the nodes in the network through the craft interface or
management interface on the node
The installation file should include pre-provisioning of equipment, side
information, per channel output power required for ROADM VOAs &
amplifiers, Loss of Power threshold at receive ports.
6
Network Alarm
Correlation
A mechanism should exist for all the alarms in the network to be correlated
in case of failure of OMS/OTS link and only the source alarm must be
raised as critical while all other alarms are suppressed.
The solution must provide a distributed GMPLS control plane that
leverages routing and signalling protocol extensions to performs path
computation with optical feasibility analysis and allows dynamic
wavelength circuit provisioning.
The GMPLS control plane must provide Automatic DWDM network
topology discovery
The GMPLS control plane must provide dynamic restoration of the
DWDM network in case of failures.
The GMPLS control plane must provide Optical channel diversity based
on LSP-ID and nodes, links, and Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLG).
7
Control Plane
The GMPLS control plane must allow user to specify path constraints :
include or exclude nodes and links in the working and protect DWDM
circuits.
An in-band control channel must be provided for the GMPLS control
plane.
The GMPLS control plane must support the following types of circuits
:1+0 ( unprotected ), 1+R ( restoration enabled ), 1+1+R ( 50ms protection
and restoration enabled )
The GMPLS circuits must support revert - manual and automatic
The GMPLS control plane implementation must comply to the following
standards :RFC 6205, RFC 3471, RFC 3472, RFC 3473(excluding sections
3.2,4.1,12), RFC 6163, RFC 2328, RFC 4202, RFC 4203, RFC 4208
A.2.e: Planning Tool:
S.No.
1
Sub Category
Design
Requirement
Distance and insertion loss of the network spans. Standard fiber types must
be supported.
119
Type and number of services required in each network location
Linear effects include noise accumulation, optical power budget, and
chromatic dispersion effects. Connector loss , Fiber attenuation , Equipment
insertion loss , Aging loss must be accounted for.
Nonlinear effects include cross-phase modulation, self-phase modulation,
and four-wave mixing.
The planning tool should be able to create an optimal DWDM infrastructure
capable of any-to-any service delivery for linear, ring, multi-tiring, and
mesh networks.
The planning tool must manage direct interconnection of DWDM
interfaces. The Planner must accommodate third-party DWDM interfaces
by allowing the user to input interface-specific parameters and then using
this interface in the network design.
2
Features
The planning tool must enable evaluation and definitions of changes
requested to scale and evolve an existing network (delta planning). It should
allow you to add and remove ROADM nodes from a design, add new
services to the network, and change the flexibility associated with an
existing or a planning design. Delta planning should give a complete set of
reporting features to help determine what needs to be changed and where, at
both the node and network levels which includes installation parameters ,
patch cord connections and BOM
The output from Transport Planner provides content must contains
1. System performance reporting
2.
Bill-of-materials (BoM) generation
3. Graphical layouts of racks and shelf configurations,
4. Optical connections between nodes,
5. Downloadable provisioning and configuration settings for each optical
node.
6. Power consumption of each node with shelf and card wise breakup of
data
For each of the services defined at the network level, the Planner must
provide the relevant optical parameters required to understand whether or
not the traffic could be supported.This includes SOL / EOL OSNR , SOL
/EOL OSNR Margin , SOL /EOL receive power , SOL/EOL power margin
, residual CD , PMD , SNLE , MNLE and filtering penalty.
3
Design outputs
The tool must provide a graphical layout of the racks, shelves, and units of
each network location, so this information can be available during the
planning or installation of the network.
The Planner must provide a complete list of the optical path cords that have
to be installed between the different units to allow the proper signal flow at
the node and network levels.
The planner must support situations in the field when the fiber parameters
may differ from those considered in the original design. In this case, it
should be possible to validate the design against the new fiber data without
changing the overall BoM.
Automatic data exchange between design and network. The planning tool
should be able to generate provisioning files, which you then can use to
configure the relevant optical parameters at the node level. In addition, you
should be able to use the same file to pre-provision the individual cards in
the nodes of the network, allowing you to make sure the installation in the
field has been properly done, even before the first DWDM wavelength is
provisioned across the nodes of the network.
120
The planning tool result must show a functional view of the nodes that
indicates how cards are connected to each other and the signal flow through
the node
The planning tool should generate wavelength routing information in a
table to show how wavelengths are routed across the network at both a
quick glance and as a detailed report.
The planning tool should generate link availability data of all links based on
MTBF and MTTR
A.4 Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM
Refer A.2.c Specifications of Electronic BoQ
A.5 CWDM Equipment
S.No
Product Description
Features:
CWDM should realize the multiplexing and de-multiplexing between 1550, 1490/1310nm
1
Low Insertion Loss
Low PDL
High Isolation
Excellent Environment Reliability
Applications:
Line Monitoring
WDM System
2
LAN
Fiber Optical amplifier
CATV System
3
Connector type
Pigtail
Parameter
2-4 Channel
Mux
Demux
Channel Wavelength (nm)
1270~1610
Center wavelength Accuracy (nm)
±0.5
Channel Spacing (nm)
20
Channel Passband (@-0.5dB bandwidth (nm)
>13
Insertion Loss (dB)
≤1.6
Channel Uniformity (dB)
≤0.6
4
Channel Ripple (dB)
0.3
121
Isolation (dB)
5
Adjacent
>30
Non-adjacent
>40
Insertion Loss Temperature Sensitivity (dB/C)
<0.005
Wavelength Temperature Shifting (nm/C)
<0.002
Polarization Dependent Loss (dB)
<0.1
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PS)
<0.1
Directivity (dB)
>50
Return Loss (dB)
>45
Minimum Power Handling (db)
>26db
Operating Temperature (C)
Packaging
-5~+75
1 to 8 (mux units) in a sigle box
A.6 GPON OLT
Refer C.2.1 / C2.2 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
A.7 EQAM Converter with Amplifier
Refer B.3 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
B.1 Zonal IP MPLS Nodes
B.1.1 / B.1.2 Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router 8x10G / 12x10G
S.No.
Parameter
Minimum Required Specifications
Router shall support redundant Data and control Plane. There should not have impact to Data
Plane traffic during software upgrade. Smallest RU factor would be preferred.
Router should have redundant controller cards and should support stateful switch over, nonstop forwarding, Non-stop routing and Graceful restart.
Router should be CE2.0 and MEF14.0 certified.
1
Architecture
Router shall support MEF for Ethernet based services like PW, VPLS or ATOM.
In case of failure of any single route processor non of the line card traffic should be impacted
Router shall support sync any configurations from previous modules to new modules with hotswap event occurred
The Chassis should have one free slot for future expansion.
The router shall support following type of interfaces – 10GE, 1GE interfaces; 10GE WAN
PHY and 10G, Ch.STM1.
Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 120Gbps.
The router should have 4GB DRAM ,
Router shall support 170 Mpps forwarding performance for IPv4 & IPv6 performance
2
Performance
Router shall support 16000 Mac addresses
Router shall support 18000 IPv4 routes
router shall support 8000 queues and 128 MPLS VPN's
Router shall support aggregation of links. Minimum 8 link should be supported as part of
122
single aggregation.
Router shall support IPSLA or equivalent and Y.1731 for performance monitoring.
Router should support Redundant Power Supply and should also support On line insertion and
removal of same.
3
High Availability
Fan tray should be hot-swappable, and should be a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). The node
can run indefinitely with a single fan failure. Shall Support hot-swappable for all modules. And
secure normal operations when hot-swap event occurred
All cards should be provided in redundancy and distributed on different slots.
Router shall support MPLS-TE with FRR for sub 50 msec protection.
4
Protocol Support
Router must support Traffic Engineering for node and link protection.
Router shall support IPV4 and IPV6,IGMP V2/V3,MLD,IGMP and PIM,6PE and 6VPE mode
for IPV6 transport over IPV4, ECMP,LDP,BGP Prefix independent control (EDGE and Core)
for IPV4 and IPV6,BGP,IS-IS,OSPFv2and V3,RSVP,VRRP,Loop free alternate FRR (IPFRR)
and Traffic Engineering.
Router should support high availability for all BFD,BGP ,OSPF and IS-IS and no packet loss
during controller switch over.
Router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4
The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and
Multicast traffic.
Router shall support layer3 and layer2 MPLS VPN.
Router shall support HQOS on all kind of interface in both ingress and egress direction.
Similar QOS shall be supported for all type of interface including Bundled interfaces.
5
QoS Features
Shall support Ingress classification, marking and policing on physical interfaces and logical
interfaces using source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination
ports, IP Precedence, MPLS EXP, DSCP,802.1p
Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time application
like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter.
Congestion Management: WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing
Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet, Source
& Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range etc. Should
Support per-user Authentication, Authorization and Accounting through RADIUS or TACACS
and SNMPv1/v2/V3
6
Security &
Management
7
Operating
Environmental
Requirements
8
Interface
The proposed router should support the following :- 8 x 10G interfaces loaded with 10G SR
SFP+ Optics + 8x1Gig Interfaces loaded with 1 G LX SFP interfaces
9
Certifications
The proposed router should be NDPP v1.1 certified by common Criteria body
-40ºC to 65ºC operating temperature and 5 to 95%, non-condensing
B.2.1 / B.2.2 Zonal Hub DWDM with 4x10G protected client & 2x100G trunk Ports
Consists of 100G trunk system, Client interface, Amplifier, ROADM and Planning Tool
Refer to A.2.a to A.2.e Specifications of Electronic BoQ
B.3 EQAM Converters with Amplifier to 1550nm Video
B.3.a - IP QAM
123
S. No.
Description
1
Output 24 RF-QAM Channels or 12 DVB-T channels for both SD and HD programs
2
Support programs input from both ASI (four different sources) and GBE IP (up to 256 SPTS)
3
Support stream processing including PID remapping and EPG data insertion
QAM RF Outputs
4
Physical Outputs
Two connectors for RF
Output Frequency Range
48 -862 MHz
Output Frequency Step Size
50 KHz
RF Channel
24 (6/7/8 MHz)
QAM Modulation Mode
64/128 QAM
QAM Type
ITU-T J.83 Annex A/ C, Annex B (64/256QAM)
Symbol Rate
1.0~6.9 MBauds
Output Level
5
6
7
Effective, per channel
90~115 dBuV
Combined, 24 channel
90~106dBuV
MER
≥40dB (Equalized)
BER
GBE IP Input
≤5×10-9 (64QAM,6.875Msps)
Interface
1 x 1000 Mbps per port
IP Encapsulation
MPEG TS over UDP/RTP
MPEG TS
MPTS and SPTS
I/O Processing
Up to 12 Sockets(MPTS),
Addressing
256Sockets(SPTS) max at 72 Mbps per socket
Unicast and Multicast
Management
IGMPv1, IGMPv2, IGMPv3
Forward Error Correction
Re-multiplexing
ProMPEG
PID
Re-mapping and Filtering
MPTS Output Synchronization
Routing
Any Input to Any Output
Redundancy
Input Service Redundancy &
IP Port Redundancy
Management
8
Interface
1000Base-TX, RJ45
NMS
9
Web-based Management (future feature)
Support SNMP
10
Physical & Environment
Input Voltage
90 – 260 VAC
Power Consumption
Approx 100 W
Rack Space
1 RU
Dimension (WxHxD)
480mm x 44mm x 440mm
Operating Temperature
0o to 50oC
Storage Temperature
-40o to 65oC
Relative Operating Humidity
<95%
124
B.3.b EDF Amplifier
S.No.
Description
1
Description
Optic Operation wave length
nm
Min
1540
Typ
1550
Max
1564
2
3
Input power Range
Output power per port
(dbm)
(dbm)
13
10
24
22
26
24
4
5
6
Gain fitness
Noise figure
Snmp network Management
db
db
4.5
RJ45
5.5
5.5
7
Communication interface
RS232/Rj 45
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Power supply
Power consume
Operating temp
Humidity
Rack mountable - 1U
Optic port
Input port
Output ports
Rf Input impedance
Rf Input return Loss
210-265v Ac
50 W
5-65 c
95
%
1
4/8
75ohms
db
Rf input level
CNR
Flatness
Frequency range
dBuV
dB
dB
47-750 MHZ
16( 47-550mHz)
14(55-750mhz)
78-88
51.5
(+-.75)
B.4 CWDM Equipment
Refer to A.5 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
B.5 GPON OLT
Refer C.2.1 / C2.2 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
C.1.1 / C.1.2 Mandal IP MPLS Nodes
S.No.
Minimum Required Technical Specifications
1
Router should support have 62 Gbps of switching capacity
2
The Router shall be standalone fixed configuration Chassis or stackable system with redundant power supply.
3
A single point failure on the equipment shall not result in network or network management system downtime
4
Router should support Quality of service for marking, Prioritising and assuring bandwidth Guarantee.
Classification can be done based on DSCP,Priority,IP addressand 802.1p.
125
5
Router should also support RSVP for end to end bandwidth guarantee.
6
Router should support modular QoS with Multilevel Priority Queue along with weighted fair queuing.
7
Router should also support Policy for control plane protection
8
The router should have 4Gb DRAM and 2GB flash
9
The router should support 12 Mb buffers
10
The Router should support multilevel priority scheduling for voice and video applications with minimal jitter,
latency and packet loss.
The Routershall support fault-tolerant connections to other network or shared media segment to protect against a
primary link failure. If the primary link fails, the backup path shall be automatically activated to maintain
network connectivity and throughput.
The
Router
should
support
the
following
protocols:
BGP,MPBGP,OSPF ,RFC 3107 ,OSPFv2 and v3,Loop free alternate ,IP FRR,6PE,6VPE,VPLS,Layer2
VPN,uRPF,PIMSM and PIM SSM.
11
12
13
The router should support fast convergence protocols like G.8032, IPFRR,MPLS FRR,BGP prefix independent
convergence,VRRP or equivalent and BFD for Routing protocols.
14
The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic.
15
The proposed router shall support 3 level H-QoS
16
The proposed router shall support Layer 2 and Layer 2 multicast
17
It shall support Ethernet Ring protection based on ITU-T G.8032 v2
18
It shall support the following protocols:-
19
The Router shall support both IPv4 and IPv6
20
The router should suport Internet Group Management Protocol versions 2 and 3 (IGMPv2 and v3) ,IP/MPLS,IP
FRR,BGP PIC,MPLS LDP,MPLS TE
21
The Router should support layer 2 and layer 3 MPLS VPN.
22
Shall support Frame sizes from 64 bytes to 1600 and to 9216 bytes on all ports
23
Router shall work as DHCP relay agent
24
Router should support Eight No of hardware queues are required for per port for flow treatment of traffic,Policy
Based QOS,WRED,WFQ,HQOS,Ethernet OAM and Y.1731 performance management
25
The router should support Zero touch provisioning for ease of management
26
The Router must support the following security features:-
27
Security through ACL filters for layers 2 and layer 3 traffic, MAC address limits and storm control for broadcast,
multicast and unknown unicast,Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) with TACACS+ and
RADIUS,URPF
28
Router should support 12 xGESFP and 2 x 10G Ports. Each loaded 4 x 1G Copper RJ 45 / Copper SFP port, 6 x
1G SFP ports loaded with 1G x LX SFP with 10 Kms range and 2 x 10G SFP with ER SFP+ with a range of 40
kms
29
Certifications: The proposed router should be NDPP v1.1 certified by common Criteria body
C.2.1 / C.2.2 GPON OLT
S.No.
1
Technical Specifications
Generic Requirements
126
The FTTx solution should be based on GPON, XG-PON1 / Point-to-Point Active Ethernet .
2
Service Interfaces
GPON, 2.5G downstream, 1.25G upstream.
The equipment must be able to operate at the physical distance of 20 km and above (between OLT and
ONU/ONT) without any additional amplification required.
The OLT should support 1310 and 1490 nm wavelengths
No . Of Subscribers per GPON port minimum is 128 (Splitting ratio 1:128)
The system shall be support multiple GbE / 10xGbE network connections.
The FTTx platform shall be modular, with minimum of 40Gbps switching capacity.
The Interfaces for the offered FTTx systems shall be of “plug in type (PIU) SFP modules”
3
The offered OLTs/MDUs/HGWs shall be inter-operable with any third party ONTs as per the OMCI
standards and must at least be certified by the Broadband Forum BBF.247. Inter-operability tests shall be done
with different vendors
Network management
Unified Network Management system (NMS) shall be offered .
The required NMS in addition to management of network elements shall be incorporated optionally with
special network planning and management tools for managing all connections through the FTTx
network and modelling, planning and span design for FTTx networks etc.
Bidder shall offer Network Management System for the offered equipment to provide the capabilities
for configuration, operation, monitoring, remote monitoring, fault localization, and data storage.
4
FTTx SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
compliant to the relevant ISO/ETSI industry quality standards (e.g. ISO 9000/9001),
defining
the
quality
system
requirements
for
the
design,
development, production, delivery, installation and
maintenance of product and services.
The offered equipment shall be able to inter-work with the other user end equipment supplied by other
vendors as per ITU-T specifications.
The offered equipment shall support single fiber operation on standard SMF G.652, G.655 & G.657.
The IGMP forwarding capabilities on OLT should be no less than 2000pps,
The
equipment shall support IPv4 and IPV6.
The equipment shall detect the optical power transmission of every ONT, once that it detects some
problems in the status of the optical transmission power. The system shall disable the defective ONT
automatically in order to guarantee the normally use of the others.
5
The following VLAN Operations need to be supported:
Mapping of subscriber VLAN to a common service VLAN
Translate/re-write subscribers VLAN ID to another VLAN ID
VLAN switching
Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p priority tagging to a specific VLAN.
Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID to a specific VLAN
Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the combination of IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tagging to a specific
VLAN
6
Subscriber Access methods supported
DHCP,DHCP option 82/60/43/37/18,Static IP,PPPoE
Shall support multiple service delivery of data, voice and video.
Shall support IP policing at the network and subscriber end.
shall support Ethernet 802.1p and IP TOS bit prioritization.
The OLTs shall be able to support mobile traffic backhauling.
127
support for the Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS), 10 MHz, 1 pulse per second (1PPS), and time of day
(TOD) interfaces. supports synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) and IEEE-1588 functionalities, and Shall act as the
source for network clocking for TDM, SDH and SONET, SyncE, and GPS interfaces. In addition to the timing
services
The Equipment must support IP Multicasting to cater for interactive services such as broadcast IPTV,
distance learning, etc. The detail implementation of multicasting mechanism must be explained.
Static routing and Dynamic routing
7
QoS Features supported
Trusted connectivity where the QoS setting / traffic prioritization configured by customer can be preserved.
Un-trusted connectivity where the QoS setting / traffic prioritization configured by customer can be overwritten by
the Equipment.
The detail Downstream and Upstream QoS and traffic prioritization mechanism supported inclusive of the hardware
queue available for each direction. A minimum of 8 hardware queues should be supported at both directions. The
OLT should implement some queuing mechanism to manage the hardware queue such as SP, WRR, etc.
Management System shall support bandwidth provisioning starting from 64 kbps granularity.
Shall support Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) mechanism to allow optimum bandwidth utilization on each
PON interface. The detail implementation and capability of DBA mechanism should be explained in detail.
The offered NG-PON equipment shall support a complete T-Cont type (Type 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5) according to ITU-T
G.983.4. The bidder shall explain the T-Cont types supported and typical usage of each of it respectively.
Shall support basic OAM features such as loop back, remote diagnostic, CC and Link Trace complies with IEEE
802.1ag.
Shall support port-mirroring function for trouble shooting, monitoring, and tracing purpose. The bidder shall
explain the port-mirroring function mechanism in detail.
8
ITU-T / IEEE RELATED SPAECIFICATIONS
Shall
comply
to
ITU-T/IEEE recommendations.
ITU-T G.652: Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber and cable.
ITU-T G.757: Characteristics of a Bending Loss Insensitive Single Mode Optical Fiber and Cable for the
Access Network
ITU-T G.703: Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interface.
ITU-T G.704: Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 Kbit/s hierarchical
levels.
ITU-T G.823: The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 Kbit/s
hierarchy.
ITU-T G.983.4: A broadband optical access system with increased service capability using dynamic
bandwidth assignment.
ITU-T G.984.1: GPON General Characteristics.
ITU-T G.984.2: GPON Physical Media Dependent (PMD) layer specification.
ITU-T G.984.3: GPON Transmission convergence layer specification.
ITU-T G.984.4: GPON ONT management and control interface specification.
ITU-T G.987.1: XG-PON, General requirements.
ITU-T G.987.2: XG-PON, Physical media dependent (PMD) layer specification.
ITU-T G.987.3: XG-PON, Transmission convergence (TC) specifications
ITU-T G.988: XG-PON, ONU management and control interface (OMCI) specification
ITU-T G.698.3: Seeded WDM-PON
ITU-T G.8261: Timing and Synchronization aspects in packet networks.
ITU-T G.8262: Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave lock.
IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridges
128
IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet OAM
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1p VLAN prioritization
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol of at least 8 ports, based on port-based, address-based, and round robin
IEEE 802.1p VLAN prioritization.
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3 10 Mbps Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ad Ethernet Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IETF RFC 2131: DHCP
IETF RFC 2132: DHCP Options and BOOTP Tenderer Extensions
IETF RFC 2236: Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
IETF RFC 2933: Internet Group Management Protocol Management Information Base
IETF RFC 3046: DHCP Relay Agent Info Option (Option 82)
IETF RFC 3376: Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3
Any other standards inter-related with all the above Specifications and any other standards deemed necessary by
the bidder.
9
OLT Hardware features
The OLT shall be rack mountable and meet ETSI standards for indoor equipment requirement.
The OLT shall be designed to Operate at 210- 250 V ac
Dual Redundant Power supplies
Operatim temp 0 to 65 centigrade
Fan is required for cooling the OLT to force airflow.
The OLT shall provide one craft port for local configuration access.
The OLT shall support one 10/100M Ethernet port for linking with EMS.
The
10
equipment must support a minimum splitting ratio of 32 splits or more.
Physical interfaces supported/loaded
Supporting Ethernet interfaces towards the FTTx network is the mandatory requirement.
The offered OLT should support 4 GPON interfaces, 4 x 1G SFP interfaces ,4 x 10 G SFP+ interfaces
The offered OLT should be expandable to support additional 4 x GPON interfaces .
C.3 CWDM Equipment
Refer to A.5 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
C.4 EQAM Converter with Amplifier
Refer to B.3 Specifications of Electronic BoQ
129
C.5 EDF Amplifier
Refer to B.3.b Specifications of Electronic BoQ
D.1 OLT
Refer to C.2.1/C.2.2 specifications of Electronic BoQ
D.2 EDF Amplifier
Refer to B.3.b Specifications of Electronic BoQ
D.3 CWDM Equipment
Refer to A.5 specifications of Electronic BoQ
APPENDIX – 3 NOC BOQ
S.No.
Item description including Specification
Unit of Measurement
(UOM)
Quantity
A. Network Operating Centre (Proposed to be located at Visakhapatnam)
1
EMS, OSS, BSS, NMS Interfaces, GIS Interfaces
and Fault Management and Video wall for NMS
Set
1
1.1
1.2
EMS
GPON EMS
Nos.
Nos.
1
1
1.3
OSS/BSS
Nos.
1
1.4
Video wall for NMS
Nos.
1
Electronics (IPMPLS and DWDM, Raman amplifiers
for 100G Backbone and total capacity of 1.3Gbps) for
State HQ POP with Meetme roomcross connects.
Set
1
2.1
Core IP MPLS Router
Nos.
2
2.2
Core Switch
Nos.
2
2.3
Firewall
Nos.
4
Set
1
Nos.
2
2
3
3.1
ISP peering Routers, Upstream Routers, BRAS,
CGNAT(IPV4&IPv6), CDN and Video streaming system,
Caching system, Lawful intercept system, Blade chassis,
AAA servers, Storage.
BRAS Router
130
3.2
4
5
Server pool for OSS/ BSS , Caching & Storage
Civil and Electrical Infra with 20KVA UPS(1+1), Silent DG
of 45 KVA(1+1), Air conditioning and Earthing, Fire and
Safety Facilities. IP Phones, Videoconference equipment.
CATV Headend with Antenna Farm ( 250 channel- 20 HD,
230 SD / MPEG 4)
Set
1
Set
1
Set
1
A. Network Operation Center
EMS & NMS
1.1 EMS Software
S.No
Technical Specifications
1
The EMS shall support capability for monitoring and configuration of DWDM based Optical and IP/MPLS
network through NOC
2
EMS shall support single management system for optical and IP/MPLS network to provide ease of operation.
3
EMS shall be capable of providing the FCAPS functionality to the network. EMS shall provide all necessary
information to NMS on standard interfaces.
4
EMS for Network Elements shall support northbound open interfaces such as SNMP/JAVA/CORBA/XML for
integration with the NMS.
5
The EMS system shall support SNMPv1, v2 & v3.
6
EMS shall support client–server based architecture. Client being GUI/web browser based access with secure
interface to the server.
7
EMS should allow the user to zoom down to the port level of any given card /equipment.
8
EMS should support Scheduler to handle administrative operations to be performed repeatedly at a particular
time of day. Such as: NE configuration backup, software image download, operator login/logout attempts, etc.
9
EMS must support below network element software management:-
10
a. Loading of new software images.
b. Management of multiple versions of software .
c. Installation of software updates.
d. Software download status reporting.
e. Administrator authorization for the loading of software
f. Coordination for the software download to multiple end element based on a single software source.
g. Version control for all network .
h Administrator authorization for the loading of software
11
The EMS GUI should allow authorised personnel to create and activate end-to-end services.
12
The EMS should be able to provision, configure and manage network for DWDM and IP/MPLS
13
EMS should allow service and equipment provisioning.
14
The Management System shall be able to auto-discover the Network elements and the corresponding
connections between them.
131
15
The EMS should support provision of creation, addition, deletion, updation and viewing capability of the
managed network
16
The system should support health monitoring of all modules and indicate health of the system and connectivity.
17
The Management System shall support the provisioning of :All equipment parameters.
Threshold Crossing Alert(TCA)
Alarm Severity
Alarms should be categorised into different categories e.g. Emergency/Critical, Flash/Major, Immediate/Minor,
Priority/Warning, Deferred/Informative depending upon the severity of the alarm.
18
19
EMS should be able to display the Network Elements and the links in different colours depending upon their
status for healthy, degraded and critical alarm conditions.
20
Dashboard should indicate the number of active alarms with filtering options based on the period, duration,
severity, event type and location.
21
The NMS system should support email or SMS feature for informing user
22
All failure and restoration events should be time-stamped.
23
The GUI shall provide the ability to create, delete and modify topology views of the network.
24
EMS should be based on
operations
25
EMS Should support editing that provides the ability to view, edit, and delete all aspects of a device’s
configuration.
26
EMS should support audit logs
27
EMS Should support rapid deployment of DWDM based Optical and IP/MPLS network.
28
EMS Should support APIs for customization and integration.
29
The system should be able to create performance reports and Alarm reports. These reports shall be HTML or
pdf which can be dynamically generated and sent over e-mail.
30
The system should allow creation of group profiles with multiple users as member and should facilitate with
similar access policy and permission.
31
The EMS should support RADIUS/TACACS based access control
open, secure, and scalable software for optimizing network infrastructure and
Other Requirements related to EMS and NMS:
EMS and NMS requirements
The NMS + EMS interface combined must provide accurate accounting of bandwidth consumption delayed by at
most 4 hours, at least on a rolling 4 hour basis.
Consumption accounting data must be accurate to within 5% and must be split into intra-AP (AP grid)
consumption, out of grid - in India consumption and international bandwidth consumption. This data must be made
available by Mac and by static IP address on a defined, authenticated REST API for use by BSS.
EMS should also have the facility to monitor the UPS.
Consumer SLAs that need to be supported by the System
1. Consumers include both households and businesses
2. Ability to enroll, conclude payments, provision and activate the connection including the CPE hardware
with running WiFi within 4 hour of first on-site visit. On-site visit assumes Fiber is already present to
house kerb, corner or floor and person has visited the home/ business.
3. Average end-to-end activation (as defined above) time of 48 hrs from time of confirmed order from
consumer in areas where fiber is already at the kerb, corner or the floor
132
4. Average end-to-end activation time of 96 hours from time of confirmed order from consumer in areas
where fiber has at least reached the nearest street intersection or the building assuming poles exist to pull
fiber on from the relevant intersection to the unit and right of way is clear in the building
5. V2: Pro-active alerts to consumers if the sub-network or port serving them has gone down along with an
expected ETA based on prior data instantly and estimate ETA after analysis within 1 hour of outage.
6. V2: Pro-active alerts to consumers and businesses who subscribe to business quality service when outage is
imminent or under threat based on level of alerts desired by consumer
Note, in the above SLAs, Saturday, Sunday, Government holidays and local holidays are excluded but these should
be clearly listed on the Fiber Grid and ISP website.
Performance SLA: Each consumer bill must also include the in-state latency, jitter and packet loss experienced by
the consumer from their GPON port onwards. Any consumer whose experience does not meet the stated criteria
shall not be billed except for international bandwidth as per actuals. This feature should also be available in the
system.
1.2 GPON EMS:
S.No.
Description
General:
The management system shall be able to auto-discover the network including the network
elements.
The management system shall provide access using remote clients that use HTTP.
1
The functionalities
layers:
of
the
offered
NMS
and
EMS
system
shall
cover
these management
Network Element Management Layer: This shall manage the Network Elements such as their
configuration, alarms or performance.
Network Management Layer: This shall manage end-to-end network connectivity, network level
protection, network level paths and performance and other network level issues.
The NMS must support a northbound interface.
Graphical User Interface:
The offered NMS system shall employ Graphical User Interface that allows users to manage the
network through a multilevel window. (i.e. Network and Sub networks Maps window).
The offered NMS system shall allow the Users to perform, but not restricted to, the following
operations on the Network and Sub network Maps:
2
View the alarm conditions of the OLT‟s, ONTs, MDUs,…
View the performance parameters of an individual link.
Zoom in and out on the Network Map including the ability to define a custom sub- network map.
The graphical user interface shall provide a cascading menu and a graphical display of the shelf layout
that allows users to move from shelf to board to port menus and execute commands for that menu.
The Graphical User Interface shall provide an End-to-end Network view that could span sub networks.
3
Configuration Management:
The offered NMS shall support managing ports (enable / disable).
The offered NMS shall support the ability to perform a remote inventory.
133
Software Management: This shall include the ability to download software loads, activate new software
loads, or get information about the active software load).
The offered NMS shall provide the facility to perform backup & restore of the node configuration via
non-volatile memory on the OLT or via the NMS database.
Fault Management:
Users shall have the ability to define customizable alarms in terms of severity levels and filtering.
Alarms shall be consistent in terms of marking them with appropriate colors.
There shall be mechanisms to provide for fault isolation.
There shall be connectivity and loopback testing capability in all technologies to help isolate faults.
There shall be alarm correlation to prevent a flood of alarms.
Equipment alarms shall be localized up to the board and port level of a specific shelf of a specific node.
4
The alarms shall be audible and/or bring up a pop-up window if appropriate.
The NMS shall allow users to create a Trouble Ticket for any alarms. This trouble ticket should allow
users to enter comments on that alarm.
There shall be a provision to run diagnostics on network elements, cards or links manually.
There shall be scheduler to run diagnostics at certain times and report problems as alarms.
A scheduler shall also be available to collect performance metrics from network elements to the
network management system.
5
Event Logging:
There shall be a mechanism for alarms and logging including all user actions.
The logging shall be customizable for specific types of events or alarms.
6
Performance Management:
The management system shall provide the ability to set thresholds on performance metrics and
generate alarms from these thresholds.
The management system shall provide capacity planning reports that provide long-term traffic analysis
to help in deciding whether to upgrade links or nodes.
Security Management:
Illegal access to the management system shall be prevented; all users shall have a User Id and
Password, which defines their access level with the management system.
The offered NMS system shall allow for Domain creation and partitioning, each domain being a
different access level of part of the network or different function.
7
It shall be possible to assign specific users to a particular domain, so the domain access can be
restricted to the assigned users only.
Users assigned to a specific Domain shall have different levels of authorization (i.e. different
functions and privileges).
Local access via the Local Craft Terminal to any managed Network Element or node shall be controlled
by the network management system.
134
The management system shall be able to detect a Local Craft Terminal connection to any Network
element or node.
In the event of the management system crash, there shall be a way for the local craft terminal to still
have access to the device.
MANAGEMENT FEATURES & FUNCTIONALITIES:
Additions of OLT‟s/MDU's to the NMS shall not require any licenses as long as the maximum
capacity of the proposed NMS is not reached.
The NMS shall not require any licenses for the hosted CPE (ONT).
The Local craft Terminal (LCT) license shall be of un-limited use
Software updates including maintenance versions shall be free of cost for the next two years.
The Network Management proposal shall include all the Hardware and software requirements
including servers, work station, PC, system and third part software licenses and services.
8
It should be possible to download software remotely, with or without NMS. For
upgrade/downgrade purposes, the offered product should have active memory andstandby memory
for ease of upgrade/downgrade.
It should be possible to downgrade a software in the offered system/ Network Element
Bidder shall provide a matrix table showing the compatibility of different NMS versions with different
OLT/MDU software versions and different Hardware versions.
The offered management system shall be equipped with the XML, SNMP and TMF CORBA open and
standard interfaces for easy integration. The bidder shall specify the management procedure and interface for
the local and remote management of the offered system.
All the related telecom industry supported standards shall be quoted to support the above.
1.3 OSS / BSS Specifications
The following requirements outline the OSS and BSS system required for the AP Fiber grid. These requirements are keeping in
mind the advanced design of the AP Fiber grid and requirements of the consumers as well as service providers as envisioned in
the AP Fiber grid project.
These requirements include features required for system SLAs and operational SLAs. The operational SLAs must be
demonstrated with at least one ISP in one mandal each in rural and urban areas, documented along with procedures others can
follow.
Proposed Application Architecture
135
Application Architecture
Network
CRM
Service Assurance
Marketing & Campaign
Management
Order Entry
Customer Management
Order Management
Service Provisioning
Number Inventory (IP
Nos)
Web Self Care
Web Self Care
Trouble Tickets
Incident Management
MRAS
Payments
MIS, Reports &
Analytics Systtem
Payments
Collections
Payment
Gateway
Billing
Billing Data Mediation
Rating and Billing
Invoice Generation
Components of OSS / BSS
Customer Management
1
CRM
Order Management
( Capture, Validation, Submission
Order Orchestration, Fulfilment and Closure)
Integration with MRAS
Trouble Tickets – Case management
Data Mediation
Invoicing
2
Billing
Partner Management
Payments
Payment Gateway
Provisioning
Network Inventory
3
Service Assurance
Activation and Service Management
IP Number Management
4
Web Self Care
Web Self Care
136
Operational Reports, Analytics
5
MIS, Reporting and
Analytics System
Reconciliation, Auditing
6
Contact Centre
Contact Centre Operations
OSS BSS Applications and Software
OSS BSS Software consists of applications with broad functional capabilities proposed to be supplied and
integrated under this project are as given below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CRM(Customer Management, Order Entry, Trouble Tickets)
Billing(Order Management, Rating)
Payment Gateway
Service Assurance
Web Self Care
MIS, Reporting and Analytics System (MRAS)
Contact Centre
All proposed applications modules shall operate from the same Database cluster
Note: All Applications and Modules supplied and integrated must support MULTI-TENANCY i.e the system
must support MSOs, ISPs etc. be TENANTS of the system who would in turn in their own right support their
customers using the system without any user count / asset count restrictions
Description of Application Modules
1.
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is set of features and processes that include best practices
helpful to learn more about customers' needs and behaviours in order to develop stronger relationships with
them. CRM Analysts study stored information related to customers’ habits and behaviours to create
methods that increase prospects for sale, productivity, profit and popularity of services. It involves using
technology to organize, automate and synchronize sales, marketing, customer service and technical
support.
General Requirement
1. CRM solution shall provide a single customer information repository as such must have access to
information in all other proposed applications and modules.
2. CRM system needs to be accessed through call centre and web self-care system.
3. It shall provide capability for multiple user sessions to synchronize subsets of user’s application business
data.
4. It shall support LDAP authentication capability.
5. The solution shall interface seamlessly with the web self-care, Billing, NMS (NMS includes provisioning /
activation), Order management, etc.
6. The system shall have the capabilities to track and present all the necessary information like customer
details, product details, Contract / SLA details etc.
7. The CRM system should provide interface to apply for AP Fiber services through web.
137
8. CRM System should enable acquisition of the customer online by filling the forms electronically by the
customers using appropriate authentication methods.
9. CRM shall maintain flexible parent child hierarchy of customers at multiple levels (configurable) at three
levels (Ex. Unit level, Zonal level, Circle level / Corporate level etc). Accordingly it shall be possible to
present both a consolidated bill as well as breakup bill for various items, which needs to be configured in
CRM. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or non-paying entities.
10. AP Fiber should be able to configure the marketing advertisements to be displayed on the bills. The display
can be depending on the category of the customer. It shall also be configured for a specific customer. These
marketing messages can also appear in the online bill report.
11. The system should have the capability to display the Call Centre Executive (CCE) Screen in NOC Call
centre giving both Customer service-related & Infrastructure-related view with correlation i.e. the system
should able to present the information to the CCE in case there is fault in any network element the system
should be able to present the information for the customers affected due to this element.
12. Integration Capabilities - The system shall provide Integration tools, including adaptors and object
interfaces.
a. Service Assurance (Provisioning, etc)
b. Web Self care
c. Billing system (Order Management)
d. Payment Gateway
e. MRAS (MIS, Reports & Analytics System)
f. Industry standard GIS applications
g. Other systems such as MS applications -Word, Excel, Outlook, Exchange, Scheduler, etc.; SMTP,
POP3; Workforce Management tools etc
13. The system shall allow a single sign-on with transparent logon to the Billing system, meaning that the
agent shall have a consolidated desktop application. There shall be no need to launch the Billing
application from the CRM system
14. The system shall allow access of billing information within the CRM GUI.
15. The system should be capable to handle number of concurrent CRM users for each role including number
of concurrent CRM web-self-care users
16. The system shall support various activities regarding Billing and adjustments through the CRM GUI such
as
a. Display of customer current billing information and services
b. Customer Hierarchy and relevant billing information
c. Manage bill adjustments
d. View bill images – from a Billing archive system
e. View billed charges and usage
f. Request bill reprint/resend
g. Request statements
h. Bill Disputes
i. Post a payment
j. Display of Payment History etc.
Functional Requirement
1. Marketing
The CRM system shall enable the following complete business flow related to sales, marketing and
ordering
1.1 The system shall manage leads, including lead generation, qualification, definition of optimal sale states,
and analysis of sales and marketing performance
138
1.2 The system shall forward sales leads to appropriate business teams or individuals (field or telesales)
1.3 It will track marketing programs and link opportunities with marketing programs so that the ROI of
marketing programs can be measured accurately and future marketing programs planned with these inputs
1.4 System must have features to perform outbound marketing / telemarketers calls assisted by predefined
scripting/screen popup functionality (proactively calling prospects and customers to inform them of
promotions and incentives, including descriptions, timeframes, and pricing
1.5 System must have capability to predefine flow steps to help CSRs up-sell/cross-sell a suite of products. The
results of the survey shall be easily analyzable at a consolidated as well as detailed level.
2. Campaign Management
The Campaign Management applications are responsible for managing the life cycle of marketing
campaigns. CRM users can create the many types of marketing campaigns such as E-mail, Newsletter,
Mail, Web, Radio, Television, Print, and Telesales.
2.1 The Marketing Management application shall provide Campaign Management, Budgeting, Segmentation,
List Management, Promotion Management, deliverable Management, Direct and Indirect Fulfillment and
Multi-Channel Execution features.
2.2 Maintains campaign records
2.3 Capability to create and execute campaigns through various media like Mail, Radio, News Paper, News
Letter, E-mail, SMS etc
2.4 Capability to measure success of campaigns through statistics based on response received
2.5 Capability to maintain history and cost of Campaign
2.6 Other marketing tools involve Marketing Reports, Campaign ROI Analysis etc
2.7 Marketing and Analytics: System should perform marking and analytics requirement
3. Product Management
3.1 Product Catalogue Management
3.2 The Product Catalogue displays a list of all possible products that AP FIBER provides which should
contain:
a. Product types
b. Categories
c. Class of Services
d. Price, Adds / modifies tariff / products
e. Time period based offers
3.3 CRM Administrator defines / update product catalogue, based on the network capability to offer various
services and business viability of those services. Tariffs and offers in product catalog are to be defined by
Billing System
3.4 Following products/services as an example can be maintained as product catalog
3.5 OLT Port: Access-Seekers / Telecom Service provider / Customer will be able to connect to AP Fiber
network by purchasing specific Service Network Interface (SNI) port at OLT.
3.6 ONT Port: Access-Seeker plugs into User-Network Interface port at ONT to receive services
3.7 Bandwidth: Access-Seeker will seek bandwidth between OLT and ONT for end premises at Gram
Panchayat level for service offerings
3.8 Product Life-cycle Management
3.9 The product life cycle management involves all activities from creation of product till its withdrawal from
field.
3.10
Capability to define products
3.11
Capability to define pricing rules
3.12
Ability to relate products
3.13
Ability to define product life period
3.14
Capability to maintain customer-product association
3.15
Capability to view all upgrades done on existing field products
3.16
Capability to view product support expiry date
3.17
Capability to manage upgrade on existing product with all product information
3.18
Capability to notify customers regarding product withdrawal
139
4. Product(s) Selection
4.1 CRM should expose Product catalogue to customer, provide product offers and take product(s) order from
customer. Customer has to choose product/products from this catalogue. CRM product catalogue will
contain all product details, requirements, configurable attributes, tariff details etc.
4.2 It should provide product Offer and credit details (generic/customer specific), tariff details etc. Product
offers can be various types like offers on all products, offers on selected product, region specific offers and
also offers based on customer types.
4.3 When customer has chosen the product(s), information on applicable locality or area for each product will
be captured
5. Product Feasibility Checking
Product feasibility checking should be done at CRM before placing the actual order of customer to assure that
service(s) can actually be provided to the customer
5.1 CRM should decompose the product to corresponding services as per product to service mappings
maintained by CRM.
5.2 It checks availability of resources from Resource Inventory/TAMS module at NMS system.
5.3 As per availability status replied by NMS System, CRM notifies customer regarding product order
feasibility status.
6. Customer Information Management
Customer Information Management should ensure management and synchronization of customer information
and reconcile customer data inconsistencies. It should provide accurate and complete customers’ information.
Functional requirements are:
6.1 Simple and Effective customer acquisition is key for customer satisfaction. The CRM system should
provide interface to apply for AP FIBER services from comfort of the prospective customer’s office. Since
AP Fiber’s prospective customers are expected to be enterprise customers, CRM system should have the
option to accept all digitally signed electronic applications and push to order management system. CRM
System should able to acquire the customer online by filling the forms electronically by the customers,
which may use the digital signature or other authentication methods.
6.2 Create/Modify Access-seeker Details: It should enable access-seekers to provide/update their details like
Customer Name (organization name), Address details (Billing, service address etc.), contact numbers
(FAX, phone), customer types such as Government or private, paying or non-paying etc., billing point
required for Billing System etc.
6.3 Create/Modify Customer Hierarchy: It should be able to associate/dissociate customers in parent child
relationship where parent account can be associated with many child accounts. For example, parent-child
relationships can be defined at unit level, block level, district level, head quarters level, state level, etc. for
AP FIBER customers.
6.4 Generate Customer Report: It should manage and provide all customer reports e.g. subscribed services,
product details, status reports, Billing history, complaint history, payment details, eligible offers and credit
reports etc.
6.5 Customer Life Cycle management: The CRM system should be able to maintain the complete history of the
customer from acquisition to removal. It should maintain the complete details such as type of services
subscribed, associated products / tariff plan, Network element (s) used, number of ports on
OLT/ONT/VLAN port etc.
6.6 Maintain Customer Details: It should maintain scanned copies of Customer Acquisition Forms along with
supporting documents like Identity, Address Proof, Company MOU, Authorized Signatory Letter etc. It
should ensure management of scanned signatures.
7. Customer Document Management
The system should able to capture, manage and deliver all transaction documents and templates from/to
different CRM modules. The functional requirements are:
7.1 Capture all the documents like CAF (Customer Acquisition Form), ID / Address proof, SLA etc.
7.2 Manage all customer transaction documents.
140
7.3 Provide Templates for various functions like order /quote capture, order issue, SLA template, customer
data / detail capture etc.
7.4 Archiving documents
7.5 Deliver documents on request in various format like text, spreadsheets etc
8. Order Management (OM)
Order Management System in AP FIBER Grid BSS suite of application shall manage and orchestrate different
type of order/request related to other systems namely CRM, Billing AP FIBER NMS etc. The OM system shall
enable the complete business flow for order entry / replacement and fulfillment:
8.1 The system shall include an integrated order entry process for various types of products, places of
installation, geographic area and clients, temporary product. CRM should ensure all necessary information
about the Customer Order (for example, type of product, address, payment information, special
requirements, etc.) is available. It will issue correct and complete customer orders (product/service
order/requests) to NMS System for provisioning.
8.2 This functional area must be able to receive service requests from the Order Entry system. This process
behaves as an entry point for service requests into the application and notifies the Order Management
functional area of new or changed service requests. Order Entry shall be able to receive different types of
orders e.g. installation, fault, maintenance etc.
8.3 Complex Product Configuration - the system shall provide a sophisticated product configuration tool with
the rule-based capabilities including applying restrictions by customer type.
8.4 Multi-channel - The Order Entry process shall be prepared to receive order feeds from a number of
different channels, such as Customer Care applications, back-end offices, POS, third party dealers, Internet,
extranet, intranet, IVR- etc.
8.5 The Order Entry process shall be integrated with the CRM, billing, NMS etc.
8.6 Order priority - Ability for the service representative to assign and display a priority level, indicating the
level of care that needs to be given to the order
8.7 Multiple addresses for one order - Ability to capture multiple addresses for an order (e.g., installation
address, billing address etc)
8.8 Billing accounts information - Ability to capture billing account and billing information required to bill the
product or service.
8.9 Order identification - The system shall generate a unique internal order ID. It shall also be able to reference
an internal order ID with several external order IDs.
8.10
Order search criteria - Ability to search and retrieve orders by multiple criteria (e.g., order
reference number, project reference number, name).
8.11
Data access for products and services - Ability to access the Product Catalogue.
8.12
Provide information with order status - Provide CSRs or other entities with information regarding
the order status.
8.13
Order tracking - Ability to track all information within an order at all task levels; Ability to monitor
orders by different types of information, which may be geographical information, order type, resources
allocated, etc.
8.14
View orders/requests rejected by downstream systems - Ability to view order status based on
rejections by downstream systems (e.g. NMS / OLT).
8.15
Managing multiple order amendment - Ability to recycle in batch multiple orders after correction
for a particular rejection; with this functionality, OM is able to correct all the orders for which the same
rejection occurred (e.g., product-related rejections).
8.16
Internal product catalogue – OM shall include an internal Product Catalogue, flexible enough to
define products and services with their hierarchy of associated options, dependencies and particular
features.
8.17
Software must have capability to integrate with external product catalogues – The system must
access information online and in batch mode. Order Management –Workflow & Service Creation /
Fulfillment
8.18
Capability to define business rules to handle and route orders to the appropriate destinations within
/ outside OM, and set the appropriate status for orders when rejections and manual handling are required
8.19
The system must enable quick definition of changes and creation of new states and stages. This
must be done through parameters without any hard-coded information.
8.20
Generation of routing steps - Ability to generate routing steps based on business rules containing
appropriate locations, timing and information requirements for routing.
141
8.21
Work force management - The system ability to route orders to Work Force Management systems Ability to route a service order to a Work Force Management system to plan, schedule and form the most
appropriate team for installation of the customer's request. The Work Force Management system shall
notify OM when the work order is complete. The system should have the capability to manage resource
assignment and scheduling for service requests that requires the intervention of internal or outsourced
resources.
8.22
Interface with provisioning platforms Workflow engine shall have to interface with the
provisioning platforms following the order, thus installing the necessary features and line classes,
modifying them or taking them away. Also, it shall be possible to interface both online and through batch
processes
8.23
Routing of orders to fulfillment - The OM shall send the necessary information for fulfillment to
the order fulfillment component.
8.24
Ability to route to a fault management system - All information on installed services and products
is sent to the fault management system.
8.25
Ability to interface with a commissioning / payment systems - Normally performed once the order
is closed following the installation of the requested product/service.
8.26
Re-routing of orders - Ability to re-route the order or create an alternative workflow based on
information of up- and downstream systems.
8.27
Routing to external vendors - Ability to route orders to external vendors who provide products or
services in an automated manner
8.28
Escalation of orders - Mechanism based on a set of business rules to escalate orders in terms of
workgroups, priority, etc
8.29
Support of order life-cycle in differing transition states - Ability to flag the order to the appropriate
office for manual intervention (e.g., incomplete information).
8.30
The system should have the ability to define the type of fulfillment required for a particular order.
These types of fulfillment shall be determined according to business rules which include all the
functionality associated with service provisioning, inventory management and work force management,
necessary to complete the order.
8.31
The system should have the capability to break down an order into different parts and fulfill the
parts separately at different times. This can be linked to the provisioning timing or to the customer’s
demands.
8.32
Order bulk fulfillment - Ability to specify a single destination for order bulk fulfillment.
8.33
The system should have the capability to automatically recognize that the entire work has been
done and that the order can be closed and moved to order history.
8.34
It should the ability to set time intervals for certain sub-processes and notify the responsible team
of a breach when necessary. Time intervals must not be hard-coded.
8.35
The system should notify customer and CSR if service provisioning problems occur even if
provisioning is temporarily technically impossible or if the requested service is not available.
8.36
The system should able to manage complex provisioning rules such as pre-requisites,
dependencies, sequential or parallel fulfilment tasks etc. that may pertain to a single order line (e.g.
availability check before scheduling a customer site visit for the services) or multiple order lines.
8.37
The OM has the capability to interface with the NMS / provisioning platform when the order
fulfillment implies the provision of a service. It should have the ability to receive a return status from the
NMS / provisioning platform that the provision has been successfully completed.
8.38
The system should have the capability to export order and pricing information to billing and
accounting systems after closing or cancelling an order.
8.39
It should allow amending the Customer's ordered /product(s) list. Customer may require adding /
removing product to/from order list. If a product is not feasible to be provisioned by NMS System then
customer may opt for other product(s), in this case customer may remove that unavailable product from
order list and may add others product(s)
8.40
It should allow cancellation of customer order. Order cancellation request may come from Billing
System / Customer. Penalty for cancellation will be as per pre-configured rules. CRM should inform
customer regarding cancellation penalty (if applicable). In case the Customer is a defaulter (who have
defaulted payment), Billing System notifies CRM to add the customer in Defaulters List.
8.41
It ensures that every order placed, is tracked all the way to closure / cancellation.
8.42
Any SLA violation should be informed by NMS System. CRM tracks the service quality by
analyzing the SLA reports. Accordingly it should inform the customer and notify Billing System.
8.43
Reports – The system should be able to generate various management and analysis reports such as:
142
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Total number of orders
Number of orders per input source, per entity and per user
Number of pending orders, classified according to their reason
Number of orders per order type
Number of completed orders
Number of rejections and type of rejection code per order type
Orders by status type
Content and level of detail - Ability to present different content with different
levels of detail
Export reporting information - Exporting reports to various types of support and
formats
9. Contract (QoS/ SLA) Management
System includes the required functionality to assure that Contract (QoS/SLA) agreements made between AP
FIBER and access-seeker/customers are met. This includes taking appropriate actions when the specified
agreements are not met. The functional requirements of SLA management system are:
9.1 The system shall be able to capture and control different types of Contract / Service Level Agreements
(SLAs).
9.2 Service Level Agreement control types - SLAs apply to service installation, service maintenance and
service repair. Therefore the SLAs must be taken into account in all types of work orders (Installation,
Fault and Maintenance).
9.3 Service Level Agreements at different levels - SLAs may be at the client level, the product/service level or
the contract level. SLA repository - SLA information may reside in OM or in an external system.
9.4 Segmentation of Service Level Agreements - Ability to view, choose from an inventory list, introduce
and/or apply a standard or customized product Service Level Agreement (SLA), based on segments and
customer type.
9.5 Allow multiple service levels to be defined for help desk, change tickets or user-developed applications
9.6 Provide response, resolution service level tracking at customer SLA and/or internal operation SLA level.
9.7 It should have the capability to produce service level agreements specifications to have network
independent parameters like
a. Average call response time
b. Average time to resolve case (trouble ticket)
c. Mean time to provide service etc.
9.8 The system should have the necessary functionality to analyze performance with respect to the established
Service Level Agreement. It translates Contract (QoS/SLA) performance data received into a form suitable
for Contract (QoS/SLA) analysis.
9.9 Customer Contract (QoS/SLA) Violation: It provides the necessary functionality to manage Contract
(QoS/SLA) violations and the activities necessary to resolve the apparent breaches.
9.10
The system should have the capabilities for CRM to produce periodic reports say on
daily/weekly/monthly/ yearly basis. The reports can be as below:
a. Count / number of total complaints (breaches) for each stage at periodic intervals
b. Count / number and percentage of complaints (breaches) that exceeded “n” number of days etc
10. Contract Approval
10.1
Review and approve generic and product specific terms and conditions (contracts rules). Terms and
condition may consist of a number of parameters like Average call response time, Average time to resolve
case (trouble ticket), Mean time to provide service etc.
10.2
Provide digital signature to approve the order placement (if done online).
11. Trouble Tickets (Case Management)
Case Management applications manage the end-to-end life cycle of a case. The system will provide the
necessary functionality to define different types of cases, along with the states for each case type and associated
configurations and work flow. Following types as an example can be configured: General Queries, Service
related complaints, billing related etc.
143
11.1
Cases and Case Management could apply to any area of assurance, Billing, or fulfillment, but
presumably in the customer layer.
11.2
System should be capable to generate unique Complaint Number / Docket Number / Inquiry
Number
11.3
It should be capable to create case specific to various categories.
11.4
Make available all Trouble Management functionality across all products, with full history
permanently retained by the customer record.
11.5
Allow the definition of standard problem codes and the required response time.
11.6
Automatically send complaints to the appropriate person/group that deals with particular issues
according to the standard problem code.
11.7
Automatically generate notifications based on user-defined business rules, for example,
automatically sending an email /SMS to the customer when a trouble ticket is closed.
11.8
Describe the system’s support for Service Level Agreements (SLAs) and escalations. Capability to
escalate case based on configurable level and delay with respect to case categories. Create escalation
actions triggered after a period of inactivity, i.e., a case has not been closed within a certain timeframe.
11.9
Support parent/child correlation between related trouble tickets and tasks e.g. allow the status of
child trouble tickets to be automatically updated when the parent trouble ticket is updated or allow the child
trouble tickets to be automatically closed when the parent trouble ticket is closed.
11.10
Include central problem or knowledge management that allows call centre agents and customers
(over the Web) to search inquiries / advance search. This shall include user-definable queries, search by
key words and phrases.
11.11
Allow several employees to work collaboratively to resolve a customer problem (dividing the
trouble ticket into sub-tickets that can be separately handled).
11.12
Be able to automatically create sub-tickets based on predefined templates.
11.13
Describe the process and time frame for capturing complaints in the system. (The time frame for
inputting complaints into the system must be very short of the tune of say 60 seconds.)
11.14
Capability to attach notes and attachments with case
11.15
Provide Call Centre and outlet staff with a guide to potential resolutions for different types of
complaints, including a troubleshooting guide to provide immediate answers to various complaints. This
may also be based on resolutions other sites have found particularly successful for certain types of
complaints.
11.16
Provide a history of a customer's previous complaints so that CSRs are aware if a certain resolution
has already been tried and have a greater understanding of the customer's individual situation.
11.17
Allow for each team member to see the complaints assigned to them and to record their actions and
the status of the complaint.
11.18
Monitor/track progress of complaint solving and workflow for trouble ticketing such as activities
with time flags and reminders.
11.19
Display all complaints and their resolution status on a single screen (with drilldown for further
information if necessary).
11.20
Automatically alert managers if there are a large number of occurrences of a particular
complaint/fault report across the sites in a user-definable period.
11.21
Alert and print reports for section managers regarding all pending trouble tickets (complaints and
faults) that have been waiting for resolution for a user-definable period (to ensure escalation of problem).
11.22
Track progress of fault report and resolution.
11.23
Link high-value customers to enhanced levels of service, i.e., priority call routing.
11.24
Handle inbound and outbound contact via Telephone, Email, SMS, Fax, Web self-care etc.
11.25
Support automatic screen population via CTI and/or IVR.
11.26
Enable the CSR to hot-key between screens.
11.27
Enable customers to use an SMS service to receive requested details of current balance, credit
limit, etc.
11.28
Shall present all user-specified customer details on an initial customer overview screen
11.29
Enable the CSR to amend customer details within user-defined criteria and authorization level.
11.30
Shall have an alert/flash for the CSR regarding significant customer data, e.g., birthday, etc
11.31
Shall select main topics via menus/tabs on a customer overview screen with the ability to drill
down to more detailed information, such as status of order, status of repair, etc
11.32
Shall show both inbound and outbound contact by any channel in sequence in the customer history
screen available to the CSR
144
11.33
Create, read, and edit information on date of next communication or follow-up, following the
voluntary termination of service.
11.34
Make available the same screens and system function shall be available to CSRs, Sales
representatives, Staff in retail outlets, etc.
11.35
Allow agents to quickly mail, email or fax literature requests to prospects, and track inventory as it
is used.
11.36
The system shall have the ability to support the various CSR related activities e.g. to display the
required information, tariff plans, discounting plans, SLA details, fault / complaint details etc. To serve the
customers
11.37
The system shall enable an administrator to set up a general fault alert message for distribution to
all system users (including Web-based users).
11.38
The system shall be able to manage Field Operations such as Dispatching Field Engineers to
customer sites, track field schedules, log parts used, log time and expenses, and more.
11.39
The system shall be able to provide a solutions database. User shall be able to create a solution
database containing information that other support users and end users can access for potential solutions to
their problems or questions. It shall be possible to propose new solution and to include the same after
approval
11.40
It shall be possible to track duplicate cases. It shall be possible for the user to associate multiple
instances to a single problem and tie the resolution of multiple cases to the resolution of one case.
11.41
The system will check for tickets status and perform escalation and notify the management or next
level of support staff based on predefined Service Level Agreement (SLA) which will include (but not
limited to) criteria like service application, severity and customer
11.42
System shall support bulletin board functionality that allows support technicians and managers to
post and review messages about critical issues
12. Knowledge-base for complaints resolution
12.1
CRM enables to create articles on any subject such as case resolutions and FAQs for CRM users as
well as CRM web self-care portal users. It can embed the contents of a file into an article, or attach the file
to the article. All articles are stored in the CRM. Articles can be of two types: Internal: These articles are
only available to CRM users. External: These articles are available to CRM users as well as CRM web selfcare portal users/Customers.
12.2
The system shall provide facility to generate Standard reports divided according to functional areas
as described in this document.
12.3
The system should have reporting tools like Dashboards, Matrix Reports, Scheduled Reports,
Custom Reports, Pipeline reports etc. at various stages to give customers integrated/unified view of overall
system.
12.4
The system shall also provide a mechanism for making modifications to pre-defined standard
reports as well as facilitate generation of on-demand reports beyond the above pre-defined standard reports.
12.5
Segregation of Real time reports Vs scheduled reports should be made available through the
reporting system.
12.6
It should provide all reports as per the requirements of TRAI, DoT, and any other regulatory /
administrative body.
12.7
To provide a consolidated view of reports it should be integrated with NMS reporting system.
12.8
Error Handling and Management
12.9
System should handle all exception while integrating with NMS. Common error and its exception
handling should be seamless from operations prospective.
12.10
Queue management should be handled in an effective and efficient manner, so that CRM system is
not overloaded.
2.
Billing System
AP FIBER systems, services proposed to be wholesale billing in nature i.e. AP FIBER Grid proposes to provide the
services to the ISPs/TSPs/Enterprise customers/OSPs. It is proposed to support direct billing retail services thus
Usage-based /CDR based retail billing
145
Billing & Accounting Management Systems
Accounting / Journals
Billing
Credit Limit Manager
Collections
Bill Formatting Pricing / Invoice Management
Rebates / Adjustments Management
Billing Account management
Bill enquiry & Dispute Settlements
General Requirement
1. Billing Solution should support billing for multiple services.
2. The system should be capable of configuring different billing cycles which may be weekly / fortnightly/
monthly / bimonthly / quarterly / yearly etc. as per requirement of AP Fiber.
3. It should be able to bill charges in advance or in arrears or mix of both.
4. The Billing system shall interface seamlessly with the web self-care, CRM, Assurance etc. Which shall be
provisioning the components (ports, bandwidth, Fibre etc.) of the AP FIBER network for the service
availed by the customer.
5. The system shall have the capabilities to track and present all the necessary billing information like bill
date, bill period, pay by date, total current bill amount, previous bill amount, amount that has been paid
against previous bill, outstanding amounts against previous bill, type of bill, any type of adjustment (credit
or debit), rebates with corresponding remarks etc.
6. CRM/Billing shall maintain flexible parent child hierarchy at multiple level (configurable) may be at three
level, say Unit level, zonal level, Circle level / corporate office level etc. and accordingly it shall be
possible to present both a consolidated bill as well as breakup bill. It shall be configured in CRM whether
consolidated or breakup bill is required. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or
non-paying entities. (Segregate billing data will be available for all entities, but invoice shall be generated
either for Parent or child node as has been configured in the CRM for that particular customer, while
defining the customer.)
7. AP FIBER Grid should be able to configure the marketing advertisements to be displayed. The display can
be depending on the category of the customer. It shall also be configured for a specific customer. These
marketing messages can also appear in the online bill report.
8. Transfer GL data to Financial system
9. The system should Interface with
a. Payment Gateway
b. CRM
c. Assurance Systems
d. Web self-care
10. Billing Scenarios: AP FIBER systems to maintain inventory and fulfil, assure, bill, payment, accounting
services will be designed to be wholesale / enterprise in nature, and will also support direct retail of
services.
11. Bill generation for the business parties / Enterprise services who have done SLA with AP FIBER for
availing the AP FIBER network. The billing may be based Class of Service (COS), Quality of Services
(QoS), and SLA based. The system should have the capabilities to recognize the SLA based events which
have been generated and make available through NMS Interface to the billing system, calculate the charges
based on SLA configured (SLA is envisaged to be configured in CRM system), and present the bill in the
desire format for the customers.
12. Types of Products & Services
a. Services provided to the CABLE MSO providers
b. Broad Band ISP Services
c. Telco Services
d. Corporate V-LAN services
e. Data Center ( Cloud services)
f. Co-Location (Content Servers, Application Servers, etc.)
g. Tariff shall include leasing partners agreement, but not limited to
i. Unit (monthly, quarterly, yearly).
146
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Fixed charges.
Maintenance charges.
Bandwidth offered. ( as per the Contract with the Fiber Leasing Agency)
Length of Fiber.
SLA based events.
Quality of Service based.
Class of Service based.
Functional Requirement
1. Billing
1.1 Parent-child hierarchy is proposed to be defined in the CRM system along with all the attributes. The
billing solution will need to support a flexible customer hierarchy with definition of child accounts under
the parent account. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or non-paying entities.
Customer Hierarchy will enable flexibility for Service Seekers to segregate billing data. This will further
allow products to be grouped into a number of different billable accounts and in order separate invoices can
be generated for each.
1.2 The solution should also allow a billing account to have one or more products attached to it.
1.3 The Solution should support customer segmentation. Further, the Solution should also support defining
rules based on customer segments. i.e. defining Late payment fees or payment incentives based on
customer segment. The solution should not pose restriction on account belonging to more than one
customer segment.
1.4 The Solution should support changes in customer hierarchy after creation of account. These changes should
include
a. Changing the status of an account (Changing from non-paying bill entity to a paying bill entity and
vice versa).
b. Change of Billing address
c. Change of contact information, payment type and customer category
d. Addition or cancellation of services
1.5 The Solution should provide the flexibility for the Customer Management screens.
1.6 The Solution should support backdating of customer actions like:
a. Backdate Account creation
b. Backdate product/ deal/ discount purchase/ cancellation
c. Backdate account/ service status change.
d. Backdate product or discount purchase, cycle start and end date
2. Tariff and Billing Cycle Creation
2.1 Normally product catalogue is maintained as a part of CRM solution, where creation and deletion of
product and package is being carried out. The billing system should not pose any restriction in adding or
removing products and/or services in packages and define tariff plans for the same.
2.2 Modified SLA / tariff shall be applicable from the next billing cycle or as per billing cycle configured in
the system.
2.3 Tariff creation should have a date of effect of tariff plan. It shall be current/future date and a not any
previous date.
2.4 Tariff creation should have a date range for limited period charges.
2.5 Tariff and products shall take effect as per billing cycle boundary defined for the customer.
2.6 Billing Cycle boundary shall be definable. It may be weekly / fortnightly / monthly / bimonthly / quarterly
/ yearly.
2.7 The solution must include a default rate plan for every Product.
2.8 The system shall have the ability to rate based on customer specific data i.e. customer type within customer
information.
2.9 Solution should allow definition of the different charge types such as arrear, advance and mixed (split,
recurring charges and non-recurring or one-time purchase).
2.10
Solution must be capable to support tiered, geographic based rate plans.
2.11
The Solution should support charging based on the Service level agreements committed to the
customer (Silver, Gold plan etc.). SLA Management Solution will also pass information, or billing events,
to the billing solution for SLA based rebates.
147
2.12
The Solution should support loading of pre-rated events/charges from the external Solutions with
the following add-on options:
a. Percentage increases the passed-in price by a percentage that you enter.
b. Add-on Value increases the passed-in price by a fixed amount that you enter.
c. New Value replaces the passed-in price with an amount you enter.
2.13
The solution should support export and importing of the pricing data as XML files.
2.14
The solution should support customization of product rates and charges at the time of plan
purchase. This could be done for any specific customer. The customization should be in terms of overriding
the existing one-time and recurring fees, providing a fixed-amount or percentage discounts on
onetime/recurring fees, usage rates/charges. The Solution should support customization in the following
ways:
a. Override the price for purchase and cycle events.
b. Provide a fixed-amount or percentage discount that applies to the product as a whole
c. Modify rates or price models in the product by specifying positive or negative changes to resource
balance impacts
2.15
The solution should support charging a cancellation fee in case the product is cancelled before a
minimum configurable period.
2.16
The solution should support rollover of un-used resources from one billing cycle to another.
2.17
The solution should provide functionality for grouping of pricing components.
2.18
Flexible rounding rules in tariffs are required. The method of rounding should be capable of
rounding up or down. The value that triggers the rounding should be definable as well as the digit
that is rounded
2.19
It should be possible to define Pay-by-Date for various Billing cycles and late payment fee method
(slab based, percentage based, fixed amount).
3. Discounts and Adjustments
3.1 Discount and adjustment shall be offered, based on the value defined for SLA threshold violations during
customer creation and applied automatically at the time of bill generation.
3.2 Any fixed discount /adjustment configured during customer registration shall be applied.
3.3 Option for offering discount or adjustment in case the bill amount is more than a certain amount
3.4 Option to offer discounts and adjustment to the customers with pending bills with amount beyond a defined
threshold value shall be available in the system.
3.5 The discount and adjustment functionality should have the flexibility of separate discounts in the parent
child hierarchy defined.
3.6 It should also be possible to change customer discounts and adjustment
3.7 Discount and adjustment based on Customer Type can be offered.
3.8 Promotional Discount: All discounts should have an associated date range to indicate that the discount is
only available for a set period of time.
3.9 Cross product discounting should be available where discount can be applied to one product based on
another product's criteria. The discount should be available in the form of percentage or fixed price.
3.10
The discount model should support definition of formulae for discounting, including basic
mathematical expressions.
3.11
System should be able to do adjustment based on region /tariff change and able to calculate and
apply accordingly.
4. Billing Calculation
4.1 The solution should support multiple billing cycles i.e. Weekly, Monthly, Bimonthly, Quarterly, half yearly
or annually.
4.2 The solution should support billing based on the occurrence of events like,
a. Purchasing a product
b. Changing account status eg. active, de-active
c. Cancelling a product
4.3 The Solution should support generation of separate bills for different services under the same subscriber
account or grouping of bills for different services. There should be an option to have different frequency of
billing cycles for the 2 services and different billing dates for the generation of the 2 bills.
148
4.4 Solution should calculate pro-rata in arrears, pro-rata rebates or adjustment of fees paid and early
termination fees that may apply to a Product at the time of billing
4.5 For the purpose of creation of the trial invoices, the solution should provide an option of trial billing before
the actual bill run. Based on the results of the trial billing, the solution should support making changes
before the final billing is done.
4.6 To load balance, the billing operations, the solution should provide an option of segment wise billing to
support load balancing of the billing operations.
4.7 Based on the business requirements, the solution should provide an option of configuring bill due dates in
the solution. The solution should support defining payment terms for example,
a. 21 days after the billing cycle end date
b. 15 business days after the billing cycle end date
c. 2nd Tuesday of the month .etc
4.8 The solution should provide an option of suppressing bills on request. Suppression of bills should be based
on the different criteria.
4.9 The solution should provide an option of configuring GL codes. The solution should also support export of
GL data to external financial Solutions
4.10
The solution should support both open item accounting and balance forward accounting.
4.11
The solution should support running the billing function for specified accounts.
4.12
Solution should provide capability to define credit limits for each account and separately for each
service within the account.
4.13
The solution should support re-billing and generation of corrective invoices or correction letters for
customers. Further, the Solution should support rebilling for subscribers individually or in a batch.
4.14
Fixed rates offered can vary for different type of customers like different fixed rates could be
defined for government agency and for commercial agency (CRM to take care of customers’ types, while
creating the customer).
4.15
Facility for the customer to view report for bills with various tariff plan to help him in choosing the
appropriate tariff plan
4.16
It shall be possible to define the various TAX types along with the value. The solution should
support configuration of taxes. It should be possible to support taxes based on the tax amount as well as on
the amount calculated after inclusion of taxes.
4.17
Create recurring charges for the invoice in advance.
4.18
Consolidation of charges for an invoice against each customer
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Bill/Invoice Generation
GUI shall be provided for generation of Invoices.
Formatting an invoice
The solution should support sending of invoices to external applications for printing, fax, E mail or FTP.
At the time of account creation, the Solution should provide an option of associating each subscriber bill
with an invoice template.
5.5 The solution should support digital signatures on subscriber invoices.
5.6 It shall be possible to apply any charge which is not applied automatically independent of bill generation.
5.7 Based on the parent child hierarchy defined in CRM, a consolidated bill, as well as per child-wise bill shall
be generated taking into account the level of hierarchies i.e. based on the hierarchy defined for customer
during provisioning by NMS for the customer for offering services in different zones / blocks / districts, it
shall be possible to generate bill.
5.8 Facility shall exist for the inclusion of messages for the subscribers in the bills generated locally (either
common messages, or subscriber wise messages).
5.9 The billing system should have the capability to distribute invoices via e-mail.
5.10
There should be a provision to give discount or apply interest at the time of bill generation.
5.11
Late payment reminder message on the invoice
5.12
Generation of “Revised BILL” shall be available in the system
5.13
Invoice reminders based on generic message framework (i.e. thru mail/SMS)
6. Billing Enquiry and Dispute Resolution
6.1 System must allow to process disputes and settlements which may vary slightly from level to level such as
a. Bill Level
149
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
b. Item Level
c. Event Level
System must support passing adjustments at different levels
a. Individual account level
b. Subscription service level
c. Bill level
d. Item level
e. Event level
System support passing of reason codes at the time of passing adjustments, disputes and settlements
System should support bulk adjustments.
There shall be presentation of consolidated information like QOS report, SLA parameters, invoices etc. for
the ease of verification, in case of any dispute.
7. Bill Formatting
7.1 It shall be possible to define different Invoice formats. The solution should support generation of invoice in
different formats such as PDF, RTF and HTML format etc.
7.2 It shall be possible to choose from system defined format for each customer. The solution should support
customization of invoice and bill numbers. It shall support logo, multiple formats for invoice, dynamic
messages while formatting the bill.
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
Collection Management
The solution must provide a mechanism for identifying Invoices which are overdue for payment.
The solution must provide an aged debt reporting.
Solution must support configurable workflow for collecting overdue receivables such as,
a. User-defined ageing buckets
b. Unlimited collections scenarios
c. Customer profiling to qualify accounts for specific collections scenarios
d. Configurable entry and exit criteria
8.4 Solution should provide defining manual and custom actions for collections management like,
a. Style sheet–based, multilingual dunning letters
b. Late fees and percent-based finance charges
c. Invoice reminders based on a generic message framework
9. Account Receivables
9.1 The solution should support the cash and cheques / DD based payments directly into the systems. Split
payments should be possible i.e. part of the payments may be cash and part of the payment through
cheques / DD.
9.2 Solution should support payment reversals and payments suspension/ disputed payments.
9.3 Solution should support refunds.
9.4 Solution support writing-off of customer bad debt.
9.5 Solution should provide APIs to integrate with 3rd Party Payment Gateways for Credit card / debit card
based payments.
9.6 The solution must provide Product revenue reporting.
9.7 The solution must create financial transactions for GL postings at bill time.
9.8 The solution must create financial transactions for GL postings when a payment is received or adjustment
is made.
10. Integration of Customer Web portal for billing (refer Web self-care Module)
11. Reports
11.1
It shall be possible to generate Histograms, Bar Charts, etc. of different statistical information
stored over a period of time from the earlier billing cycles.
11.2
Report of Defaulters of billing shall be generated by the system.
150
11.3
The solutions should able to generate the reports as per the requirements of TRAI, DOT and any
other government / regulatory bodies.
11.4
Any other reports as per the requirements of the managements / users / Business partners
12. Payments/Accounting Interface (refer Payments Gateway)
12.1
Billing system shall pass all invoice information to the financial system based on standard APIs,
which are to be made available by financial system. All payments shall be recorded by financial system and
to be informed to billing system via standard API.
12.2
User shall be given an interface in billing system to provide adjustments, whenever needed, which
shall be reflected in next billing cycle invoice. The adjustments shall be done.
Payment Gateway
1. A Secure PCI certified payment gateway which guarantees secure processing
2. Hosted Payment pages with 2048 bit encrypted SSL secure Transmission of card data
3. Single interface to deal with for all payment solutions (Internet, POS/EDC ,mobile, IVR)
4. International processing with worldwide network
5. State of the art configurable fraud management
6. Do business worldwide by choosing the local currency globally and settled globally
7. Manage your customers and subscriptions easily with one click upsell
8. Industry specific solutions that makes payment collection very easy
9. Unified payment platform that offers mobile/IVR/Email billing with No technology investment on your
end
10. Unified payment engine which integrates with your billing/invoicing system to track and reconcile your
payment receipts in real time
11. Ability to set automated Receipts for Both Mobile and Internet for your customers
12. Ability to expand to your Kiosk/payment collection network over Internet and Mobile platforms
13. Customized scalable solutions that can work for your business globally to reduce payment collection costs
14. Customized reporting and integration development on a project basis
3.
Service Activation and Assurance
Bidder(s) should refer to AP FIBER Network and NMS tender document for details on the product and NMS
details). AP FIBER NMS manages and monitors the end-to-end AP FIBER network comprising Network Elements
Optical technology and from multiple vendors.
This module must interface with the NMS layer to provide Provisioning.
This module must access Configuration and Performance data.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Web Self Care Module
Web self-care module shall be able to provide a one-stop facility to the corporate customers (enterprise
wide access – corporate self-care) with secure access to their information including but not limited to Bill
viewing, Bill payment, complaint booking & monitoring, purchasing products & services online, updating
personal information, general enquiry etc. using a standard Internet browser.
The main components of the Web Self Care Portal Framework which are available on 365x24 basis
Delivery Channels: Corporate Customers (enterprise wide access – corporate self-care), customers /
dealers, Field Users, Regional Users Citizens and other Agencies. System shall support all types of
customers / dealers including corporate customers.
Presentation Services: Application Services, Marketing Requirements Notification Services, Searching and
Personalization, Online help
Business Support Services: Custom Applications, Electronic Bill presentment and payment, Processing
Services and Reporting / Report Generation
Identity and Integration Services: Account and Service Management Features, Identity Management,
Authentication and Authorization, System Messaging, Trouble Ticketing
151
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
5.
Infrastructure Services: System Maintenance, System Management Integration web self-care module with
the CRM, Billing, ERP Solutions, etc and other third party system (e.g. AP FIBER NMS,GISetc). The
portal framework supports content delivery to a number of different devices.
Web Portal: The web portal would provide information as well as links to delivery services for the main
actors in the system.
Payment Gateway Integration: The solution would support Payment Gateway and also support the
integration with the AP FIBER and all System Users through the web portal.
SMS Gateway Integration: The solution would support SMS based services and also support the integration
with the AP FIBER and all System Users through the web portal.
Email Integration: The solution would support email based services and also support the integration with
the AP FIBER and all System Users
MRAS (MIS, Reports and Analytics System)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
AP FIBER will have multiple applications in their IT environment, applications such as Customer
relationship management (CRM), Billing System, Order management and provisioning application, etc..
The centralized enterprise reporting system shall have visibility and access capability to take data from all
the mentioned applications and will create reports and analytics to be used for various reporting purposes
by AP Fiber.
MRAS should have the capabilities to present reports in a dash-board like environment for the top
management so as to help them make intelligent decisions based on factual data.
MRAS should have capability to use Data Centre (DC) environment by using production/archived data for
report generation. The reporting requirement is primarily two types:
Mandatory Reports (Standard): Needed by AP FIBER Management, TRAI ,CCI ,DOT and other
government agencies.)
Customised Reports: Needed by AP FIBER on Daily, Weekly, Quarterly and Yearly Basis for various
activities
o CRM
o Billing
o Payments
o Service Activation and Assurance
o Trouble Tickets
o Contact Centre Activities
Batch Mode replication of Data
The MRAS should take care of the enterprise wide reporting need for AP FIBER and should have the
components for creating comprehensive reports.
9. SI must have capability to support additional Reporting and Analytics requirements during implementation
and contract period as per AP FIBER business needs.
10. The specifications listed below layout requirements of a platform required for reporting needs of AP Fiber
middle level & top management for this project.
8.
The users shall be able to login and access the reporting platform based on their privileges.
o MRAS must have web based interfaces
o Able to pull and analyze data from multiple data sources in Data Center.
o Ability to drill, slice, dice. The level of drill, etc. shall be finalized in the SRS Phase.
o Ability to create graphs, charts on parameters mentioned in Reports
o Ability to download reports for AP FIBER Management users depending on access privileges
o Must provide online Help and Tutorial feature to get the desired outputs
o MRAS Management of Users, Folders, Servers, Objects, User Groups, Server Groups,
Authorization and Setting
11. Each user shall be able to get scheduled reports on his/her chosen e-mail ID. e.g: Various report type
o Ad Hoc Reports
o Object and Folder level Security
o Multiple Export format support including PDF, MS XL, MS Word, RTF and HTML
o Objective model programmable administrative control mechanism
o Parameterized reporting and sorting
152
o Cross Platform Deployment
12. The report design software shall have following features:
o Multiple report types including Mailing Labels, Cross Tabs, Conditional and other reports
o Local printing and exporting capability
o Formula expert, customs functions and display string formatting
o Unlimited SQL commands
13. Capability error-check queries in the reporting software. Policies in this regard shall be user configurable
by the administrator.
6.
Contact Centre Operations
Standard Contact centre operations to support end user base of 10 lacs and several hundred MSOs, ISPs in the
first year. The call centers shall be established by the MSOs, ISPs etc, but the application should proposed by
the bidder should support the same.
7. Other Requirements
●
●
EMS and NMS must expose a REST API interface to provide both bandwidth consumption history and
provisioning history for both the MAC and IP address.
The NMS, EMS, OSS combined must provide accurate accounting of bandwidth consumption delayed by
at most 4 hours, at least on a rolling 4 hour basis. Consumption accounting data must be accurate to within
5% and must be split into intra-AP (AP grid) consumption, out of grid - in India consumption and
international bandwidth consumption. This data must be made available by Mac and by static IP address on
a defined, authenticated REST API for use by BSS
Consumer, ISP and Cable operator Features and Flows that to be provided in the NMS/ EMS/OSS/BSS
● The Fiber Grid shall support a fixed set of broadband products in V1 and allow ISPs to define their own
products in V2. The V2 product should allow for any valid combination of the following variables:
○ Periodicity (monthly, weekly, ..., one-time)
○ Start/ Stop Times
○ [Bandwidth (Mbps), Usage (GB), QoS; excess usage Bandwidth + QoS] tuples, upto 3 tuples
with design room for more
● In V1, the consumer products must at least include (more may be added in consultation with ISPs and
Cable operators):
○ 10/5 Mbps, 25 GB, 5 GB international plan including basic cable
○ 10/10 Mbps, 35 GB, 10 GB international, high QoS business plan including basic cable
○ Both of the above without basic cable
○ 100/50 Mbps, 50 GB, 10 GB international plan
○ 100/100 Mbps, 100 GB, 20 GB international plan
○ All of the above have option of consumer switching to low bandwidth after consumption is done or
to pay for consumption bandwidth including international per GB at published rates
○ 1/ 0.5 Gbps, 1000 GB, international as consumed
● Consumer operations: Express interest capture, Enroll, activate product, change product, payment (to
ISP or State to be decided)
● Prepaid including monthly pre-paid must be supported in V1, post-paid must be supported in V2
● ISP operations: Enroll, ISP parameters like area, payment (to State or reverse), add product V2,
deprecate product V2; including structured metadata for ISP verification, start date, end date, target
connections promised
● Web interfaces, reports, alerts the consumer, the ISP, the state will need to operationalize the
requirements including SLAs and ensure quality service, assist in financial integrity
● Ability to generate unified billing spanning cable + ISP + telephone using cable and phone bill
summaries delivered to BSS via batch imports using authenticated interfaces by authorized ISP
personnel or alternately sent over secure authenticated API interfaces, which is must have in V2
153
●
●
●
●
Manual enablement and data entry, bill computation and reporting of Telecom circuits for 2G, 3G, 4G
Provide phone lines over IP, v1 single provider, v2 multiple. In v1 its safe to accept provider billing but
have all the logs in structured, quality checked data and quarterly run reports to verify accuracy of
reporting and billing within 6% in V1 and 3% in V2
Trouble, non-activation and outage reporting APIs along with resolution APIs and interfaces
Follow system and database design principles like 3 normal form, simplicity of consumer experience,
consumer delight, simplicity of operations
Additional Technical Requirements
All interfaces must be specified and available as REST APIs following the Open API protocols.
All user features, service staff interfaces including complete enrolment, provisioning, trouble ticket management +
acceptance must be available on mobile via Android Apps. All service provider, ISP, OSS/ BSS management
interfaces must have a single sign on using Aadhar.
Contractor must specify for all major consumer facing data and reports such as uptime, provisioning, usage, 90-9599% bandwidth, billing amount, latency (across node), jitter (across node), specify: coverage, accuracy, timeliness
SLA as well as bug fix SLAs at the time of the specification signoff.
All changes to a consumer network or provisioning shall generate an alert informing them of the change with a link
to a full report.
Additional Features required in OSS
● Provision, disconnect consumer, telecom based on BSS API command, provisioning includes modifying
BRAS tables as well as instructing the OLT
● Sanity and integrity runs to find gaps between BSS provisioning records, OSS state and when possible and
legitimate modify OSS provisioning as per BSS
● Compute non-international usage from BRAS as well as mining OLT/ Switch dumps and update at least
every 4 hours assuming the necessary nodes are fully up
● Configure all intra state broadband traffic to go direct between the relevant ports to the extent possible,
most do for 90% of intra-state usage by V2
● Compute international bandwidth aggregating across BRAS routers
Testing and acceptance criteria relating to NMS/EMS/OSS/BSS
These features and requirements must be sufficiently detailed by the contractor in the forms of requirement
specification in consultation with the authority and tabled within 4 weeks of project award, to be signed off within
6 weeks of project award. A user interface review shall be conducted within 12 weeks.
The contractor shall within 8 weeks of detailed requirement sign off, define use cases, test descriptions for major
use case along with test data suites as time series via API calls if needed.
All test results and reports must be submitted in an agreed on format via a REST API for every release starting with
the first release. All regressions or lowering in performance must be explained in notes and significant degradation
in any of these must be sent in the progress reports along with explanations.
154
1.4 Video Wall for NMS
Video wall size: 3meters (width) X1.1meters (height)
Specification for Professional LCD Display for Video wall 3 x 2 (Diagonal Size of the display should be 55”
and it should be a LED backlit Model)
S. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
The Display should have aspect ratio of 16:9.
The Display should support true resolution of 1920X1080 pixels.
The Display should have minimum (Native) contrast ratio of 1600:1.
The Display should have minimum life span of 50,000 Hrs.
The Display should have 450cd/m2 Brightness
The Gap between 2 Display should be less than 5.5 mm
The display should have following input terminals.
a) RGB Input –Mini D-Sub 15 PIN x 1 (Optional)
b) DVI-D In – 24+1 PIN (optional)
c) RS-232C - D-Sub 9 PIN X 1 (Optional)
d) HDMI In – 1 (Mandatory)
e) AV Port (Optional)
The Display should have DVI-D loop in Loop Out facility
The Display should support various types of mounting accessories like:
a) Wall Mount Bracket
Video controller
16
The Controller should have 6 Output( 1920 X 1080), 4 Physical Input and dual LAN
17
The Controller should have a Xeon processer , 6GBRAM and 500GB storage.
18
The controller should be supplied with Wall Management software to control the video wall for
showing any Input in the wall.
19
The controller should have a feature to split the wall into multi window.
20
21
The controller should be 24 X 7 operational with proper cooling system
The Media Player should have Gigabit Network Card.
2.1 -Core IP MPLS Routers 100 G
S.No.
Parameter
Minimum Requirement Specifications
Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route
Processor, Power supply, Switching fabric
Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or
1+N power supply redundancy
Should have two free full width payload slots for future expansion.
All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput
1
Architecture
The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces
The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR, LR& ZR are software configurable for
LANPHY/WANPHY mode.
The operating system of the router shall have a microkernel-based architecture.
The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol,
forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules.
Failure of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS. In service bug patching
should be available
155
The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support
such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and sync
E
Router should support two free slots for future expansion
Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals,
bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories
Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps
The router should have capability of minimum 4 million IPv4 routes and 2 Million IPv6
routes
The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and 8GB Flash , also should support 30GB
storage in SSD
the router should support minimum 2 million MAC address, minimum 128k Pseudowires.
Router should have 128k multicast routes.
The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP
2
Performance
Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online
insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing
through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic.
In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast
routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the
router shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic
running on rest of the line cards in the system
if the any of the feature and functionality asked in the RFP is achieved using any service
module that should be quoted in 1+1 redundancy
3
Protocol Support
Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate
System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot
Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6
Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation)
Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIMSSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6 and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS
Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier
Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServAware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), VPLS,VPWS,Ethernet
over MPLS, CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC 4553
Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link
OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731.
The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces
The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and
Multicast traffic.
The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4.
Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration
Shall support the following:
Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces,
source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP
Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through
Application Recognition techniques.
4
QoS Features:
Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time
application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management:
WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing
Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control.
Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge.
Minimum 128k egress and 128k ingress hardware queues per line card.
Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of
scheduling for HQOS.
156
Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet,
Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range
etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS
5
Security
The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for
all interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration.
Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping
, control plane policing ,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2
Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for
remote management.
Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available.
The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of
events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available.
Video Monitoring: The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the
video traffic transiting through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on
both IP and MPLS enabled interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such
as delay, jitter, MPEG MDI (RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and
compressed video formats (MPEG).
6
Management
7
Interfaces
The proposed router should have the following interfaces 110 X 10 Gig interfaces with SR
SFP+
8
Certifications
The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body
2.2 - Core Switch
S. No.
Criteria
Description
There should not be any single point of failure in the switch. All the main components like CPU
module, switching fabric, support module, system clock, power supplies and fans etc should be
in redundant configuration. Components, like modules/power supplies/fan tray should be Hot
Swappable
The switch should have redundant CPU's working in an active-active or active-standby
mode.There should not be any traffic disruption during the CPU fail-over/change-over and the
fail-over time should be less than 1 sec.
1
Availability and
Redundancy
Must Have Redundancy for Power Supply, FANs and clocks to minimise unavailability of
switch. Online insertion and removal (OIR) support is must for modules, Power supply and
FAN.
Stateful Switchover to ensure that in case of failure of active CPU module the redundant CPU
should start switching L2/L3 traffic in less than 1 sec (in case switch has redundant CPU).
The switch must support Hitless software upgrades (ISSU) to reduce downtime during software
upgrade or downgrade.
The switch must support Fault isolation per process and process patching to enhance the switch
availability
2
Generic
The proposed switch should have enough Memory (Flash and RAM) to hold the latest Software
Release. It should support all features of switch and parameters like MAC Address Table, IP
Routing Tables, VLANs etc.at their peak values as claimed in the Data Sheets of the Switch.
157
The Switch should have a Truly Distributed Architecture. All Interface Modules should have all
the resources for switching and Routing and should offer True Local Switching (Intra-Module
and Inter-Module).
Version of software for supplied switch should be latest release with necessary licenses to
support all required features
IEEE 802.1D Bridging and Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1p QoS/CoS
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation with LACP
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ba 40 Gigabit Ethernet
RFC 2460 IPv6
RFC 2461 Neighbor Discovery for IPv6
RFC 2462 IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
RFC 2463 ICMPv6
Should support Ingress/Egress Queuing.
Should support QoS scheduling with queues supported in hardware
Should support upto 4 queues per port
Should support ACL based traffic classification
Should Support IGMP v1, v2 , v3, IGMP Snooping
Switch should support 8K IGMP Group and scalable to 32K Group with/without Multi chassis
ether channel (MCEC) deployment.
Should support Industry Standard Port/Link Aggregation for All Ports. Also Cross Module Link
aggregation should be supported
Jumbo Frames support up to 9K Bytes on Gigabit / 10 G Ports
3
Layer 2
features
Support for broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm control to prevent degradation of
switch performance from faulty end stations
Should support port, subnet based 802.1Q VLANs. The switch should support 4096 vlans. The
switch must support Private VLAN or equivalent.
The switch should support 160,000 no. of MAC addresses, 32 Nos. of link per Link Aggregation
Group and must support more than 128 nos. of Link Aggregation Group per switch.
Switch must support spine - leaf topology based on VXLAN and create large layer 2 domain to
optimise east - west traffic within the data center to achieve the following - a) Participation of
Hypervisor switches in spine-leaf architecture as virtual leaves
b) support a minimum of
16,000 segment ID to support secure multi-tanace at the time of the bid submission
Switch must support multi chassis link aggregation feature and work with any downstream
switch, server from various vendors.
158
Switch must support IEEE 802.1BR (Bridge Port Extension) or equivalent technology which in
turn enable remote line card functionality to optimize cabling inside the data center.
The switch must support a minimum of 24 remote line card and scale upto 32 remote line cards
in future.
Should support routing protocol IP v4 - Static routing, OSPF v2, EIGRP, BGPv4, IS-IS and IP
v6 - BGP, OSPF v3. The switch must support Bidirectional Forwarding detection on OSPF and
BGP.
Switch must support IP v4 - HSRP and VRRP and IP v6 - HSRP v6 and VRRP v6. It must also
support DHCP Relay V4 and V6.
Switch should support VRF - Lite and VRF Route leaking functionality. The switch should
support upto 1000 VRF instances.
Should support minimum 64K Route entries for IPv4 and IPv6 routes. The switch must support
64 way ECMP.
4
Layer 3
features
Switch must support virtualization features like VXLAN Gateway/Bridging and routing
functionality to support Vmware hypervisor connectivity and also to normalize it for Vmware
VM to bare metal server / Vmware VM to other hypervisor VM communication.
Switch must support NVGRE protocol to support Microsoft hypervisor connectivity and also
normalize it for Microsoft hypervisor VM to bare motel server / Microsoft hypervisor VM to
Vmware Hypervisor VM communication.
Should support H/W based IPv4 and IPv6 Multicasting
Should support Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode and PIM - ASM for IPv4 and
MSDP for IP v6. It should also support Any cast Routing Protocol (Any cast RP).
Switch should support 8K Multicast route and scalable to 32K Route with/without Multi chassis
ether channel (MCEC) deployment.
Switch should be manageable through NMS on per port/switch basis with common interface for
all manageable devices on the network. Should Support SNMP, RMON/RMON-II, SSH, telnet,
web management through network management software.
Should support port mirroring feature for monitoring network traffic of a particular
port/VLAN/group of ports/entire switch. The switch should support 16 SPAN Session and scale
upto 32 SPAN session.
5
Management
and Operation
Switch should support Syslog, Power on Auto Provisioning, XML (NetConf), SSHv2, Telnet,
OOB Management port, Console Port.
should support Linux tools, Bash and Power Shell, Phython Shell and XMPP Client
The switch should support configuration verification and roll-back.
The switch should support SNMP v1,v2c and V3
Chassis based Multilayer Switch with sufficient modules/line cards to fit required
transceivers/UTP ports. Chassis shall have minimum 4 payload slots and Maximum 7 RU
Height. The switch must have front to back airflow.
6
Performance &
Scalability
The total aggregate switching capacity shall be 3 Tbps or more
The Switch should support non-blocking Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing.
The Backplane should be 100% Passive. Preferably back plane free design to optimize the
airflow and power consumption.
159
The switch must support minimum of 192 line rate non blocking ports of 1/10G SFP+ or 1/10G T on a single chassis.
The switch must support a minimum of 140 nos of 40 G QSFP ports in same chassis
The switch must support 100 Gig line cards at the time of bid submission.
8 ports 40 Gig QSFP, 48 ports 1/10G Fiber module with transceivers (shortrange) and 48 ports
1/10 G - T module.
Should support Standard and Extended ACLs
Should support various type of ACLs like MAC Based, Port based, Vlan Based and routed
ACLs.
Should support integrated security features like DHCP snooping with option-82, Dynamic Arp
Inspection, IP Source guard and uRPF (unicast Reverse path forwarding)
Should Support MAC Address Filtering based on source and destination address
7
Security
Should support AAA, with CHAP, PAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2. It must support LDAP,
RADIUS and TACACS+ protocol as well.
The switch must support Role Based access control (RBAC) for L1, L2 and L3/Administrators.
The switch should support control plane policing to filter the unwanted traffic to fill up the CPU
queues. The switch should support user configurable Control Plane Policing (CoPP)
The switch should support upto 16K ingress ACLs and upto 54K egress ACLs. It should support
Security and QOS ACL's.
Redundant poer supplies operating at 210-240v AC
Operating temperature -40 to 65 Centigrade
The proposed Switch should be populated with following interfaces:
8
Power
8
Interfaces
a. 144 x 10 G interfaces with appropriate SFP+ loaded
2.3 Firewall
S.No.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Technical Specifications required
Firewall
The FW should integrate with multiple full-featured, high-performance security services, including
application-aware firewall, SSL (Only Support is required, SSL is not required from day 1) and IPsec
VPN, IPS with Global Correlation.
The FWshould have innovative extensible multiprocessor design and software architecture that enables
to easily install additional high-performance security services
The FW should support a comprehensive command line interface (CLI), verbose syslog, and Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Should have a throughput of minimum 40gbps firewall throughput, 13Gbps of Application Inspection
and 4 gbps of VON throughput
1.5
Minimum concurrent sessions 9,500,000
1.6
New connections per second 325,000, 1000 Vlans and 100 Virtual firewalls
1.7
Interfaces 6-port 10/100/1000, 4-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet SR
1.8
Should support Active/Active and Active/Standby Failover
1.9
Firewall and VPN Active/Standby failover services should be supported without any additional licenses
160
1.10
Should have redundant power supply
1.11
Should have 2 USB 2.0 ports
1.12
The device should have a dedicated console port
1.13
Should support integrated Ipsec and Client and Clientless SSL VPN
1.14
Should support at least 5,000 vpn
1.15
Should support Etherchannel/Port aggregation with Each channel group supporting upto eight active
interfaces. Should support upto 16 interfaces in a channel group.
1.16
Should support Botnet Filter
1.17
Should support checking of incoming and outgoing connections against a dynamic database of known
bad domain names and IP addresses, and then logs any suspicious activity.
1.18
Should support Routed and Transparent mode
1.19
Firewall should support Web based (HTTP and HTTPS) configuration, and management
1.20
Firewall should support Command Line Interface using console, Telnet and SSH
1.21
Should be managed using a centralized management system
1.22
Should support Syslog server logging
1.23
Should support stateful inspection capabilities enable deep packet inspection for services that embed IP
addressing information in the user data packet or that open secondary channels on dynamically assigned
ports
1.24
Should support full-featured stateful inspection firewall with enhanced application inspection
capabilities. Basic application inspection support for all major protocols. Enhanced inspection for HTTP,
FTP, Instant Messenger, File Sharing, SIP, H.323, SCCP, SMTP, ESMPT, DNS, RPC, CIFS, MSRPC,
and NETBIOS. With the enhanced application inspection features, it should be possible to exercise a
great deal of control over the behavior of network communications using those protocols. For example,
with SIP inspection, you can utilize regular expressions (REGEX) to deny SIP-based VOIP
communications with certain addresses or countries.
1.25
The FW should support Modular Policy Framework which provides a powerful, highly flexible
framework for defining flow- or class-based policies, enabling administrators to identify a network flow
or class based on different conditions, and then apply a set of customizable services to each flow or class
1.26
The FW should deliver per-flow, policy-based QoS services, with support for LLQ and Traffic Policing
for prioritizing latency-sensitive network traffic and limiting bandwidth usage of administrator-specified
applications
1.27
The FW should support site-to-site vpn as well as Remote access vpn on the same appliance
1.28
Should support inspection of IPv6 traffic based on the extension header
1.29
IPv6-enabled inspection services for applications based on HTTP, FTP, SMTP, ICMP, TCP, and UDP.
In addition, SSHv2, Telnet, HTTP and HTTPS, and ICMP-based management over IPv6
1.30
support for network monitoring using SNMP Versions 1, 2c, and 3, and supports the use of all three
versions simultaneously.
1.31
Should support notification through email
1.32
Firewall should support Stateful Failover of Firewall and VPN Sessions
1.33
1.34
1.35
The firewall must have support for virtual firewalls and include atleast 2 virtual firewalls without any
additional license costs
Should be able to protect “ARP spoofing” attacks at layer 2 by ARP inspection to prevent malicious
users from impersonating other hosts
The firewall should be RFC 1918 compatible with support for Static & Dynamic Network Address
Translation and also Port Address Translation
1.36
There must be support for bi-directional NAT
1.37
The firewall should have support for cut-through proxy and user authentication
1.38
Should support creation of policies based on user identity.
161
1.39
2
The appliance should get user information from an external agent so that there is no compromise in
performance
VPN Features
2.1
The device should support IPSEC/IKEv2 for remote VPN access
2.2
The security appliance supports the following encryption standards for ESP: DES, 3DES, AES-128,
AES-192, AES-256
2.3
The security appliance supports the following hashing algorithms: MD5, SHA
2.4
Supports the use of SHA-2 compliant signature algorithms to authenticate SSL VPN connections that use
digital certificates. Support for SHA-2 includes all three hash sizes: SHA-256, SHA-384, and SHA-512
2.5
It should support IPSec VPN solution that is compliant with the following RFC: RFC 2408 - Internet
Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP) RFC 2409 - The Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) RFC 2412 - The OAKLEY Key Determination Protocol. Minimum 100 licences shall be provided
2.6
Should support Perfect forward secrecy using Diffie-Hellman (DH) groups 1,2,5 and 7
2.7
The Device should preserve the TOS bits as per RFC 2401. TOS bits in the original IP header should be
copied to the IP header of the encrypted packet so that QoS policies can be enforced after encryption
2.8
Should support Endpoint Assessment that examines the remote computer for a large collection of
antivirus and antispyware applications, associated definitions updates, and firewalls
2.9
On Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux desktops, Advanced Endpoint Assessment should be able to initiate
remediation of various aspects of antivirus, antispyware and personal firewall protection if that software
allows a separate application to initiate remediation
2.10
For Windows Mobile Devices, should have capability to write Lua expressions in Dynamic Access
Policies (DAPs) to perform posture checks on those attributes unique to mobile devices
2.11
Should support VPN from variety of endpoints like desktops, tablets and smartphones on the same
appliance
2.12
Should support Start Before Login (SBL) feature which allows a VPN connection to be established prior
to machine login. This functionality allows for native Windows functionality such as AD group policies,
drive mapping and login scripts to be provided for VPN users
2.13
Should support split tunnelling
2.14
The SSL VPN client should auto detect whether it can use DTLS or TLS
2.15
2.16
2.17
3
Should support Smart tunneling which allows Microsoft Windows users access to TCP applications
without the prerequisite of administrative rights and allows VPN administrators to grant only approved
applications access to internal resources
The secure appliance should support advanced transformation capability that helps ensure compatibility
with Web pages containing complex content, including HTML, Java, ActiveX, JavaScript, and Flash. In
addition, should provide filtering of ActiveX and Java applets to prevent downloads of malware
The device should detect KeyLogger applications and prevent user access
IPS Features
3.1
Inspect encapsulated traffic include:
3.2
• GRE
3.3
• MPLS
3.4
• 802.1q,
3.5
• IPv4 in IPv4
3.6
• IPv4 in IPv6
3.7
• Q-in-Q double VLAN
3.8
Concurrent Threat Mitigation Throughput (Mbps) (Firewall + IPS Services) should be 2gbps
3.9
IPS can be deployed inline in the traffic path or in promiscuous mode
162
3.10
3.11
3.12
Identify the source of denial of service (DoS), distributed denial of service (DDoS), SYN flood, and
encrypted attacks
Use patented anti-evasion technology to defend and monitor against worms, viruses, Trojans,
reconnaissance, spyware, botnets, phishing, peer to peer, malware as well as numerous evasions
techniques.
Should be able to correctly track TCP sessions in complex network configurations
3.1 BRAS Router
S.No
Parameter
Minimum Requirement Specifications for the BRAS
Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route
Processor, Power supply Switching fabric
Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or
1+N power supply redundancy
Should have two free payload slots for future expansion.
All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput
The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces.; POS
1
Architecture
The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR,LR& ZR are software configurable for
LANPHY/WANPHY mode.
The operating system of the router shall have a CPU based architecture.
The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol,
forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules. Failure
of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS.In service bug patching should
be available
The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support
such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and sync
E
Router should support two free slots for future expansion
Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals,
bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories
Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps
The router should have capability of minimum 3.8 million IPv4 routes and 1.8 Million IPv6
routes
The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and GB Flash , also should support 30GB
storage in SSD
the router should support minimum 1.8 million MAC address, minimum 125k Pseudowires.
Router should have 125k multicast routes.
The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP
2
Performance
Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online
insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing
through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic.
In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast
routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the router
shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic running on
rest of the line cards in the system
if the any of the feature and functionality asked in the RFP is achieved using any service
module that should be quoted in 1+1 redundancy
The proposed BRAS should support 64K PPPoE sessions on a single line card
The proposed BRAS should support 8 priority queues for al the 64k subscribers
3
BRAS Features
The proposed BRRAS, HQoS deployment per subscribers should not reduce the support of
the number of subscriber sessions per card
163
The proposed BRAS should support seamless failover of sessions during the failover /
switchover of the Route processor
The proposed BRAS should support Geo Redundancy in warm mode, ensuring the failover
of a single node should not impact the user sessions and user session would be seamlessly
supported by the redundant available system
The proposed BRAS should support 128k subscriber per line card
The proposed BRAS should be able to protect IPv4 and IPv6 subscribers sessions from
CoPP
The equipment should be able to support 1K ISPs.
The equipment should be able to support DHCP option 60 and option 82.
The system should be able to support 4k leased lines.
Accounting: RADIUS, TACACS
The system should support multi-service features like
BoD (Bandwidth on Demand)
Video on Demand
PTA services. Terminating subscriber session directly in a L3VPN
Support for Captive Portal and dynamic service selection and url redirection
Wholesale service based on VPDN, GRE and PBR.
The offered product should have MEF –9 and MEF 14 certification.
Volume based billing – Real time accounting required so that user can be charged on real
time basis
Customer portal required so that user can check his usage online as and when required
4
Protocol
Support
Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate
System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), BGP
for IPv4 and
Ipv6,MPBGP,Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual
Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6 Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent
Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols
IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIM-SSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6
and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS
VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel
Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServ-Aware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP), VPLS ,VPWS,Ethernet over MPLS , CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC
4553
Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link
OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731.
The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces
The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and
Multicast traffic.
The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4.
Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration
Shall support the following:
5
QoS Features
Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces,
source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP
Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through
Application Recognition techniques.
Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time
application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management:
WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing
Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control.
Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge.
Minimum 126k egress and 126k ingress hardware queues per line card.
Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of
scheduling for HQOS.
164
6
Security
Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet,
Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range
etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS
The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for all
interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration.
Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping
, control plane policing ,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2
Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for
remote management.
Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available.
The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of
events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available.
7
Management
Video Monitoring -The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the
video traffic transiting through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on both
IP and MPLS enabled interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such as
delay, jitter, MPEG MDI (RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and compressed
video formats (MPEG).
8
Interfaces
The proposed router should support 24 x 10G interfaces with SR optics
9
Certifications
The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body
3.2 Server Pool:
The required Operating System Redhat Linux / Windows with relevant data base licenses shall be
provisioned while integrating the solution. The spam control solution shall also be the part of the
Integration. All the licenses to be provided shall be perpetual.
3.2.a Blade Chassis – 2 Nos.
S.No.
Description
1
Blade chassis shall be 19" Electronic Industries Alliance Standard Width rack mountable and provide
appropriate rack mount kit.
2
The proposed blade chassis should support 8 half width blades in fully populated mode
3
The power supply modules should be hot pluggable
4
Power supply should meet the Energy 80 Plus certification
5
The power subsystem should support all of the following modes of power redundancy (No redundancy, N+1 ,
N+N or grid )
6
The power subsystem should be support N + N power redundancy for a fully populated chassis with the 2
socket (CPU) servers
7
Should be configured to provide full redundant cooling to all blade slots
8
The chassis shall be able to support redundant switch modules for fabric connectivity
9
The uplink connectivity from the chassis should be able to support up to 160 Gb bandwidth or up to 20 Gb
per server blade
10
The uplink from the chassis should support FCoE ( Fiber Channel over Ethernet ) technology
11
Should also support a 1 Gb & 10 Gb uplink from the switch which is connected to the blade chassis
165
12
The fabric connectivity from the chassis should support 1:1 subscription ratio in an active configuration
13
The chassis should support redundant management modules
14
It should support remote KVM capability from an external keyboard, video monitor and mouse to all blades
installed in the chassis through the management controllers .
15
Simultaneous KVM access to a single blade KVM by multiple users but the admin user can take Read Write
ownership while the other user is in Read Only mode
16
Should be able to support the feature of virtual DVD and virtual floppy to individual servers from remote
systems
Network:
17
The fabric switches should support Private VLANs
18
The fabric switches should support up to 1024 VLANs
19
Supports up to 2000 VIF ( Virtual Interfaces )
20
It should support the direct connection to FCoE enabled storage arrays
21
It should support the direct connection to FC storage arrays
22
It should support the direct connection to NAS based devices
23
Should include support for FC Port Trunking
24
Supports local SPAN
25
Supports the management of the rack servers within the same control plane as the Blade servers
26
Supports up to 12 Uplink port channels per fabric switch
27
Supports up to 8 member interfaces per port channel
28
Supports up to 4 SAN port channels
29
Supports up to 8 member interfaces per FC port channel
3.2.b Blade Servers (Generation 9) – 8 Nos.
S.No.
Description
1
Processor
2 * Intel® Xeon® E5-2667v3 3.2GHz 135W 8-core CPU with 20MB cache
memory
2
Chipset
Intel Series Chipset
3
Motherboard
OEM Motherboard
4
Storage
The server should support SAS, SATA and SSD hard disk drives
Must have an internal slot for SD card / Flash which supports booting
hypervisors
should have 2x300GB 12G SAS 15K rpm SFF drives
166
Scalable to two hot plug small form factor (SFF) Smart Drives
The Blade should have support for Boot from SAN
5
Storage Controller
Integrated hardware RAID Controller to support RAID 0,1 with 1GB FBWC
(Flash back write cache)
6
Memory
Configured with 16 GB DDR4 2133 MHz RAM
Should have 16 DIMM Slots per blade and expandable to 1TB DDR4 2133
MHz Memory (using 64GB)
Advanced ECC Memory protection
7
Network
The Blade server should support Converged Network Adapter, which
aggregates both the Ethernet and FC connectivity on a single controller
It should support up to 40 Gb connectivity per server with a minimum of 2
ports, which is expandable to 80 Gb connectivity per server
It should support two adapters per server
Should include support for virtualized adapter with up to80 Gb connectivity and
which can be partitioned into more than 32 NICs or HBAs, in both virtualized
or non virtualized environments
In a virtualized environment , the virtualized adapter should support both
configuration options of passing through the hypervisor layer & or by passing
the hypervisor
Shouldbe able to support VMDirect I/O with Vmotion on VMware vSphere5
Adapter and QoS policies can be set and defined for each of the vNICs or
vHBAs created in the virtualized adapter
8
Expansion Slots
Two (2) I/O expansion mezzanine slots (x16 PCI 3.0)
9
Interfaces
One (1) internal Micro Secure Digital High Capacity (Micro SDHC) card slot
One (1) internal USB 3.0 connector for USB flash media drive keys
10
Graphics
Integrated Graphics Controller
11
Management
It should support remote KVM capability from an external keyboard, video
monitor and mouse to all blades installed in the chassis through the management
controllers
Remote KVM should support up to 4 active sessions
12
Others
The Blade should be hot pluggable
13
Form Factor
Half height server blade form factor
14
Industry standard
compliance
ACPI 2.0
Microsoft® Logo certifications
USB 3.0 Support
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES)
SNMP
PCIe 3.0
Energy Star
167
15
Operating System and
Virtualization Software
support
16
Security
Microsoft Windows Server
Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES)
Oracle Solaris
VMware
-on password
o SSL encryption
o Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and Triple Data Encryption Standard
(3DES) on
browser, CLP and XML scripting interface
o AES and RC4 encryption of video
-New Instructions (AES-NI)
17
Environmental
Operating Temperature support from 50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C) and Non
operating Temperature from -22 to 140°F (-30 to 60°C)
Operating Humidity from 10% to 90% non-condensing and Non-operating
Humidity from 5% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Altitude from 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3000m) and Non operating Altitude
upto 30,000 ft (9,000m)
3.2.c Caching- Rack servers (Generation 9) - 4 Nos.
S.No.
1
Description
Processor
2 * Intel® Xeon® E7-8891v3 2.8GHz 165W 10-core Processor with 45MB L3
Cache memory
Scalable to four processors
2
Chipset
Intel Series Chipset
3
Motherboard
OEM Motherboard
4
Memory
Minimum 64 GB DDR4 2133 MHz RAM upgradable to 128GB RAM
5
Storage
5 * 300GB 6G hot plug SAS 10,000 RPM, 2.5” HDD OR minimum 2 * 900 GB
10K RPM disks configured in RAID 0/1/5 for the Operating system &
application binaries.
Scalable to ten SFF hot plug hard disk drives
Dual port 8GB fiber channel host bus adapter
6
Storage Controller
Integrated hardware RAID Controller to support RAID 0,1,5 with 2G FBWC
(Flash back write cache)
7
Optical Drive
DVD RW Drive
168
8
Network
Dual Port 10 Gibabit Ethernet adapter
9
Expansion Slots
Up to 9 slots supported; all full-length/full-height. Standard: 4 PCI-E 3.0 x8, 5
PCI-E 3.0 x16.
10
Interfaces
Serial - 1,
Video - 1 front; 1 rear,
Network RJ-45 – 4,
iLO 4 Remote Management – 1,
micro-SD Slot – 1,
USB 2.0 Ports - 8 total: 2 front; 4 rear; 2 internal
11
Graphics
Integrated Graphics Controller
12
Management
13
Power Supply
Intelligent Provisioning
Redundant ROM
Remote Flash ROM
Management Agents
Integrated Management Log (IML)
Automatic Server Recovery-2 (ASR-2)
Pre-Failure Warranty (covers processors, SAS hard drives and memory)
Redundant/adaptive load balancing NIC Support
Hot Spare Boot
1200W Dual hot plug power supply
Support upto 4 hot plug fans for N+N redundancy
14
System Fans
4 Hot Plug Fans
15
Form Factor
4U Rack
16
Industry standard
compliance
ACPI 2.0. Compliant
PCIE 2.0 Compliant
PXE Support
WOL Support
Physical Address Extension (PAE) Support
Microsoft® Logo certifications
USB 2.0 Support
17
Operating System and
Virtualization Software
support
Microsoft Windows Server
Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES)
VMware
18
Security
Power-on password
Keyboard password
External USB port enable/disable
Network Server Mode
Serial interface control
Administrator's password
Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
Intel® Secure Key
19
Environmental
Operating Temperature support from 50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C) and Non
operating Temperature from -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C)
Operating Humidity from 10% to 90% non-condensing and Non-operating
Humidity from 5% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Altitude from 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3000m) and Non operating Altitude
upto 30,000 ft (9,000m)
169
3.2.d SAN storage for Caching – 40 TB (1 No.) and 20TB (1 No.)
S.No.
Parameters
Description
Storage System with NSPoF (No singlepoint of failure) Architecture.The
storage system should support FC-SAN. The architecture should allow modular
upgrades of hardware and software for investment protection. The architecture
should allow modular upgrades of hardware and software for investment
protection
1
Storage
Architecture
2
Storage
Controller
The array should be equipped with N+N (with minimum of
2 array controllers) Nos. of array controllers for better performance redundancy
and Failover capabilities
3
Controller Cache
Requirements
The system should have minimum 32 GB cache across redundant controllers
with an ability to protect data on cache. Cache should be mirrored and battery
backed.Cache battery backup should be atleast 48 hours.
The Storage System should be configured with 1TB 7200 RPM SAS 6 Gbps
HDDs. The storage system should be scalable to greater than 168 disks per
system. Each controller to have atleast two nos. of 6Gbps drive ports for
attaching disk expansion enclosures.
Should support:
* atleast 512 LUN for mapping to hosts
* Should support more than 100 hosts
* It should be possible to create a single LUN of minimum10TB
The Storage System shall have the capability to support Storage Tiering to
automatically manage Hot Spots in the system.
4
Storage
Features
The storage system should support Mix of FC-8Gbps, iSCSI1/10Gbps, FCoE without performing any controller upgrades. The ethernet
ports should allow link aggregation/teaming for high availability and failover
The SAN must support synchronous, asynchronous replication. Further, the
replication must be bi-directional to support multiple replication options.
The SAN must allow any LUN provided to a system configured with both types
of server connectivity (fiber channel or iSCSI) and must be capable of mapping
volumes from one connectivity type to the other without changing or copying
the data.
5
Raid Levels
6
Disk Drive
Support
7
Performance
Offered Storage Subsystem shall support Raid 0, 1 , 1+0, 5 and Raid 6
Small form factor 2.5-inch disk drives:
146 GB, 300 GB @ 15k rpm
600 GB, 900 GB, 1.2 TB @ 10k rpm
1 TB @ 7.2k rpm SAS nearline
Large form factor 3.5-inch disk drives:
300 GB @ 15k rpm, SAS 2.5-inch*
900 GB, 1.2 TB @ 10k rpm, SAS 2.5-inch*
2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB @ 7.2k rpm
SSD 2.5-inch drives:
200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB
The offered storage system shall have capability to use more than 30 drives per
array group or raid group for better performance.
170
Should offer real time performance monitoring tools giving information on CPU
utilization,
volume
throughput,
I/O
rate and latency
8
Storage
Capacity
9
Management
Software
System should be configured with minimum 20TB usable capacity scalable to
40TB &40TB usable capacity expandable to 80TB based on 7.2K RPM Disk
Drives on RAID 5
Bidder shall provide Storage Array configuration and web based Management
software. Any Maintenance / Upgrade of firmware and management software
should be performed with any disruption/downtime in the service
10
Global Hot
Spare
Storage Array shall support distributed Global hot Spare for offered Disk drives.
Hot Spares should be provisioned with not less than one hot spare for every 30
drives.
11
Storage
Scalability
The array should be scalable to a minimum of 168 disks of the offered
configuration of the disk count behind the same controller pair and 336 drives in
two-way clustered systems
12
Protocol
Support
System should be configured with CIFS, NFS,
Protocols. All the required licenses should be offered.
13
Snapshots and FullCopy
(Snap Clone)
The
Storage
array
should
support
controller
based
functionality for pointer based snap copies. The pointer based snap copies
should require minimal space for creation of snapshot. Required license to take
snapshot and restore snap, a license for file-level Data should be provided.
14
Data
De-duplication
Offered Storage System
Data de-duplication
15
OS Support
The
storage
array
should
support
industry-leading
Operating
System
platforms
including:
Windows
Server
2008, Windows 2012, VMware, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, IBM- AIX, and Linux.
16
Thin
Provisioning
and
Compression
to
support
file-level
iSCSI,
or
FCoE
block
etc
level
Offered Storage System to have Thin Provisioning for file- level data.
Storage array should support long distance data replication at storage level, if
required through optional software license.
The storage array should support hardware based data replication at the array
controller level across all models of the offered family.
17
Disaster Recovery /
Replication Support
The Storage array shall also support multi-way (Across Data Centers located
over long distances) replication to ensure zero RPO in native fashion (LUN to
LUN) without using any additional replication appliance.
Replication shall support incremental replication after resumption from Link
Failure or failback situations.
18
Storage Tiering
Offered storage shall support dynamic migration of Volume from one Raid set
to another set while keeping the application online
19
Built in
Redundancy
The system shall support Fully Redundant & Hot Swappable Fans & Power
Supplies. There shall be support for Non Disruptive Microcode Update & Non
Disruptive Parts Replacement
20
AC Power
200-240VAC, 50Hz
21
Form Factor
The proposed system should be Rack mountable
171
3.2.e SAN Switch
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
Architecture
2.
The Fiber Channel Switch should provide Non-blocking Architecture with 8FCPorts in a Single Domain
Concurrently Active at 4/8Gbit/sec Full Duplex with NoOversubscription.
3.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support auto-sensing 2, 4, 8, 10 and 8/16Gbit/sec FC capabilities.
4.
The Fiber Channel Switch should be loaded with required SWLTransceivers.
5.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support different port types such as F_Port,M_Port (Mirror/SPAN Port),
EX_port and E_Port.
6.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support Non-Disruptive Microcode/ FirmwareUpgrades and Hot Code
Activation.
7
The Fiber Channel Switch should provide redundant and hot-pluggable components.
8
Performance
9.
The Fiber Channel Switch should provide a minimum Aggregate Bandwidth: 8 ports × 4/8Gbit/sec (data
rate) end to end.
10
Basic Features
11.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support Quality of Service (QoS) to helpoptimize application performance
in consolidated, virtual environments. It should be possible to define high, medium and low priority QOS
zones to expedite high priority traffic.
12.
The Fiber Channel Switch should be configured with the Zoning and ISLLicenses
13.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support for web based management andshould also support CLI.
14.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support Advanced Zoning and ACL to simplify administration and
significantly increase control over data access.
15.
The Fiber Channel Switch should support POST and online/offline diagnostics,includingRAStrace logging,
environmental monitoring, non-disruptive daemon restart, FCping and Pathinfo (FC traceroute), port
mirroring (SPAN port).
16
Rack Mount and Power Supply
17
The Fiber Channel Switch should be configured with 4-post rack mount Kit.
18
The Fiber Channel Switch should be loaded with hot swappable, redundantload sharing AC power supplies
to provide 1:1 power supply redundancy for the fully loaded configuration. All Power Supply Module slots
should be occupied with Power Supplies.
4.a Humidity, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems
S.No.
1
Technical Specifications
The NOC should be precision environment controlled. The temperature inside Server/network Farm area
should be maintained at 20 degree centigrade with a precision of ± 2 degrees. The Precision Air Conditioning
shall be provided for the Server Farm with around 1000-1500 sq.ft. area with necessary enhancements of
cooling capacity in future in terms of additional indoor and outdoor units. The bidder should plan the location
of such additional indoor and outdoor units. Bidder should also plan the location of such additional units in the
area and lay additional conduits (including associated civil / electrical works) between locations of these
additional indoor units and outdoor units, lay additional electrical cable & outlets so as to have other
infrastructure ready for deploying additional indoor and outdoor units at a future date. Air Conditioning
should be ensured to the extent of 99.749%. It is suggested to provide air supply typically through false
flooring.
172
2
Air Conditioning
Since NOC is a critical area, a separate air conditioning system (precision air conditioning) should be
exclusively installed to maintain the required temperature. For other area can have a common air conditioning
system for comfort. The general requirements for the two zones are as specified below:
NOC – should be provided with precision air conditioning on a 24 x 7 x 365 days operating basis at least
meeting with Tier – II having n + 1 redundancy architecture requirements and having enough provision to
scale it to next level as may be required in a later stage. The units should be able to switch the air conditioner
on and off automatically and alternately for effective usage in pre defined sequence. The units should be
down-flow fashion, air-cooled conditioning system. Precision Air Conditioning systems specifically designed
for stringent environmental Control with automatic monitoring and control of cooling, heating,
humidification, dehumidification and air filtration function should be installed.
Other area should be provided with split-type comfort air-cooled system (at least meeting with Tier - II
architecture requirements). Help desk and NOC area should have a separate AC system, so that AC units can
be switched off whenever required.
3
Natural Convection
As the conditioned air is supplied through the grills with volume control dampers on the floor, the cold aircools the component in a much faster and efficient manner as it does moves up, after extracting heat from the
component. This follows the natural convection path of the air. The warm air should be sucked at the top by
machine, air-conditioned and then supplied back to the room.
4
Air Distribution
The air is to be distributed evenly by providing grills with VCDs (Volume Control Dampers) in the floor tiles.
5
Flexibility
The system should give the flexibility of discharging air at wherever point required even if the furniture is
relocated. Changing the grill/tiles carrying grills, at suitable location does this.
4.b CCTV System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
The Critical area of the NOC along with the Non Critical area needs to be under constant video surveillance.
The primary objective of a CCTV system is to ensure effective surveillance of the area and also create a record
for post event analysis. The CCTV system should provide an on-line display of video images on monitor. The
entire setup should be monitored from the control room as well as from NOC on 24x7 basis.
2
Fixed dome Analogue camera
3
16-Channel Digital Video recorder
4
32" LCD monitor
5
RG-11 Cable unarmored
6
20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS
7
2 x 1.5 sq.mm copper conductor armoured cable non FRLS
4.c Access Control System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
173
1
The objective of the Access Control System is of allowing entry and exit to and from the premises to
authorized personnel only with controlled by Biometric. Access control are provided for doors. These doors
are with electric locks, and operate on failsafe principle. The lock remains unlocked in the event of a fire alarm
or in the event of a power failure.
2
Two Reader Controller
3
ACS software with PC
4
24 Vdc power supply for Locks
5
6
Smart card Readers i-class or mifare technology with 2” read range capable of reading the facility code and
unique card number from the card and also shall read the card data and passes on to the door controller for
validation
Pin based Access based card reader
7
Smart Cards
8
Electromagnetic Locks (600 Ibs) for single leaf doors
9
Electromagnetic Locks for Double Doors (2x600 Ibs)
10
Emergency Door Release (Break Glass Type)
11
Exit push button
12
Biometric Finger Print Reader
4.d Water Leak Detection System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
The water leak detector is to detect any seepage of water into the critical area and alert the Security Control
Room for such leakage. It consists of water leak detection cable and an alarm module.
2
Water Leak detection 8zone Panel with LCD display, power supply
3
Water leak detection Tape Sensor (5 Mtr)
4
Sounder
5
2 x 1.5 Sq.mm PVC Insulated copper conductor unarmoured cable.
6
20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS
4.e Pest Repellent System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
The entry of Rodents and other unwanted pests shall be controlled using non-chemical, non-toxic devices.
However periodic pest control using Chemical spray can be done once in 3 months as a contingency measure
to effectively fight the pest menace.
2
Rodent Panel
3
Transducer
4
Rodent unarmoured cable.
5
20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS
174
4.f Public Address System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
Making public announcement from the Security Control Room and Facility Manager’s room. Clear and crisp
announcement should reach to the entire Facility area.
4.g Fire Detection and Alarm System
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
UL Listed / FM Approved Single Channel BLUE LED Based Aspiration Detection Unit
2
Power Supply Unit
3
Flush Capillary Sampling Point (Union and adaptor, 1.5m Capillary Tube & Sampling Point)
4
End Cap for large bore pipes, 25 mm
5
25mm PVC Conduit heavy duty FRLS
6
Gas based Fire Suppression System
7
Bidder would be responsible for refilling the gas, in case the fire suppression system has to be activated for
suppressing fire and the defined time period required to refill the gas is 2-3 weeks.
8
120 ltrs Tank and valve assembly with pressure gauge
9
NOVEC 1230 Fluid Factory Fill Per Kg.
10
Electrical Actuator
11
Manual Actuator
12
Discharge Hose
13
Actuation / Pilot Hose
14
Swivel Adapter
15
Pressure Switch - Dpst
16
NOZZLE BRASS - 360/180 Degree
17
Cylinder Straps
18
Warning Sign
19
Manual Release Switch ( Break Glass Type)
20
Abort Switch ( Break Glass Type)
21
Gas Release Panel
4.h Civil and Electrical Works
S.No.
Technical Specifications
175
1
Includes false flooring, false ceiling, doors & locking, Partitioning, Fire Proofing of all surfaces, Furniture &
fixtures and Painting and all other electrical repairs. It also includes cement concrete work, masonry work, and
trench work, storage, glazing and scaffolding work TOTAL AN ARAE OF 2500 Sft where in 1500 Sft NOC
room of tier-2 environment
2
Multi-point reference ground system with less than 2 ohm resistance.
3
Full building lightning protection
4.i UPS - SNMP enabled
S.No.
Technical Specifications
1
The power infrastructure should cater to the following:
a
Multiple utility feeds should be provided from separate substations or power grids to ensure constant system
uptime
Critical Load UPS
2
a
3
Supply of UPS of 20kVA, 3Ph input, 3Ph output, true online double conversion, IGBT based Inverter and
rectifier UPS System with 15 minutes 12V SMF battery backup. Shall also include required number of SMF
12V batteries, Battery breakers, Base frame and supporting structure for UPS systems and complete as
required.(The UPS should be provided with isolation transformer at the output.)
Non-Critical Load UPS
4
Supply of UPS of 10kVA, 3Ph input, 3Ph output, true online double conversion, IGBT based Inverter and
rectifier UPS System with 60 minutes SMF 12V battery backup. Shall also include required number of 12V
SMF batteries, Battery breakers, Base frame and supporting structure for UPS systems and complete as
required.(without Isolation transformer)
Other Features
a
Power conditioning
b
N+1 configuration
c
Complete unit Redundancy
d
Online Double conversion Topology
e
Six Pack IGBT Technology
f
Liquid Cooling technology for IGBT
g
Input Voltage Range 250 V to 440 V
h
Input Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
5
Zero Single Point of Failure electric distribution system with maintenance bypass
Constantly available and operational
a
a
b
True diverse path and redundant power feeds for both dual and single corded equipment
5 - Head end: 250 channel (with 500 channels capable)
(20 HD channels, 230 SD channels) – Qty. as required
The Digital Headend shall support:
- 230 SD and 20 HD, Total 250 Channels.
- The Digital Headend should be MPEG-4 part 10 (h.264).
- The total SD Encoding Services would be 108 SD.
- The total HD Encoding Services would be 20 HD (Full Resolution).
176
-
The other 122 services shall be the part of turnaround setup using 45 L-band transponders.
Each L-band port shall have one CAM slot per L-band for descrambling the services.
The Transcoding shall be offered for 122 services with Automatic Audio control for levelling
and Loudness.
The Digital Headend shall offer the Scrambled IP Output to transport to remote locations.
The Edge QAM shall be offered with the Digital Headend proposal.
The offered Digital headend shall be upgradeable to total of 500 channels, as and when may be required
by adding additional equipment’s.
The offered DHE platform should offer the best compression efficiency. The vendor shall produce the
compression efficiency documents.
The encoding chassis shall have interactive front panel for configuration.
Each of the equipment shall support modular architecture and individual modules shall be independent to
other modules of the same chassis processing different services. All the modules shall be hot swappable
and shall support the inter module and Inter / intra chassis redundancy.
The offered DHE shall include the proposal for Dish farm installation & L-band distribution.
The offered Platform shall include the third party items and integration, Training services for DHE like,
Switches, racks with accessories, cables, connectors, wiring, PSI_SI, Installation and training.
The same supplier / vendor shall offer the end to end solution for Multiscreen Transport as required by us.
The LMOs at remote sites shall insert up to 4 local services and these services shall be encrypted in BISS
mode.
All the equipment shall be controlled and managed by NMS.
177
Annexure I
Network Route Map & Proposed locations of PoPs
State Map:
Enclosed as a separate file by names “STATEMAP.pdf”
District Maps: Enclosed as a separate file by name “DISTRICTMAPS.pdf”
Location of the proposed PoPs:
Enclosed as separate file by the name “PoPlocations.xls”
178
Annexure II
FORMS OF TENDER
DECLARATION OF THE BIDDER (to be submitted by the bidder along with the bid)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
I/WE have not been black listed in any Central / State Government department or any PSU due to any
reasons.
I/WE agree to disqualify me/us for any wrong declaration in respect of any item and to summarily reject
my/our tender.
I/WE certify that I/We are clearly aware of the scope of the work and the BOQ / Specifications thereof and
taken into consideration all requisite technical / financial aspects related to this project work before quoting
my Percentage excess or less on ECV.
I/WE am/are prepared to furnish detailed data in support of all my quoted rates, if and when called upon to
do so without any reservations.
I/WE hereby declare that I/We will pay an additional security deposit in terms of instructions to Bidders.
I/WE hereby declare that I am/we are accepting to reject my tender in terms of conditions mentioned in this
document.
I/WE hereby declare that I am/we are accepting for the defect liability period as 12 months after the
contract completion period (i.e. 12 Months after 9 Months of projects works completion period plus 12
Months of subsequent O&M period).
I/WE declare that I/WE will procure the required equipment, cables, software and all other materials
required for successful completion & maintenance of the project. I/WE shall ensure smooth and uninterrupted supply of required equipment, cables, software and all other materials.
I/WE declare that I/WE will execute the work as per the time schedules and milestones specified in this
document, and if I/WE fail to complete the work as per the milestones, I/WE abide by the condition to
recover Liquidated Damages as per the tender conditions.
I/WE declare that I/WE will abide for settlement of disputes as per the tender conditions
I/WE declare that I/WE have carefully gone through this tender document and will abide by the terms and
the conditions mentioned in this document.
I/WE declare that I/WE submit hereby the requisite tender fee and EMD in the form of BG/DD as
stipulated in this tender document.
Address of the Bidder:
Phone No.:
Bidder
Fax No.:
179
FORM OF AGREEMENT (to be entered between the successful bidder and the Authority)
THIS AGREEMENT is made on the .......day of.………..... 2015 between (name of Authority)
................................................................................................
of
(mailing
address
of
Authority)
................................................................................................ hereinafter called “the Authority”, of the one part and
(name of Contractor) .......................................................................... (here after called “the Contractor”) of the other
part.
WHEREAS the Authority is desirous that certain works should be executed, viz. (brief description of Works)
.................................................................................... and has, by Letter of Acceptance dated (date of Letter of
Acceptance) ................................................................., accepted a tender by the Contractor for the execution,
completion and maintenance of such Works, NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:
1.
In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned to them in
the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.
2.
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement, viz:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
j)
k)
l)
this Form of Agreement;
Security deposit;
the Letter of Acceptance;
the said Tender and Appendix
the Technical Specifications;
Price Bid - Schedule – A (BoQ) & Schedule – B (Price Bid)
Route Map & Network Design / Architecture;
General Conditions of Contract
Special Conditions of Contract
Programme of Work
3. The aforesaid documents shall be taken as complementary and mutually explanatory of one another, but in the
case of ambiguities or discrepancies shall take precedence in the order set out above.
4. In consideration of the payment to be made by the Authority to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the
Contractor hereby covenants with the Authority to execute, complete and maintain the works in conformity in
all respects with the provisions of the Contract.
5. The Authority hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion and
maintenance of the Works the Contract Price at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused their respective Common Seals to be hereunto affixed (or
have hereunto set their respective hands and seals) the day and year first above written.
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED.
By the said
By the said
Name ...................................................
Name ...……................................................
180
On behalf of the Contractor
In the presence of:
On behalf of the Authority
In the presence of:
................................................………..
..............................……………...................
Name ...................................................
Name
Address ...............................................
Address .............…..................................…
...……................................................
...................................................
.…..................................................
...................................................
.…..................................................
181
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR
PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT / ADDITIONAL SECURITY DEPOSIT
(to be submitted by the successful bidder only)
In consideration of the Authority, ____________________,having agreed to accept from
___________________________________________________ “the said Contractor(s)”, a security deposit as may
be modified from time to time wherever necessary under the terms and Conditions of the Contract entered into by
the
said
Contractor(s)
in
respect
of
work
________________________________________
______________________________________, Contract No. ______________________ under the Authority for
the due fulfillment of the terms and conditions of the said Contracts under the said Authority, on production of a
Bank
Guarantee
for
Rs.___
(Rupees
__________________________________only),
we
____________________________Bank _______________________ branch, hereby undertake the guarantee to
pay immediately to the Authority, on demand in writing by the Authority, an amount of Rs. __________ (Rupees
__________________________ ____________________________________) without any reservation and
recourse against any loss or damage caused to or suffered by the _________________ Authority by reason of any
breach by the said Contractor(s) of any of the terms and conditions of the said contact under the said Authority
We _______________________________________________ Bank, __________ further agree that the
guarantee hereby contained shall remain in full force and effect during the period that will be taken for the
performance of the said Agreement under the said Authority and that it shall be in enforcement until all the dues of
the _____________ Authority under or by virtue of the said Contract under the said Authority have been fully paid
and their claims satisfied or discharged or until the said Authority certifies that the terms and conditions of the said
Agreement under the said Authority have been fully and properly carried out by the said Contractor(s) and
accordingly discharges the guarantee subject, however, that the _________________ Authority shall have no rights
under this guarantee after (date). We ____________ ___________________________ Bank Ltd., lastly undertake
not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of the Authority in writing.
Dated ______________________ day of ________________ 2013.
For ________________________________________________________ Bank.
182
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
WHEREAS____________________________________________________ (name of firm (hereinafter called
‘BIDDER’) wish to participate in tender enquiry Notice No. INCAP(AP)/P/Optic Fiber Grid/ 62/2014, Dt.0707-2015 of The INCAP, AC Guards, Hyderabad-500 028, (hereinafter called the ‘INCAP’) for the Work:
“Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub
Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh” AND
WHEREAS in terms of the tender conditions the Bidder is required to furnish to the INCAP a Bank Guarantee for a
sum
of
Rs.
________________
(Rupees
______________________________________________________________________) as earnest money against
the Bidder’s offer aforesaid.
AND WHEREAS We, _________________ Bank, ____________________________ branch have at the
request of the Bidder agreed to give to the INCAP this guarantee as hereinafter contained.
We,
_______________________________________________________________
Bank,
________________________ branch, hereby undertake the guarantee to pay immediately to the INCAP, on
demand
in
writing
by
the
INCAP,
an
amount
of
Rs.
________________(Rupees
___________________________________________________) without any reservation and recourse if the Bidder
shall for any reason withdraw whether expressly or implied their said tender during the period of its validity or any
extension thereof or the Bidder fails to execute the agreement for the work awarded to them by the INCAP.
We, The _________________________________ Bank, ______________________ further agree to that
our liability to pay the aforesaid amount is not dependent or conditional on the INCAP proceeding against the
Bidder and we shall be liable to pay the amount without any demur, merely on a claim raised by the INCAP.
The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up or
dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said Bidder but shall in all respects and for all purposes
be binding and operative until payment of all money(s) due to the INCAP in respect of such liability under the
guarantee
is
restricted
to
Rs.
____________
(Rupees
_____________________________________________________). Our guarantee shall remain in force until
_______________________________. We shall be relieved and discharged from all our liability there under.
We, the ______________________________________, undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its
pendency/currency except with the previous consent of the INCAP in writing.
Station
:
Name of the Bank
183
:
Indemnity Bond
(to be submitted by the bidder along with the bid)
I/We ……………………………………...Resident of ……………………………………………… do
hereby bind myself to pay all the claims may come (a) under Workmen’s Compensation Act. 1933
with any statutory modification thereof and rules there under or otherwise for or in respect of any
damage or compensation payable in connection with any accident or injury sustained (b) under
Minimum wages Act 1948 (c) under payment of wages Act.1936 (d) under the Contractor labour
(Regulation and Abolition) Act. 1970 by workmen engaged for the performance of the business
relating to the above contract i.e., failing such payment of claims of workmen engaged in the above
work, I/We abide in accepting for the recovery of such claims, effected from any of my assets with
the departments.
Contractor
184
KEY PERSONNEL PROPOSED
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
S.No
Name of the Key
personnel
Seal of Company
Qualification
Designation
Name
:
Signature
:
Date
:
Designation :
185
Proposed
Role
Experience Details
RECORD OF ARBITRATION & LITIGATION
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
The Bidder shall record chronologically any disputes he has had with any of his previous Clients during the last 10
years, indicate whether Arbitration or Litigation, the nature, approximate duration and amount of claim involved in
respective cases.
S No
Project
Identification
and Location
.
Name and
Address of
Client, tel &
fax
Nature of Dispute
Descriptio
n
Arbit’n/
Period
Amount
Litigat’
n
From -To
Claimed
(lakh
Rs).
Name:
Signature:
Seal of Company
Date:
Designation:
Result
In favour
of
Client/
Contractor
DECLARATION
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
I / WE ……………………………………………………………….have gone through carefully all the Tender
conditions and solemnly declare that / we will abide by any penal action such as disqualification or black listing or
determination of contract or any other action deemed fit, taken by, the Authority against us, if it is found that the
statements, documents, certificates produced by us are false / fabricated.
I / WE hereby declare that, I / WE have not been blacklisted / debarred / suspended / demoted in any department in
Andhra Pradesh or in any State due to any reasons as on date of bid submission.
Signature of the Bidder
Note: The declaration as mentioned above shall be filled in and signed the bidder and shall be uploaded in the eprocurement platform.
Letter of Authorization to attend Bid Opening
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
(To be typed on the letterhead of the company)
To
<Complete address of the purchaser>
Subject: Authorization for attending bid opening on (date) in
the Tender of _________________________________________.
.
I/ We Mr. /Ms. ........................................... have submitted our bid for the tender
no. …………………………………………………………………………….. in
respect
of ............................................................................................................. (Item of work) which is due to
open on .......................... (date).
Following persons are hereby authorized to attend the bid opening for the tender mentioned above on behalf of
……………………………………………………(Bidder) in order of preference given below.
Order of Preference
Name
Specimen Signatures
I.
II.
Alternate Representative
Signatures of Bidder/ Officer authorized to sign the bid Documents on behalf of the Bidder.
Note:
1. Maximum of two representatives will be permitted to attend bid opening. In cases where it is restricted to one,
first preference will be allowed. Alternate representative will be permitted when regular representatives are
not able to attend.
2. Permission for entry to the hall where bids are opened, may be refused in case authorization as
prescribed above is not received
188
MANUFACTURER AUTHORIZATION FORM
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
Bidder needs to submit MAF from all OEMs including Network Equipments, IT & non-IT Components and
Software Product Manufacturers
Manufacturers'/Producers’ Authorization Form
(On Company letterhead only)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
To,
VC & MD
Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited (INCAP),
Hyderabad,
Telangana
Subject: Supply of equipment for “Implementation and Management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the
existing poles / sub stations to establish state-wide wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the State of Andhra
Pradesh ” for INCAP
Sir,
This is to certify that <Insert complete legal name of the OEM>; I/we am/are the Original Equipment
Manufacturers (“OEM”) in respect of the products listed below (“Products”). I/We confirm the Products listed
herein have not been announced as End-of-Life or End-of-Sale.
I/We confirm that <Insert complete legal name of bidder> (“bidder”) has due authorization from us to resell and
supply certain OEM Equipment(s), to INCAP / any other designated Government Authority. The bidder is
authorised by us, to provide the solution, implementation, requisite training & maintenance services, provide
maintenance and upgrade support services for our products for the listed Information Technology infrastructure and
System Integration services to INCAP /any other designated Government Authority.
When resold by reseller the Products shall be subject to applicable warranty terms and service policies of the OEM.
I/We affirm that as of the date of this letter, we shall make support available for the Product(s) and provide support
of parts for repair (or functionally equivalent replacements) thereof for a period of up to seven (7) years from the
date of sale to INCAP / any other designated Government Authorityand that we currently expect to make these
Products, or subsequent versions or functional equivalents of them, available for sale during such period of time.
We assure you that in the event of bidder, not being able to fulfil its obligation as our representative in respect of
applicable standard warranty terms we would continue to meet our warranty terms for the entire term of the bidder
agreement with INCAP / any other designated Government Authority, as signed at the start of the project, through
appropriate alternate arrangement(s) through our support mechanism in India.
This authorization letter is applicable against the Products listed below:
S. No.
Product Name
1.
2.
3.
For and on behalf of <Insert OEM’s company name>
<Signed and Sealed>
<Name of Authorised Signatory>
<Designation>
<Contact Details>
Cc: Bidder’s corporate name & Address
189
Manufacturers'/Producers’ Authorization Form (For Optical Fiber)
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
(On Company letterhead only)
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
To,
VC & MD
Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited (INCAP),
Hyderabad,
Telangana
Subject: Supply of equipment for “Implementation and Management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the
existing poles / sub stations to establish state-wide wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the State of Andhra
Pradesh ” for INCAP
Sir,
This is to certify that <Insert complete legal name of the OEM>; I/we am/are the Original Equipment
Manufacturers (“OEM”) in respect of the products listed below (“Products”). I/We confirm the Products listed
herein have not been announced as End-of-Life or End-of-Sale.
I/We confirm that <Insert complete legal name of bidder> (“bidder”) has due authorization from us to resell and
supply certain OEM Equipment(s), to INCAP / any other designated Authority. The bidder is authorised by us, to
provide the solution, implementation, requisite training & maintenance services, provide maintenance and upgrade
support services for our products for the listed Information Technology infrastructure and System Integration
services to INCAP / any other designated Authority.
When resold by reseller the Products shall be subject to applicable warranty terms and service policies of the OEM.
I/We affirm that as of the date of this letter, we shall make support available for the Product(s) and provide support
of parts for repair (or functionally equivalent replacements) thereof for a period of up to twenty (20) years from the
date of sale to INCAP / any other designated Authority and that we currently expect to make these Products, or
subsequent versions or functional equivalents of them, available for sale during such period of time.
We assure you that in the event of bidder, not being able to fulfil its obligation as our representative in respect of
applicable standard warranty terms we would continue to meet our warranty terms for the entire term of the bidder
agreement with INCAP / any other designated Authority, as signed at the start of the project, through appropriate
alternate arrangement(s) through our support mechanism in India.
This authorization letter is applicable against the Products listed below:
S. No.
Product Name
1.
2.
3.
For and on behalf of <Insert OEM’s company name>
<Signed and Sealed>
<Name of Authorised Signatory>
<Designation>
<Contact Details>
Cc: Bidder’s corporate name & Address
Note: This letter of authority should be on the letterhead of the manufacturer and should be signed by a person
competent and having the power of attorney to bind the manufacturer. The bidder in its Bid should include it.
190
INTEGRITY PACT
(to be entered into between the successful bidder and the Authority)
Between
The Authority
and
………………………………..hereinafter referred to as “The Bidder/Contractor”
Preamble
The Authority intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, contract/s for ------------------------------------------. The Authority values full compliance with all relevant laws and regulations, and the principles of
economic use of resources, and of fairness and transparency in its relations with its Bidder/s and Contractor/s.
In order to achieve these goals, the Authority will appoint Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) who will monitor the
tender process and the execution of the contract for compliance with the principles mentioned above.
Section 1 – Commitments of the Authority
(1)
(2)
The Authority commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to observe the
following principles:(a)
No employee of the Authority , personally or through family members, will in connection with the
tender for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, for him/herself or
third person, any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally entitled to.
(b)
The Authority will, during the tender process treat all Bidder(s) with equity and reason. The
Authority will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidder(s) the same
information and will not provide to any Bidder(s) confidential/additional information through
which the Bidder(s) could obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or the contract
execution.
(c)
The Authority will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons.
If the Authority obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal offence
under the relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the
Authority will inform its Vigilance Office and in addition can initiate disciplinary action.
Section 2 – Commitments of the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)
(1)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption. He
commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the tender process and
during the contract execution.
(a)
Thee Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm, offer, promise
or give to any of the Authority’s employees involved in the tender process or the execution of the
contract or to any third person any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally
entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the tender
process or during the execution of the contract.
191
(2)
(b)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not enter with other Bidder(s) into any undisclosed agreement or
understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to prices, specifications,
certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids or any other actions to
restrict competitiveness or to introduce cartelization in the bidding process.
(c)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not commit any offence under the relevant Anti-corruption Laws
of India; further the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not use improperly, for purposes of competition or
personal gain, or pass on to others, any information or document provided by the Authority as part
of the business relationship, regarding plans, Technical proposals and business details, including
information contained or transmitted electronically.
(d)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payments he has
made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in
connection with the award of the contract.
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above or be an
accessory to such offences.
Section 3 – Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts
If the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s), before contract award or during execution has committed a transgression
through a violation of Section 2, above or in any other form such as to put his reliability or credibility in
question, the Authority is entitled to disqualify the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) from the tender process or take
action as per the defined procedure.
(1)
(2)
Section 4 – Compensation for Damages
If the Authority has disqualified the Bidder(s) from the tender process prior to the award according to
Section 3, the Authority is entitled to demand and recover the damages equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit
/ Bid Security.
If the Authority has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the Authority is entitled to terminate
the contract according to section 3, the Authority shall be entitled to demand and recover from the Contractor
the amount equivalent to Security Deposit / Performance Bank Guarantee in addition to any other penalties/
recoveries as per terms and conditions of the tender.
Section 5 – Previous transgression
(1)
The Bidder declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last 3 years with any other Company in
any country conforming to the Anti-corruption approach or with any other Public Sector Enterprise in
India that could justify his exclusion from the tender process.
(2)
If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender process or
action can be taken as per the defined procedure.
Section 6 – Equal treatment of all Bidders/Contractors
(1)
The Authority will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with all Bidders/Contractors.
(2)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) undertake(s) to demand from all members (if bidder is a consortium), a
commitment in conformity with this Integrity Pact.
(3)
The Authority will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this Pact or violate its
provisions.
192
Section 7 – Criminal charges against violating Bidder(s) / Contractor(s) / SubContractor(s)
If the Authority obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or SubContractor, or of an employee
or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or SubContractor, which constitutes corruption,
or if the Authority has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Authority will inform the appropriate
Vigilance Authority.
Section 8 – External Independent Monitor/Monitors
(1)
Authority appoints Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) for this Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review
independently and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under
this agreement.
(2)
The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and performs his functions
neutrally and independently. He reports to the Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP / any other
designated Authority.
(3)
The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to all
Project documentation of the Authority including that provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will also
grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and unconditional
access to his project documentation. The same is applicable to SubContractors. The Monitor is under
contractual
obligation
to
treat
the
information
and
documents
of
the
Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)/SubContractor(s) with confidentiality.
(4)
(5)
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Section, the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) shall have no obligation
whatsoever to provide any internal costing mechanisms or any internal financial or commercial data
pursuant to any audit or review conducted by or on behalf of the Authority. Further, the
Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) shall not be required to provide any data relating to its other customers, or any
personnel or employee related date.
The Authority will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the parties
related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual relations between the
Authority and the Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option to participate in such meetings.
As soon as the PMA notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement, he will so inform the
Management of the Authority and request the Management to discontinue or take corrective action, or to
take other relevant action. The monitor can in this regard submit non-binding recommendations. Beyond
this, the PMA has no right to demand from the parties that they act in a specific manner, refrain from
action or tolerate action.
Section 9 – Pact Duration
This Pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Contractor 12 months after the
last payment under the contract.
If any claim is made/ lodged during this time, the same shall be binding and continue to be valid despite the
lapse of this pact as specified above, unless it is discharged/determined by the Authority.
193
Section 10 – Other Provisions
(1)
This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is the Registered Office of
the Authority, i.e. Hyderabad. The arbitration clause provided in the tender document / contract shall not
be applicable for any issue /dispute arising under Integrity Pact.
(2)
Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing.
(3)
If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be, signed by all partners or
consortium members.
(4)
Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, the remainder of this agreement
remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original intensions.
--------------------------------
----------------------------------
For the Authority
For the Bidder/Contractor
Place……………………
Witness1: ………………………………
Date ……………………
………………………………
Witness 2:
194
Compliance Certificate
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
It is to certify that the tender document – Tender No……………. dated…………….is carefully read & understood
and all the sections and clauses are COMPLIED UNCONDITIONALLY AND UNEQUIVOCALLY. There is no
deviation from the terms & conditions of the tender.
Signature of Authorized Signatory of the Bidder
Company Seal
Date
195
Statement of Deviation from Required Specifications
(to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid)
To
Vice Chairman & Managing Director
Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh (INCAP)
Hyderabad
Date:
Sub: Statement of Deviation – Reg.
Ref No: NIT. No . INCAP(AP)/P/Optical Fiber Grid / 62/2014 Dated: 07-07-2015
Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing
electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of
Andhra Pradesh
Sir,
There are no technical deviations (null deviations) from the required specifications of tendered items and schedule
of requirements. The entire work shall be performed as per your specifications and documents.
OR (Strike out whatever is not applicable)
Following is the exhaustive list of technical deviations and variations from the required specifications of tendered
items and schedule of requirements. Except for these deviations and variations, the entire work shall be performed
as per your specifications and documents.
S. No.
Item /
Component
Required
Specifications /
Features
Tender
Document Page
No.
Statement of deviations and
variations
1.
2.
Witness Signature
Bidder Signature
Name:
Designation:
Address:
Directorate:
Date:
Name:
Designation:
Address:
Directorate:
Date:
Bidder Seal
196
Annexure III
Guidelines for Installation of ADSS Aerial Optical Fiber Cable
1. Scope
This document is intended to provide guidelines for selection of appropriate methodology for aerial installation of
ADSS optical Fiber Cable on Existing Electrical Poles of 440/220/132/33/11 KV Lines and LT lines as per the
roupe map and network design.
2. Installation Techniques
The techniques used in installation of Aerial ADSS Optical Fiber Cables are described here. With the proper
installation hardware and skilled resource, any of these methods can be used to install ADSS cable. Many a times,
it will become necessary to use a combination of these methods to achieve full installation.
Selection of the specific technique (i.e. Moving Drum method, Stationary Drum method or Manual Installation
method), or a combination thereof, shall largely depend on the actual site conditions. The Contractor shall select
the most appropriate installation technique suitable to the site conditions.
a. Moving Drum Method
In this method the cable is pulled directly from the cable drum mounted on a moving vehicle as it drives along the
pole line. The cable drum must be mounted on a proper support to allow easy cable pay off. At the dead-end
point, the cable is terminated using Termination Assembly sets and tensioned using turnbuckles to maintain
cable sag within permissible value.
To start installation, park the vehicle with the cable drum approximately 1 5 - 20 meters away from the pole
facing away from it down the pole line. The cable must pay off from top of the drum towards the rear of the
vehicle.
Install the termination supports and temporary hooks on the poles at the starting point and subsequent poles. Pull
off the necessary amount of slack, lift the dead-end to the top of the pole and mount on the termination assembly.
Once the cable is fixed at both ends with at the terminating assemblies, carry out tensioning. After the cable
section is properly tensioned and secured at both ends lift the cable out of the hooks at each of the intermediate
pole and support it with the suspension set assemblies.
b. Stationary Drum Method
In this method of aerial cable installation, the cable is pulled along the cable route through temporary support
hardware. Stationery drum installation method requires installation of temporary support hardware such as pulley
blocks.
A rope wound on the tension limiting winch is passed through the pulleys and connected to the cable on the drum
installed on a stand which allows free rotation of the drum. The pulling load should normally not exceed 60% of
the maximum permissible cable tension recommended by cable supplier.
The cable drum and winch locations must have vehicular access. The cable drum should always be placed on
levelled ground so that its flanges are vertical thus avoiding rubbing of cable against flanges. The orientation
should be such that the cable pay-off is directly in the direction of pull. Always pay-out the cable from top of the
drum and not from bottom. The drum should have provision to allow controlled pay-out of cable. Cable pay-out
needs to be controlled to prevent free running or jerking.
197
Once the cable is completely pulled end to end, it is then ready for installation of permanent supporting system
of terminating and suspension set assemblies at required locations and tensioning for sag control.
c. Manual Installation Method
Manual installation method technique is similar to stationary drum method, except that in this case the cable is
uncoiled from the drum and placed on the ground in the shape of 8.
The pulling operation is same as in stationary drum method. The hardware requirement and pulling equipment
also remains same.
For pulling in both directions, two loops ofshape of 8 can be made and each can be pulled in separate directions.
Loops of size 4 to 5m x 1.5m should be sufficient in most cases.
3. Installation of Accessories
a. Pole Clamp
Prior to fixing any temporary supports/stringing blocks or permanent cable suspension / termination
assemblies, it is necessary to fix pole clamps. Appropriate type of pole clamps will be required depending on the
shape of the pole. The two halves shall be opened and fixed at the specified height using tightening bolts.
b. Terminating (or Dead End) Assembly
Termination assemblies are required at dead ends locations where:
i.
cable needs to be terminated at the end facility
ii.
loops are to be kept for future maintenance activities
For double sided termination assembly 2 sets would be required.
To fix a termination Assembly following accessories are required:
i.
Protective Helix on the cable,
ii.
Terminating Helix with a thimble,
iii.
Clevis Thimble,
iv.
Spiral Vibration Damper
c. Suspension Assembly
ADSS optical fiber cable shall be supported on all intermediate poles between two terminating poles using the
pole clamp and a suspension assembly set.
To fix a suspension Assembly following accessories are required:
i.
Protective Helix on the cable,
ii.
Suspension Helix,
iii.
Clevis Thimble,
iv.
Spiral Vibration Dampers
d. Installing Cable Loop / Storage / Joint Closure
Cable loops are to be provided for future maintenance purposes at regular spacing. A fixture is required to be
installed. Excess cable is then wound & kept on support. The fixture provides a means to ensure proper bend radius
is maintained. Separate clamp is required for installation of Joint Closures.
198
e. Supporting Jumper Cable Clamp
Jumper cable hanging between a pair of Termination Assemblies installed at locations where there is sharp change
in direction need to be supported with a special twisted link. To support jumper cable, Use already installed pole
clamp.
f. Cable Tensioning
After the required length of cable has been placed, the cable shall be properly tensioned before it is permanently
secured into suspension assemblies.
The temporary dead end should be installed 4 to 5 m from the pole so that after complete tension is applied,
appropriate permanent termination assembly set can be installed while the cable is in tension. The chain hoist will
also need to be tied to the pole directly using a sling and not onto the pole clamp.
Once the cable sections are under the required tension and the sag is within limits (i.e. less than 1% of span), the
“free” end of the cable used for tensioning is fitted with termination assembly set and terminated. Once the load is
transferred on to permanent termination end, the temporary arrangement shall be removed.
g. Machinery / Equipment / Tools
i.
Ropes and light weight ladder for installation of termination/suspension assemblies,
clamps etc.
ii.
Temporary supports, dynamometer, chain hoists, temporary dead ends, steel cables,
etc. required during cable laying and/or cable pulling and cable tensioning operations
as applicable will have to be arranged by the Contractor.
iii.
Van with portable splicing machines and OTDR, power meter, cable preparation kits,
etc. for splicing and testing of installed ADSS Optic al Fiber Cable.
iv.
Other tools and tackles shall include wrenches, spanners, screw drivers, hammer,
ropes etc.
v.
All safety equipment such as safety belts, insulating and cotton gloves and hard hats,
fluorescent vests etc. as required
199
Annexure IV
Quality Assurance
General Quality Assurance Program (QAP)
Within 15 days of Agreement signing, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Plan
(QAP), which shall generally conform to relevant ISO requirements. Approval to proceed with
manufacture of equipment within this Contract will not be given until the QAP for all major
equipment / material has been received and approved by the Authority. Delays to the Contract completion
date due to non-compliance with this specification requirement will be the Contractor's responsibility.
Major features of the QAP shall ensure:
(a) The Contractor has defined all staff responsibilities and the QA systems operating within the
organization for the purpose of ensuring adequate quality of the end product.
(b) The Contractor has a senior officer with the Authority available at site all the time to resolve
matters of quality to the satisfaction of the Client.
(c) The Contractor has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained staff to perform the
quality control duties.
(d) All production operations and test functions are properly documented and available to any
relevant member of the Contractor's workforce.
(e) A detailed inspection and test plan is prepared for the whole manufacturing operation.
(f) Regular and systematic programmes of testing are carried out for all incoming raw materials.
(g) Regular calibration checks are carried out on all measuring equipment used in the manufacturing
operations.
(h) Statistical analyses are carried out regularly on appropriate test results to confirm that all processes
are performing within the specified tolerances.
(i) Adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality checks show that
performance is not satisfactory.
(j) All checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardized forms and these
are verified, certified, recorded and filed in a systematic manner.
The above listing is not exhaustive and any additional systems are to be put in by Contractor to ensure
timely and effective execution of the project.
200
Annexure V
Installation Methodology
Live Line Installation Requirement
All of the ADSS fiber cable under this project shall be installed under live line condition i.e. with all the
circuits of the line charged to their rated voltage. The ADSS cable shall be installed on power distribution
poles on 33kV, 11kV and 440/220/132/33/11 KV Lines and LT distribution lines. The Contractor shall
carry out proper tensioning wherever required to maintain the adequate ground clearance and clearance
from the live conductor. The detailed installation methodology shall be furnished in the Technical
bid and finalized during the detailed engineering.
The installation shall be generally in accordance with the latest version of IEEE Guide to the Installation
of Overhead transmission Line Conductor with additional instructions and precautions for live line working
and fiber optic cable handling.
The Contractor shall ensure that there shall be no outage of the distribution line during the live line
stringing of ADSS cable and live line strengthening of the poles.
Analysis for Support augmentation / strengthening
After finalization of the ADSS cable design, analysis shall be carried out by the Contractor to
ensure that with the stringing of ADSS cable, the pole remains stable as per the relevant standards. The
bidder shall consider the requirement of such analysis to meet the specified requirement and no
separate payment shall be payable for any design analysis for the poles / ADSS/underground
armored optical fibers parameter finalization.
The successful bidder is required to provide pole strengthening mechanisms such as cross arms, pole
stays/guys etc. to ensure that the safety of the existing power infrastructure is not compromised. This
requirement has not been reflected as a separate item in the price schedule and therefore any costs
associated with it should be included in the item price of other items included in the price schedule.
Contractor's Responsibility
Safety of Personnel
The Contractor shall afford maximum safety to personnel directly engaged on this Contract or to
persons who, in the normal course of their occupation, find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected
and to frequent the working area.
The Contractor and the Client / Authority shall establish and agree to a system for ensuring the safety of
personnel and equipment. While the plant is under the control of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be
primarily responsible for the safety precautions.
Indemnification of the Client
The project is a live line installation of ADSS. The Client assumes that the Contractor is aware of any
and all risks associated with this project. Under this assumption the Client considers itself indemnified
against any and all charges/legal proceedings for any accidents associated with the project. The
Clientwill however extend any reasonably possible help.
Training of Authority’s Staff
201
The Contractor shall facilitate hands-on-training and handling of special tools and tackles, as
relevant to the engineers and line staffs during site installation. The number of the line staffs to be
deputed to the site will be determined by the Client. The Client line staffs shall be associated with project
from the onset of the work. The cost associated with such hands-on training during at project site is
deemed to have been included in the overall price of the Contract.
The Contractor shall also provide formal classroom training and field visits on Optical Fiber
Communications/Maintenance Techniques and other relevant fields as may be determined by the
Authority , to at least five (5) engineers and 10 line staffs at their home office/manufacturers works for ten
(10) working days. The training modalities shall be finalized after the award of Contract. The cost
associated with such training is deemed to have been included in the overall price of the Contract
Progress Reports
Fortnightly, the Contractor shall submit to the Client detailed progress reports (in
triplicate) in an approved form indicating the stage reached in the design, ordering of material,
manufacture, delivery and supervision of erection of all components of plant. All variances from the
agreed schedule are to be promptly reported. These reports shall be forwarded promptly so that, on receipt
by the Client, the information contained therein is not more than seven days old. Copies shall also be
forwarded to the Client's representative on Site. These reports shall be prepared using project
management software like Microsoft Project 2000 similar project management software. The soft copies
of the report shall also be supplied to the Client.
The Contractor shall submit to the Client a fortnightly work plan detailing for each portion of the works
separately, the numbers of the various classes of workmen deployed by him on the Site, the Contractor's
equipment on site, or any other information that may reasonably be required.
Access to the Contractor's and Sub-Contractor's works shall be granted to the Client at all reasonable
times for the purpose of ascertaining progress.
Progress Review Meetings
The Contractor shall attend regular formal site Progress Review Meetings (PRM) monthly with the
Client where progress and installation-related issues will be reviewed. If requested by the Client the
Contractor shall prepare for issue of the day before the meeting, detailed schedules showing
separately the erection, fixing, concreting, commissioning, or other work activities planned for the
next two weeks as well as progress achieved over the preceding week.
The Contractor shall also be required to attend other meetings from time to time on special subjects.
Public Relations
The Contractor shall not publish or provide any information relating to progress or financial status of
the works to any person or organization without the prior consent of the Client.
Contractors Responsibility
The Contractor shall fully comply with applicable environmental laws, regulatory requirements,
and clients requirements including the key requirements listed below:
The Contractor shall designate a focal person at every project site to ensure compliance to regulations and any
other requirements governing the project;
202
The Contractor should as far as possible ensure to avoid occurrence of accidents at the work site. The
Contractor shall ensure to provide reports on incidents and cases of accidents occurred at work site
within 24 hours and its corresponding corrective and preventive measures taken to deal with such issues;
Managers and supervisors will participate in environmental self-assessments, monitoring and audits,
incident investigations; additionally, supervisors are responsible for conducting monthly meetings to
emphasize important ES&H issues associated with their work activities including any deficiencies and
corrective actions;
All the workers will be supplied with appropriate personal protective equipment (e.g., safety helmet,
safety glasses, protective gloves and boots etc.) and tools where applicable to allow them to perform
their work safely, maintain equipment in good working condition, and operate equipment in
accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations;
Client may set further safety requirements that may apply depending on the Contractor’s scope of work,
site-specific conditions, or when specialized equipment is used in accordance with the applicable
norms.
The Contractor shall demonstrate in his EMP proposal that he has incorporated all applicable safety
and health requirements to the risks and hazards associated with their scope of work.
Contractors will be responsible for conducting regular inspections and periodic evaluations of
their work activities to ensure compliance with the project’s ES&H requirements, environmental
clearance requirements etc. Contractor’s inspection and audit results will be made available to client for
review.
Safety and Health
Contractors are responsible for complying with all applicable safety and health (S&H)
regulations, manuals, and the Contractor’s own S&H requirements as they apply to their
scope of work. Contractors may be required to provide a written S&H Plan that specifically
addresses the hazards and corresponding mitigation measures associated with their scope of work.
Prior to starting work, Contractors will demonstrate to client that all applicable safety procedures have been
adopted.
Contractor is expected to perform weekly pre-task planning to identify potential hazards and the
corresponding mitigation measure(s) to eliminate or minimize the risk associated with performance of the
work.
Contractors will be responsible for promptly reporting all injuries and near misses to the Authority’s
onsite management and conducting an incident investigation in a timely manner. The incident investigation
should focus on identifying and documenting the root cause(s), finding(s), and corrective action(s) to prevent a
reoccurrence of the incident.
Contractors are required to provide an employee who is currently certified in first aid to render adequate
treatment for their employees working onsite or make available first aid medical facilities available on site.
The Contractor shall hold the proponent/the Authority harmless from any liability for not complying with
environmental laws and regulations and any other requirements governing the project.
203
Annexure VI
Acceptance Test Procedure
PMA would be responsible to oversee the work being done by Contractor to ensure quality of work as well as
quantity verification. Contractor need to coordinate with PMA for getting the certification done and the schedules
for the same need to be planned by the contractor in consultation with the PMA. All records and testing output
conducted by Contractor has to be verified by PMA. PMA will have the responsibility of Quality Review of the
work done by Contractor on day to day basis for all 100% sites. GIS co-ordinates of the entire OFC route at an
interval of every 500 metres (including Equipment Site, Jointing / Splicing) shall be captured by Contractor and
will be updated in the GIS tool deployed by the contractor for this project. This GIS tool need to be bought in the
name of the Authority and will belong to Authority.
PMA will certify the quality of work as well as quantity of material on behalf of the Authority for equipment,
Fiber, OTDR Testing, laying of OFC, splicing etc. PMA shall do verification of Contractor’s final deliverables
including ABDs.
PMA shall conduct all pre-defined tests for ensuring quality of work done by Contractors including:
i.
Field Acceptance Test - of OFC laid
ii. End to End testing – of OFC route from POP to POP.
For all such testing’s the requisite tools shall be provided by the contractor to the PMA.
The Authority shall have the right to cause an audit and Technical examination of the work and the final bills of the
Contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract etc. to be made after payment of the final bill and if as a
result of such audit and Technical examination any sum is found to have been overpaid in respect of any work done
by the Contractor under the contract or any work claimed by him to have been done by him under the contract and
found not to have been executed, the Contractor shall be liable for refund of the amount of over payment and it
shall be lawful for The Authority to recover the same from Contractor.
i.
The Authority shall be entitled to recover any sum overpaid.
ii. Any sum of money due and payable to the Contractor (including security deposit returnable to him) under
this contract may be appropriated by the Authority for the payment of a sum of money arising out or under
any other contract made by the Contractor with the Authority.
1.
Measurement & Inspection
i.
Measurement: The measurement books are to be prepared by Contractor PoP-wise and are to be certified
by PMA. One hard bound copy (duly signed on each page by Contractor and PMA) and soft copies
(scanned) in three CDs will be handed over by PMA to the Authority every month.
ii. Method of recording of complete nomenclature of items, as given in the agreement need not be
reproduced in the measurement sheet for recording the measurement but corresponding item code as
provided, shall be used.
iii. The measurements of various items of work shall be taken and recorded in the measurements sheet. The
measurements shall be taken and recorded by Contractor which will be countersigned by the PMA. PMA
shall be directly responsible for supervision of work, shall be responsible for accuracy of 100% of
measurements. All the support in terms of tools, availability of manpower at sites and all other assistance
etc shall be provided by the contractor. The Authority, without any prejudice, reserves the right to carry
out any kind of inspection of the works being carried out by PMA and Contractor at any time to ascertain
its quantity and quality.
204
iv.
Site Images (Photographs) for PoP locations and others shall be taken by Contractor through Digital
Cameras during Acceptance Testing and verification of measurement book. The images should be
minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. The images must display the date and time of capture of the
image on it bottom right corner. The digital camera should also have the capability to record the GPS coordinates of the location and embed the co-ordinates (Latitude, Longitude and Altitude) as EXIF data in
the image. No alteration or fabrication or makeover of any kind should be made to the Site images being
submitted. Site images shall be captured at every 500 meters and at PoP site. The site images are to be
captured in such a manner so that the object being captured is clearly visible and the surrounding areas are
also identifiable or distinguishable. The photographs shall be printed in sizes 5” x 7” (matte) and attached
along with the Field Acceptance Test Report. The site images, in soft copies, are to be maintained in
separate folders / directories and nomenclature as per the PoP. The site images should be so arranged such
that they are easily locatable and identifiable in the folder where they are stored. The site images are to be
monthly recorded on a non-erasable, good quality Compact Disk and sent to the Authority along with the
Monthly Status Reports. The site images are to be uploaded and GIS co-ordinates are to be entered by
Contractor in the project management tool and GIS tool. Printing of site images to be arranged by the
contractor.
v.
Method of measurement: The measurement of the work shall be done activity-wise as and when the item
of work is ready for measurement. The methods of measurement of various items are enumerated as
under:
a. Measurement of length of cable
The length of cables laid on poles shall be measured by use of PON OTDR. The length should be crossverified with the marking of lengths on the cables. The lengths shall be recorded in sheet provided in the
measurement book.
b. Measurement of other items
The measurement/ numerical details of other items shall be recorded in the sheets provided for respective
items viz.
 Termination of Cable in equipment room
 The number of joints.
 Record splice loss details for each joint.
c. The PMA & Contractor shall sign all the measurement recorded in the measurement sheet/book. This
will be considered as an acceptance by the PMA of measurements recorded in the MB by Contractor.
d. Measurement of the work of cable for calculation of services portion will be taken equal to the length
cable on pole (as measured in the Roadometer) and not the total length of the cable laid through pole.
e. Measurement Book (MB)
The Contractor shall also maintain a Measurement Book for each Mandal/District. This will be maintained
as compilation of copies of the measurement sheets verified by PMA. This book is one of the primary
records to be maintained by the Contractor carrying out the work during the course of execution of works.
The Contractor shall remove all the defects pointed out by PMA in the Measurement Sheet. The PMA /
Contractor or their authorized representatives shall also be at liberty to note their difficulties etc. in these
205
sheets. The hard-bounded measurement sheets shall invariably be consulted at the time of making final
payments to the PMA / Contractor.
2.
Procedure for preparation, processing and payment of bill for works
i.
ii.
3.
For claiming the payment on successful completion of the milestones defined in payments Section, the
Contractor shall prepare the bill along with Mandal wise testing and acceptance document of all the works
and submit the same to PMA. The final bill shall be prepared as per measurements of all items involved in
execution of complete route.
The PMA scrutinize the final bill against the works entrusted and accord necessary certificates stating that
the work has been executed satisfactorily in accordance with Specification and terms and condition of the
contract. The PMA shall verify the quantities of items of work done by Contractor with reference to
measurement recorded in the measurement sheet and Acceptance Testing procedure as defined in this
Clause shall be followed.
a. The PMA verify and submit the bills (for work carried out by Contractor in Mandal which is accepted
by PMA) provided by Contractor along with all self-certifications, test reports and measurement
records to the Authority.
b. The Authority shall release the payment to Contractor accordingly based on certificates received from
PMA.
c. PMA shall submit its report to the Authority, however the payment shall be made as per payment
schedule. The Authority shall exercise the prescribed checks on the bills provided by PMA and make
payments.
Procedure for Payment for Sub-Standard Works
The Contractor is required to execute all works satisfactorily and in accordance with the Specification. If
certain items of work are executed with unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship or with materials of
any inferior description or that any materials or articles provided by him for execution of work or unsound
or of a quality inferior to that contracted for or otherwise not in accordance with the contract (referred to as
substandard work hereinafter), the Authority shall make a demand in writing specifying the work, materials
or articles about which there is a complaint.
4.
Timely Action by PMA
a. Timely reporting and action, to a great extent, can prevent occurrence of sub-standard work, which will be
difficult or impossible to rectify later on. It is incumbent on the part of PMA for supervision of work to
point out the defects in work in time during progress of the work. The PMA responsible for supervision of
work shall without any loss of time submit a report of occurrence of any sub-standard work to the
Authority besides making an entry in the site order book. A notice in respect of defective work shall be
given to the Contractor in writing during the progress of work asking the Contractor to
rectify/replace/remove the sub-standard item of work and also definite time period within which such
rectification/removal/replacement has to be done. After expiry of the notice period, if the Contractor fails to
rectify/ replace/ remove the sub-standard items, the defects shall be rectified/replaced/removed by the
Authority, at its sole discretion, through some other agency at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
206
b. Non-reporting of the sub-standard work in time on the part of PMA shall not in any way entitle the
Contractor to claim that the defects were not pointed out during execution and as such the Contractor
cannot be absolved of the responsibility for sub-standard work and associated liabilities.
5.
Quality Control of Works
i.
The importance of quality of Fiber optic cable splicing works cannot be over-emphasized. The quality and
availability of long distance media and efficiency of the reliable media connectivity between terminal
equipment depends upon quality of optic fiber cable plant. The quality of fiber optic cable plant depends
upon the quality of individual items of work involved viz. laying, Protection, Jointing of cables and
Terminations in equipment room and also on documentation of cable network. The work shall be carried
out strictly in accordance with Specifications laid down to achieve the requisite quality aim.
ii. The Authority shall be the final judge of the quality of the work and the satisfaction of the Authority in
respect thereof set forth in the contract document. Laxity or failure to enforce compliance with the contract
documents by the Authority and/ or its representative shall not manifest a change or intent of waiver, the
intention being that, notwithstanding the same, the Contractor shall be and remain responsible for complete
and proper compliance with the contract documents and the Specification there in. The representative of
the Authority has the right to prohibit the use of men and any tools, materials and equipment which, in his
opinion, do not produce the required work or performance meet the requirement of the contract documents.
iii. It is imperative that the Contractor is fully conversant with the construction practices and shall be fully
equipped to carry out the work in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor is expected and
bound to ensure quality in construction works in accordance with Specifications laid down. The Contractor
shall engage adequate and experienced supervisors to ensure that work is carried out as per Specifications
and with due diligence and in a professional manner. A two stage testing process will be incorporated as
follows:
a. The first level of testing shall be carried out the Contractor. Once the Contractor is confirmed about
the quality assurance of their work and material then they will hand it over to PMA for review and
testing.
.
b. The PMA testing teams shall carry out the second level of testing.
iv. In addition to Acceptance Testing being carried out by PMA, all works at all times shall be open to
inspection of the Authority. The Contractor shall be bound, if called upon to do so, to offer the works for
inspection without any extra payment. The presence of monitoring teams nominated by the Authority
during construction shall not preclude separate acceptance testing teams to recheck adherence to all aspects
as mentioned in the contract.
6.
Quality Control of material supplied by Contractor
PMA has to ascertain that all the material being supplied by Contractor for Works being carried out are in
compliance with the required standard and quality and as per Quality Assurance Plan. Any instance of
violation by Contractor shall be immediately reported to the Authority by PMA.
7.
Support Services:
207
The Contractor shall ensure the availability of service, spare and expansion parts for the supplied
equipment for a minimum period of 7 years from Operational Acceptance by the Authority or 7 years from
the date of withdrawal from production whichever is earlier. However, the termination of production shall
not occur prior to operational acceptance by the Authority. For Fiber cable the same need to be available
for 20 years.
8.
Inspection and Testing
i.
All materials furnished and all work performed under this Contract shall be inspected and tested. The
Contractor shall furnish all manpower and materials for tests, including testing facilities, power and
instrumentation, and replacement of damaged parts. The costs shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be
deemed to be included in the contract price.
ii. The entire cost of testing for factory & site acceptance, routine tests, production tests and other test during
manufacture & site activities specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of
materials, except for the expenses of the Authority representative.
iii. Prior notice of at least 15 days should be given to PMA by Contractor for making the representative of
PMA available for observing the factory tests. Any cost of pertaining to making available the PMA
representative at the necessary site shall be solely borne by PMA and non-chargeable to the Authority.
iv. All tests conducted by Contractor must be verified by PMA.
v. Should any inspections or tests indicate that specific item does not meet Specification requirements; the
appropriate items shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the Contractor as necessary and as applicable to
correct the noted deficiencies at no cost to the Authority. After correction of a deficiency, all necessary
retests shall be performed to verify the effectiveness of the corrective action.
vi. Deliveries shall not be shipped until all required inspections and tests have been completed and all
deficiencies have been corrected to comply with this specification and approved for shipment by the
Authority.
vii. Acceptance or waiver of tests will not relieve the Contractor from the responsibilities to furnish material
and works in accordance with the specifications and to the Authority’s satisfaction.
viii. Unless otherwise specified in this Contract, selection of test samples, numbers of specimens and
acceptance of results shall be in accordance with the terms of the relevant Standards and Codes. Where no
terms exist, the Client is to instruct details in advance of the inspection and tests in response to the request
of the Contractor.
ix. Contractor shall comply with various instructions / guidelines issued by Authority relating to testing and
acceptance of the deliverables of the contractor.
9.
Optical Fiber Identification
i.
Individual optical fibers within the fiber unit and fiber units shall be identifiable in accordance with
EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or Bellcore GR-20 colour coding scheme. The actual colouring scheme
shall be mentioned by the Contractor in Data Requirement Sheet and the same shall be finalized
during the detailed engineering in consultation with the Authority.
208
ii. Colouring utilized for colour coding optical fiber shall be integrated into the fiber coating and shall
be homogenous. The colour shall not bleed from one fiber to another and shall not fade during fiber
preparation for termination of splicing. Each fiber cable shall have traceability of each fiber back to
the original fiber manufacturer’s fiber number ad parameters of the fiber.
10.
i.
Testing Methodology
Acceptance Tests
a. The works shall be deemed to have been completed only after the same has been accepted by PMA as
per the process mentioned in this tender and after it has been informed by PMA to the Authority
confirming the completion of work. The various testing will be undertaken by Contractor in the
presence of PMA. Contractor may conduct its own test prior for self-assessment before asking for
tests to be conducted in the presence of PMA. Certificate will be issued by PMA representative after
successful completion of testing (for each milestone).
b. The Contractor, after having satisfied himself of completion of work, from FDMS/OLT at connecting
POP end to FTB at Mandal end, shall offer the work to PMA for conducting Testing. The work shall
be offered for Inspection as soon as link to Mandal is complete. Scope of Acceptance Testing in next
clause.
c. If the measurements (of length of OFC laid) taken by PMA are found to be lesser than the
measurements recorded by the Contractor responsible for recording the measurements, the
measurement taken by PMA shall prevail without prejudice to any punitive action against the
Contractor as per provisions of the contract and the testing officer of Contractor recording the
measurements.
d. The Contractor shall be obligated to remove defects/deficiencies pointed out by the PMA without any
additional cost. The Authority does not take any responsibility of return of defective used items /
items previously accepted by Contractor.
e. Factory Acceptance Test: Factory Acceptance Tests shall be conducted as per relevant Standards
and Codes on randomly selected final assemblies of selected equipment to be supplied. These tests
shall be carried out in the presence of the Authority’s authorized representatives unless waiver for
witnessing by the Authority is intimated to the Contractor. Factory acceptance testing shall be carried
out on ADSS, FODP, Splice enclosure, Approach cable, Test Equipment, installation accessories and
all other items to be supplied unless factory testing and inspection has been waived off by the
Authority.
Equipment shall not be shipped to the Authority until required factory tests are completed
satisfactorily, all variances are resolved, and the Authority has issued Dispatch Clearance, which may
be issued after completion of FAT by the Authority or his authorized representatives deputed for
carrying out the FAT. Successful completion of the factory tests and the Authority approval to ship
shall in no way constitute final acceptance of the system or any portion thereof.
The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall demonstrate the Technical characteristics of the Fiber Optic
cable & associated accessories in relation to this specifications and approved drawings and
documents. The list of factory acceptance tests shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard
FAT testing program. In general the FAT for other items shall include at least: Physical verification,
demonstration of Technical characteristics, various operational modes, functional interfaces, alarms
and diagnostics etc. For Test equipment, FAT shall include supply of proper calibration certificates,
demonstration of satisfactory.
209
There shall be no factory splice allowed within a continuous length of cable. Only one continuous
cable length shall be provided on each drum. The lengths of the cable to be supplied on each drum
shall be determined by a “cable drum schedule” prepared by the Contractor after the survey duly
taking into account sag, splicing, wastage, unequal heights etc. of the line route.
f.
Scope of Acceptance Testing: It is essential to verify the integrity and the capability of the Optical
Fiber Cable and to assess its readiness for intended services. This scope defines the methodology for
cable and accessories. The purpose of acceptance and testing is to verify integrity of measurement and
quality of work done.
ii. Fiber Optic cable link testing:
a. Fiber continuity and link attenuation (Bi-directional) between FODP connectors at two ends for each
fiber at 1310 and 1550 nm by OTDR
b. Fiber continuity and link attenuation (Bi-directional) between FODP connectors at two ends for each
fiber at 1310 and 1550 nm by Power meter & Laser source
c. Average fiber attenuation and average splice loss in the link including FODP
d. Proper termination and labelling of fiber and fiber optic cables at FODP
e. Data loss test and ensuring that the same is within the acceptable limits
iii. Termination arrangement at PoP location: The fibers of the cable shall be spliced to the pigtails for
connection to the optical line systems. Pigtails shall be duly terminated at the FDMS (fiber distribution
management system).
iv. Field Acceptance Test.
a. The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. If any equipment has
been damaged or for any reason does not comply with this Specification, the Contractor shall
provide and install replacement parts at its own cost and expense
b. As per Technical requirements, the Acceptance Test is required to be carried out for all 24 Fibers in
each cable section, and the Authority Acceptance Test schedule is to be followed for proper testing of
the OF cable network
c. The OF cable sections shall be identified on ABDs attached with the Acceptance Test Report and in
the GIS tool.
d. Testing shall be done in each OF cable section in one direction only and for two wavelengths viz.
1310 nm and 1550 nm using power meter and source. OTDR traces would be obtained for each OF
Cable sections to measure and record the splice loss wherever applicable.
e. A minimum length of 2.0 km shall be maintained for all the ADSS cable between splices except as
directed by the Client for any intermediate T-offs
v. End to End Testing of Optical Fiber Cable Route from PoP to PoP
This document defines the procedure to be adopted for end to end testing of the OF cable route from POP
to POPs.
210
a. The End to End testing from POP to POP shall be carried out using Power meter/source and with
OTDR after splicing OF cable.
b. The average attenuation (dB/Km) for cable shall be recorded
c. End to end Testing shall be done in one direction only for the two wavelengths i.e. 1310 nm & 1550
nm from POP to POP side using Power meter and source. The Fiber connected to each port of the
OTN shall also be tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded for future
reference.
d. The Contractor entrusted with the task of for laying the incremental OF cable shall be responsible for
co-ordination for conducting this test.
e. After carrying out this test, the respective POP shall be detected in the NMS by the central NOC team
of the Authority and shown as active at the Authority NOC. The Authority shall publish the list of
Mandals in each district which have gone active.
f. The format for End to End Testing of Cable Route is provided in this RFP.
11.
ADSS Fiber Link Length
The estimated ADSS optical fiber lengths for various feeder lengths from one terminal point (FODP) to the
other are given in the respective price schedules. However, the Contractor shall supply and install the
optical fiber cable as required based on actual work requirements finalized after detailed site survey carried
out by the Contractor during the project execution. The payment will be based on actual quantities of work
carried out by the Contractor, as per the measurement criterion set forth in these specifications.
12.
Commissioning Certificate
i.
Contractor shall be eligible to apply for Commissioning Certificate of a Mandal after successful completion
of End to End testing of a Mandal.
ii. The End to End Testing Report has to be submitted for obtaining the Commissioning Certificate.
iii. The Authority, without any prejudice, reserves the right to carry out any kind of inspection of the works
being carried out by PMA and Contractor at any time to ascertain its quantity and quality.
iv. Testing will also be done for NOC, Cable TV Head End, OSS and BSS, NMS, cloud services and all other
components supplied by the contractor as per the guidelines issued by the authority in this regard from time
to time.
13.
i.
Final Completion Certificate
Only upon completion of all Works as required to be done by Contractor for a given district, Contractor
shall be given the Final Completion Certificate for that district by the Authority.
211
Annexure VII
Verification & Measurement of Work Done
OFC Testing & Certification Formats
Test Format 1: Physical Inspection of ADSS OFC & Accessories
S.
No.
Name of Items
1
24 Core Optical
Fiber Cable
2
FDMS
3
FDB
4
Any other items
Quantities (or Length)
Installed / Used
(Verified as per Physical
Inspection)
Observations
Remarks
Accessories:
Length:
Sag:
Routing & Tagging of
fibres
Routing & Tagging of
Fibres
Test Format 2: Report for Splices on an ADSS Fiber Cable Section
Section Identity/No.
:_________
Section Length
:_________ Kms
Splice No.
:_________
Splice Loss (dB)
Tube Colour
Fiber Colour
Fiber Number
1310 nm
1550 nm
1
2
3
4
To
21
22
23
24
Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority Official
Date:
(Accepted / Rejected)
Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official
Date:
212
Remarks, if any:
Note: Splice Loss Measurement using OTDR
1. The fiber under test is connected to the OTDR which directly displays the splice loss after suitably adjusting
the markers. The observations shall be recorded for both the windows i.e. 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
2. For the splice(s) within the ADSS Fiber Cable section (in cases where the ADSS Fiber Cable section is more
than 2 Kms in length) the splice loss shall be measured for all the 24 fibers. The splice no. shall be counted
from POP side towards the nearest POPs. The test results shall be recorded in the format given in Form 3 of
the Formats for the Test Report.
3. Specification: Max Splice Loss 0.05 dB for one fiber per splice for straight/branch joints.
Test Format 3: Attenuation Test for ADSS Fiber Cable Section in the POP using Power Meter (for each
fiber)
Section Identity/No
:__________
Section Length :__________ Kms
Transmit Power (PTx) :__________ dB
Testing at 1310 nm
Fiber
No.
Testing at 1550 nm
Level at
Rec. End
Loss (in dB)
Attenuation
per KM
(dB/Km)
Level
at Rec.
End
Loss (in dB)
Attenuation per
KM (dB/Km)
(PRx)
(A=PTx-PRx)
(A/section
length)
(PRx)
(A=PTx-PRx)
(A/section length)
1
2
TO
23
24
Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority’s Official
Date:
(Accepted / Rejected)
Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official
Date:
Remarks, if any:
Note:
a. Carry out total section attenuation loss as mentioned in table above.
b. All the cables should meet the standard for both the wavelength i.e.1310 nm and 1550 nm as per
specification given above i.e. less than 0.43 dB/Km for 1310 nm and 0.30 dB/km.for1550 nm.
c. Connect standard optical source with 1310 nm and 1550 nm at particular level (say P1 dBm.) at one end of
the fiber. Measure with power meter the power at the other End of the fiber (say P2 dBm.)
Thus, attenuation of the fiber = (P1 - P2) dB.
213
d. Specifications
i. At l310nm
Total Link Loss ≤ 0.36 dB/km x Section Length + (0.05 dB/Splice) x (No. of Splices) + 0.5 dB x
No. of Connectors + splitter loss
ii. At l550nm
Total Link Loss ≤ 0.21dB/km x Section Length + (0.05 dB/Splice) x (No. of Splices) + 0.5 dB x
No. of Connectors
e. All the 24 Fibers of the ADSS Fiber Cable shall be tested with the pigtail spliced to each fiber one by one
for taking the test readings as per the table below.
f. Attenuation test shall also be taken with OTDR at 1550nm and 1310nm and printout for each fiber for each
window shall be obtained.
Preparation of OTDR Traces Report
a. This method uses an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR). Unlike a Power Meter, the OTDR can
identify and locate the position of each component in the network. The OTDR will reveal splice loss,
connector loss and reflectance, and the total end to end loss.
b. For End-to-End measurements including joint enclosures must be carried out to document the
characterization of the joint loss and the total link loss. The OTDR measurement must be conducted
upstream (i.e., from the OLT to POP).
c. Carry out OTDR measurements and take traces taken on all wavelengths (1310 nm / 1550 nm).Soft copy of
this report needs to made available for updating in Test reports
Electronics & Network Equipment testing & certification
The PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule during the installation of Electronics & Network
Equipment at the field level. The PMA needs to test and certify the each location where electronics and network
equipment is installed for its operations and acceptance.
Note: Necessary testing equipment required to meet standards compliance will be provided by the contractor. After
completion of the testing for each site PMA need to submit the report in prescribed format to the Authority’s
central team. PMA will use the equipment to validate the reports submitted by the Contractor.
214
Electronics & Network Equipment Testing & Certification Format
Test Format 4: Field Acceptance Test for POP
Name of District:
Name of Mandal:
PoP Name:
Latitude & Longitude:
Test Requirements:
Cable Attenuation per km (dB)
Total Physical Cable Length (km)
Splice Loss Mean Value (dB)
Total Number of Splices
Maximum Connectors Loss (dB)
Total Number of Connectors
Total Section Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1550 nm
Test Period: From _______________ to ___________________
Total Route Length of ADSS Fiber Cable laid from POP to POP: ________________ Kms
Total ADSS Fiber Cable length tested: ________________ Kms
No. of Straight Joints: ______________
No. of Branch Joints: ______________
No. of FDBs: __________________
Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority’s Official
Date:
(Accepted / Rejected)
Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official
Date:
Remarks, if any:
215
NOC & Point of Presence (PoP) Testing & Certification
PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule during the set-up, installation and commissioning of
Network Operations Centre and Points of Presence. The PMA needs to test and certify commissioning the each PoP
and the centralized NOC including other components as mentioned in contractor RFP like OSS, BSS, NMS, Cable
TV Head end and other components.
NOC & PoP Testing & Certification Format
Test Format 5: End to End Testing of Route From PoP to PoP
1. The End to End testing from POP to POP shall be carried out using Power meter/source and with OTDR after
splicing Optical Fiber Cable.
2. The average attenuation (dB/Km) for cable shall be recorded in the given format:
a. Tested Length
: ________ Km
b. Total loss on the length
: ________ dB
c. Average Attenuation per Km.
: ________ dB/Km
d. Fiber length used
: ________ Km
e. Net loss for Fiber at FDMS
: ________ dB
3. End to end Testing shall be done in one direction only for the two wavelengths i.e. 1310 nm & 1550 nm from
POP to POP side using Power meter and source. The Fiber connected to each port of the OTN shall also be
tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded for future reference.
4. The Implementing Agency entrusted with the task of for laying the Optical Fiber Cable shall be responsible for
co-ordination for conducting this test.
5. After carrying out this test, the respective POP shall be detected in the NMS by the central NOC team of the
Authority and shown as active at the Authority NOC. The Authority shall publish the list of Mandals and
Substations in each district which have gone active.
Test Format 6: End to End Testing of Route from PoP to OLT
1. The End to End testing of the ADSS Fiber Cable route from the POP to OLT shall be done by measuring the
receive power at each POP location using the power meter and source. Thus total attenuation would be
recorded.
2. The attenuation shall be tested from POP to each FDB at POP in one direction only for two wavelengths 1310
nm and 1550 nm.
3. The tests shall be carried on the fiber connected to each of utilized ports.
4. The test results shall be recorded in the format given in the following table. Separate sheet shall be prepared for
each port.
5. Specifications: The total attenuation from POP to POP at each location should be well within the available
power budget for GPON equipment which is 28 dB. The max value should be about 25 dB.
6. The fiber connected to each port shall also be tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded
for future reference.
216
Test Format 7: NOC Active Components Test
S. No
Description
Section 1
A
B
C
PMA Remarks
Acceptance Tests
After completion of the installation work, the complete system
shall be tested for H/Ware and S/Ware functions and features.
Contractor’s engineers, under the supervision and guidance of
the Contractor’s experts will carry out this work. Thereafter, the
Contractor, along with the representative nominated by the
Authority, shall carry out the Acceptance tests to prove
performance of the different equipment, sub-system, and the
overall installation to the entire satisfaction of the Authority.
The Contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance before the
start of the acceptance tests, a list of all the acceptance test and
procedures, it proposes to conduct to demonstrate that the
system satisfies all the requirements of the specifications. The
Authority shall have the right to propose modifications or
additions to tests or measuring techniques before
commencements of tests.
As a part of the acceptance tests, it shall be checked that:
All documentation should be supplied & fully updated.
All hardware and software items are in perfect working order
at the time of taking over.
Acceptance tests, including stability test as defined will have to
be completed to the full satisfaction of the Authority.
All the network elements & route shall be brought in the NMS
with complete testing of FCAPS functionality.
Section-2
A
B
Testing of Technical Specification & Equipment
Configuration
System Requirement.
The DWDM equipment shall allow multiple wavelengths to be
added or dropped from each of the terminal stations
The interfaces are to be G.709 compliant.
The DWDM system should have the OTN compliant interfaces
& Client interfaces like SDH/SONET
Mandatory laser shutdown shall be implemented in case of fiber
break.
Optical supervisory channel (OSC):
Testing of Link Margin / Route –Span Design
217
The proposed DWDM system should be capable of supporting
C
D
Minimum no. of regenerators required in a link.
Maximum no. of spans supported without regeneration in a
link.
If lesser no. of regenerators are required then the Contractor
may propose the no. of regenerators
The link engineering calculations along with link margins If the
system permits
All the link margin calculations shall be done based on EOL of
electronics.
Testing of Mandatory design parameters:
Return Loss shall be at least 40 dB
4dB end to end OSNR margin
Per span margin shall be more than or equal to 4 dB
Auto shut down of laser & power amplifier
System should support Automatic Level control, Automatic
Gain control, and Automatic equalization of the links for per
channel addition/deletion.
NMS capability testing
Regarding NMS functionality the performance management
capability to be available on per channel basis in addition to
line side.
Alarms:
Derived Power supply failure alarm
Loss of input at Optical Add/Drop multiplex equipment
Input channel failure Optical Add/Drop multiplex equipment.
Hardware mismatch alarm
Loss of Supervisory Channel
End-to-End Network Testing & Certification
The PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule and needs to test and certify commissioning End-toEnd Network Operations for the AP Fiber Grid Project Phase I. This will require testing of all installed
infrastructure, hardware and software of the project, Standard Operating Procedures for NOC, Processes for
Network Management, Service Provisioning & Monitoring. The End-to-End Network testing will be required to be
done in phases along the commissioning of the districts.
218
Annexure VIII
Project Timelines, SLA and Penalties
Timelines for Implementation
1.
Contractor shall carry out due diligence and prepare an implementation plan for its package. It has to predetermine which Mandals are to be covered in which Quarter of the implementation period.
2.
The implementation plan shall be verified by PMA and submitted to the Authority for approval.
3.
The implementation plan shall have minimum periodic targets as mentioned in the table below.
4.
Contractor has to carry out the execution of the project as per the implementation plan.
5.
The plan should follow a general pattern of implementation as given below:
S. No.
Project Deliverable / Milestone
Timelines (D + n)
in Calendar Weeks
1
Team Mobilization & Project Inception Report
2
Route Survey & Network Validation
3
Commissioning of Network Operating Centre, Headend and
all other components of NOC
D + 16
Commissioning in the ‘first’ 2 identified Districts (at least
95% PoPs) and providing service to the first customer
D + 18
5
Commissioning in ‘additional’ 5 identified Districts (at least
95% PoPs)
D + 26
6
Commissioning in the remaining 6 Districts (at least 95%
PoPs)
D + 34
4
7
Commissioning of all balance PoPs in the State
8
Completion of all left over works & Project Go-Live
D+2
D+4
D + 37
D + 39
SLA & Penalties during Operations Phase and also during Phase Commissioning Period (for the sites that
are commissioned)
1.
2.
3.
4.
For the purpose of these calculations the route shall be defined as the section of fiber as unique identifiable
route.
In case of route failure due to cable cut/damage when the services are disrupted /not available for a period
up to 8 Hours, the fault(s) shall be treated as Severity Level 1. In such cases, if fault is restored within 8
hours there shall be no penalty.
In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 8 hours up to 10 hours, the fault shall be treated as
Severity Level 2.
In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 10 hours, the fault shall be treated as Severity Level 3.
219
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 1 week, the fault shall be treated as Severity Level 4.
The penalty for each of these Levels shall be as tabulated below. In case there is/are additional fault(s) on
the route which are yet to be repaired, the already existing severity level shall be maintained and the
severity shall be further raised depending upon the restoration time of the latest fault beginning with the
earliest fault since the downtime of the services is in concurrent
Partial restoration of fault resulting in deteriorated functioning of the system shall not be treated as a
repaired fault under any circumstances and the down time till the proper restoration of fault shall be
counted in full.
In cases where the fault is restored by replacing the faulty FDMS unit/connectors or by shifting of working
ports to spare port in order to expeditiously restore the services, the fault would continue to be treated in
Severity Level 4 till such time as the faulty unit/port is rectified. However if the Technical
parameters/arrangement provided in the alternate solution are acceptable to the Authority the fault would
not be raised to Severity Level 4 The decision regarding acceptance of the alternate solution shall be at the
sole discretion of the Authority.
The penalties to be imposed for the restoration of different severity levels of faults are defined below:
Severity Level
Level 1
Level 2
10.
MTTR
Up to 8 Hours
8 Hours to 10
Hours
Penalty
Nil
INR 10000 per route fault
Level 3
Beyond 10 Hours
Level 4
Beyond 1 week
Additional INR 4000 per Hour subject to
maximum of INR 15000 per fault per route
fault
Additional INR 1000 per day or part thereof
subject to maximum of INR 50000 per fault per
route. Any other concurrent fault on the same
route to be treated as separate fault.
Fiber cuts per 1000 KM/month
KPI Value
10
11
12
13 and above
11.
Percentage of non-compliance to approved network changes as per process
KPI Value
2
3
4
5 and above
12.
Penalty
Nil
INR 2000 per cut
Additional INR 500 per cut
Additional INR 1000 per cut
Penalty
Nil
INR 2000 per instance
Additional INR 500 per instance
Additional INR 1000 per instance
Link Margin Values degradation in ring topology of DWDM network on monthly basis.
KPI Value
4 db
Penalty
Nil
220
3 db
2 db
0 db and Below
13.
INR 2000 per db
INR 10000 per db
INR 25000 per db
Percentage of non-compliance to approved uptime for NOC including CATV Headend
Value on monthly
basis
99%
Below 98%
Below 97%
Below 96%
14.
Penalty
Nil
INR 100000 per instance
INR 250000 per instance
INR 500000 per instance
Percentage of non-compliance to approved network uptime for each POPs
Value on monthly
basis
Below 98%
Below 97%
Below 96%
95% and Below
15.
Penalty
Nil
INR 10000 per instance
INR 25000 per instance
INR 50000 per instance
The penalties to be imposed for the restoration of different severity levels of faults for IT and Non IT
electronic equipments and MTTR prescribed below shall be inclusive of commuting time and time taken
for replacement of faulty OF cable etc.
Severity Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
MTTR
Upto 8 hrs
8 – 10 hrs
Penalty for each equipment
Nil
INR 5,000/- per fault
Additional INR 500 per hour subject to maximum of INR 15,000
Beyond 10 hrs
per fault
Additional INR 1000 per day or part thereof subject to maximum
Beyond 1 week
of INR 25000 per fault per any other concurrent fault on the
same route to be treated as separate fault
Note:
1. Bidder needs to include the requisite licenses of monitoring tool for automatic monitoring of all
SLAs.
2. All the operational SLAs are measured on weekly & monthly basis. The penalties will be levied on
monthly basis and will be deducted from the payment due to the contractor.
221
16.
Other SLA Provisions / Additional Service Levels that need to be complied with by the Contractor
during the entire contract duration of the Project
A. Other Service Levels 1:
AP Fiber grid’s core network requirements are based on needs of advanced uses like IoT, telemedicine,
telepresence, precision agriculture, smart power grids, 3G and LTE. These requirements are measured endto-end from SHQ (not including the SHQ routers for routing to external traffic) down to the GPON port
(not including customer CPE):
a) Packet Loss: 0.1% for GPON to SHQ and for any GPON to any GPON.
b) End to end latency (from both SHQ to GPON and any GPON to any GPON) less than 4 ms for any
GPON pair or any GPON to SHQ plus transmission latency of 5ms/ 1000km which shall be computed
using the shortest GIS path on the network for the given pair of nodes.
c) Jitter less than 1.5 ms and must also meet TEC GR requirements.
d) Timing and phase requirements from any GPON to any GPON to match or exceed LTE and Next
Generation Mobile Network requirements.
All GPONs must have capability to provide LTE circuits to the nearest cell towers or other such needs
These requirements are for 3-Sigma of the time periods measured and apply for any GPON to any GPON
and any GPON to any SHQ node measured for all GPONs. The measured time periods are 1 hr, 1 day and
last 7 days in 15 minute increments, except for nodes where the total traffic across the node or pair of nodes
in question exceeds the total rated traffic. In such a case reasons or error codes must be clearly documented
and reported in the dashboard in realtime subject to stated reporting delays.
Note, dynamic traffic spikes and changes shall not be a valid reason for SLA failure unless the spikes exceed total
rated physical capacity of the equipment(s) in question as specified at bid time. And when such spikes do happen,
the SLA failure is expected to last no more than 500s longer than after the spike falling below rated traffic
including the estimated time needed to flush backlog of dropped packets.
To aid monitoring and management of the above SLA, contractor must provide the rated capacity of each network
element which shall meet the criteria in the SLA as defined above and elsewhere. If the “rated” capacity is less than
90% of the advertized capacity (e.g. as understood in the industry for that equipment, standard and link type), an
analysis and explanation shall be provided.
The above assumes an architecture of a dual NOC SHQ, a set of DHQs in one or more rings, a set of ZHQs in rings
connected to at least one DHQ, a set of MHQs in either existing rings or new rings connected to ZHQ(s) or direct
single line (can be shared) spurs from one of the existing nodes on one of the aforementioned rings. And finally
GPONs on one of these nodes or connected to one of the MHQs again on a spur (point to point or shared).
In addition to these, the following is the maximum allowable latency on any piece of equipment. The requirement
for each layer applies if the equipment supports these layers
● Layer 1 switching: 10 micro-seconds
● Layer 2, 2.5, 3 switching: 330 micro-seconds
This SLA remains in force for any expansion (i.e. add, delete, change) of the network. It is the responsibility of the
maintenance and management team to ensure all proposed expansion complies with this SLA before undertaking
such expansion
222
Failure to meet any of the criteria ( other Service Levels A) shall be considered a significant SLA violation with
penalties of INR 10 lakhs per day for every day of violation across the network. Maximum penalty for any / all of
the above violations will be INR 10 lakhs per day.
B. Other Requirements:
Note, the contractor must supply these numbers per equipment and show calculations of how these requirements
will be achieved as part of its technical proposal and in addition:
1. Demonstrate the same in test conditions with 100% rated traffic conditions as part of equipment
acceptance time. Equipment or installation fees shall be withheld until these results are reported both for
supplied and installed equipment.
2. For each unique configuration of each network element and combination, do complete testing using RFC
2544 and other RFCs to test the above parameters and where possible follow TEC guidelines and
provide these test results before installing said equipment and configuration.
3. On installation, do end-to-end testing at rated capacity for several of the worst pairs of consumer nodes
(GPONs). Indicative nodes shall be proposed by the bidder and several others may be added by the TEC
at any time before or after the tests subject to total node pairs tested being less than 200 where at most 50
are proposed by the bidder.
4. Log the above parameters at each equipment and node, and report the same in 15 minute intervals at
least with this data displayed at an aggregated level at the state, district, ZHQ, MHQ, PHQ level in 1 hr,
1 day and moving 1 week graphs
These criteria subject to less than rated IP + bulk bandwidth traffic (which shall also be provided as part of the bid)
flowing through the relevant node.
Failure to meet these criteria (B. Other Requirements) shall be considered a significant SLA violation with
penalties of 10L per day for every day of violation across the network and if only for a part of the network,
proportionally with a minimum of 10% of the penalty as long as no node experiences worse than 3x of this criteria
on an extended basis (multiple weeks), at which point the total penalty shall apply. Note, if more than 1% of nodes
experience violations or more than 0.5% on a sustained basis during the first month, all payments including
installation payments shall be withheld until this is rectified and demonstrated for 3 months running.
223
Annexure IX
Roles & Responsibilities of Stakeholders
Project is envisaged to be executed in two stages:
A) Implementation
B) Operations & Maintenance
The roles and responsibilities of the key stakeholders during the three phases are detailed in the Responsibility Matrix below:
Responsibility Matrix
Legend
Primary
Entity with primary responsibility for an activity is expected to drive the activity
and ensure successful completion
Secondary
Entity with secondary responsibility for an activity is expected to provide
support to the primary owner
Project Stage: Planning
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
The Authority
Contractor
PMA
Approvals and Authorizations
Securing Right Of Way
(ROW) permissions through
State
Electricity
MOU
agreements
Securing permissions for
access to Mandal and other
offices
Implementation Schedule
Primary
Primary
Submission of preliminary
implementation schedule
Implementation Plan collation
from Contractor
Information Sharing
Designating a PMA Nodal
officer for each District
Designate
one
senior
Contractor
official
to
coordinate with the corporate
office of the Authority
Designate one senior PMA
official to coordinate with the
corporate office of the
Authority
Publishing acceptance, testing
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
224
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
and sign off procedures
Publishing guidelines for
maintenance of Contractor
warehouse records
Publishing
of
templates,
checklists, data submission
formats
Project Management Setup
Commissioning of Project
Management Tool
Training on usage of project
management tool
Entry of detailed survey data
in Project management tool
Publishing
procedures,
guidelines, checklists and
report formats
Training
Publish training schedules
Implementation
procedure
training to Contractor and
PMA
The Authority
Contractor
PMA
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
225
Secondary
Project Stage: Implementation
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
The Authority
Site Access and Verification
Coordination
with
local
authorities for access to site
Secondary
locations (Mandal, Substation
sites etc.)
Site level verification of Route
Survey
Initiate requests for deviation
from routes survey and
engineering guidelines
First level verification and
approval of deviations from
engineering guidelines and
route survey
Final approval on deviations
from engineering guidelines
Primary
and route survey
Site level coordination and
verification
of
Mandal
equipment
availability
at
Mandal
Electricity connection and
coordination for subsequent
bill
payment
during
implementation phase
Coordination for payment of
Mandal electricity bills during
implementation phase
Resolution of discrepancies
with respect to readiness of
sites
for
equipment
installation.
Procurement
Procurement
of
OFC,
Equipments and accessories
Provisioning of testing tools
(PON OTDR, Roadometer,
Power meter etc.) for field
acceptance testing and end-toend testing
Material Delivery
OFC,
Equipments
and
accessories
delivery
at
designated warehouses
Ensuring
collection
and
replacement of fault material
Contractor
Primary
226
PMA
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Activities
Stakeholder’s Role
The Authority
at Contractor warehouse is
completed by the supplier
Delivery of
Mandal and
Substation equipment at site
location
Installation of equipment at
site location
Maintaining
Contractor
warehouse records as per
agreed procedures
Transport of OFC, Electronics
and other accessories to site
location
Storing material at site
Laying of OFC on Pole
Splicing
of
OFC
and
installation of joint enclosures
Preparation of ABD’s with
GIS co-ordinates of the entire
route
Capturing and Uploading GIS
data of the entire route in the
GIS tool
Verification of GIS data
uploaded by Contractor in the
GIS tool
Conducting tests as per Field
Acceptance Test Procedures
for OFC laid
Provisioning of equipment for
photography
Take site images at designated
locations and images of the
testing procedures carried out
Approval of material supplied
by
Contractor
as
per
Engineering guidelines
Approval of Field Acceptance
Test Reports
Procurement,
supply,
installation,
testing,
commissioning and acceptance
of equipment
Conducting End-to-End Test
as per Test Procedures
Approval of End-to-End Test
Reports
Request for Commissioning
certificate
Contractor
PMA
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
227
Secondary
Activities
Issuance of Commissioning
certificate
Request for Final Completion
certificate
Issuance of Final Completion
certificate
Regular update of project
progress
on
project
management tool as well as
sharing with relevant officials
as per laid down procedures
Upkeep and safety of material
till commissioning
Request
approval
for
deviations from specified
standards and engineering
guidelines
First level verification of
deviations from specified
standards and engineering
guidelines
Final approval of deviations
from specified standards and
engineering guidelines
Request approval for variation
from Contractor Schedule
Request approval for variation
from PMA Schedule
Approve requests for variation
from implementation schedule
Stakeholder’s Role
The Authority
Contractor
PMA
Primary
Primary
Primary
(for Contractor Deliverables)
Primary
(for PMA
Deliverables)
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Update of actuals against the
planned
estimates
(for
schedule, material, sites status
etc.)
Communicate
updated
schedule to all stakeholders
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Contractor Warehouse Audit
Publish
warehouse
audit
schedule
Sharing of warehouse audit
schedule with Contractor
Timely sharing of warehouse
records
Ensuring access to warehouse
as per agreed schedule
Ensuring
availability
of
relevant warehouse records
Primary
Primary
228
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Secondary
Activities
Physical stock (Quantity and
Quality) reconciliation with
warehouse records
Invoice and Payment
Submission
of
Contractor
invoices with all relevant test
reports
Verification of Contractor work
and approval of invoices and
relevant test reports submitted
by Contractor
Final Verification of document
submitted by Contractor and
certification by PMA
Approval
of
Contractor
invoices and release of payment
Submission of PMA invoices
Verification of MONITORING
AGENCY invoices
Approval of PMA invoices and
release of payment
Monitoring of implementation,
calculation of LD and penalties
etc.
Imposition of LD and Penalty
on the net payment to
Contractor
and
PMA
respectively
Prepare Monthly Progress
Report for work done in the
respective work package and
submit to PMA & the
Authority.
Review Monthly Progress
Report
submitted
by
Contractor for work done in the
respective work package and
submit to the Authority
Stakeholder’s Role
The Authority
Contractor
PMA
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Primary
Project Stage: Maintenance
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
The Authority
Maintenance Requirements
Centralized monitoring through
Contractor
Primary
229
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
NOC/NMS
Commissioning of centralized
tool for fault reporting and
diagnosis
Formation of FRTs
Route patrolling for all OF cable
routes
Measurement and upkeep of
optical power budget parameters
of both incremental cable
Replace the high loss cable
sections
Provide sufficient maintenance
infrastructure/teams as may be
essential to provide services to
the Authority as per the Service
Level Agreement (SLA).
Shifting of the existing OFC
route/section
Fault Repair
Formation of FRTs
Availability of necessary testing
and splicing tools with FRTs
Assigning and communicating
fault incidents
Fault diagnosis and reporting
Carrying out repair work
including
replacement
of
material if required within the
defined SLA
Material procurement and warehousing
Procurement of all material
needed for maintenance.
Storing and warehousing of
material
Maintaining and submission of
warehouse records as per
procedures
Upkeep and safety of material
during complete maintenance
phase
QA and Audit
Warehouse audit
Primary
Maintenance
Phase
SLA
Primary
monitoring for Contractor
Update of ABDs and GIS data
Preparation and submission of
updated site data
Verification of data and updating Primary
The Authority
Contractor
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
230
Stakeholder’s Role
Activities
The Authority
repository
Invoice Submission and Payment Release
Submission of invoices and
support documentation as per
agreed payment schedule
Verification of invoices and
Primary
support documentation
Calculating SLA penalties, if
Primary
any.
Release of quarterly O&M
Primary
payment
Coordination Activities
Coordination for electricity bill
payment during maintenance
phase
Contractor
Primary
Secondary
Primary
x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x
231
Download PDF
Similar pages